Skip to main content

Full text of "Catalogue number [of the Bulletin]"

See other formats


WELLESLEY  COLLEGE 
BULLETIN 


CALENDAR 
t918-l9I9 


WELLESLEY,  MASSACHUSETTS 
JANUARY,  J9J9 


PUBLISHED  BY  THE  COLLEGE  IN  JANUARY,  MAY.  JUNE, 
NOVEMBER.  DECEMBER 

Entered  as  second-class  matter  December  20,  1911,  at  the  post-office,  Wellesley, 
Massachusetts,  under  Act  of  Congress  of  July  16,  1894. 

SERIES  S  NUMBER  1 


THE    \irBCITE    HOTJSE 
WASHINGTON 

My  dear  Mr.  Secretary: 

I  am  pleased  to  know  that  despite  the  unusual  burdens  im- 
posed upon  our  people  by  the  war  they  have  maintained  their 
schools  and  other  agencies  of  education  so  nearly  at  their 
normal  efficiency.  That  this  should  be  continued  throughout 
the  war  and  that,  in  so  far  as  the  draft  law  will  permit,  there 
should  be  no  falling  off  in  attendance  in  elementary  schools, 
high  schools  or  colleges  is  a  matter  of  the  very  greatest  im- 
portance, affecting  both  our  strength  in  war  and  our  national 
welfare  and  efficiency  when  the  war  is  over.  So  long  as  the 
war  continues  there  will  be  constant  need  of  very  large  num- 
bers of  men  and  women  of  the  highest  and  most  thorough  train- 
ing for  war  service  in  many  lines.  After  the  war  there  will  be 
urgent  need  not  only  for  trained  leadership  in  all  lines  of  indus- 
trial, commercial,  social  and  civic  life,  but  for  a  very  high 
average  of  intelligence  and  preparation  on  tlie  part  of  all  the 
people.  I  would  therefore  urge  that  the  people  continue  to 
give  generous  support  to  their  schools  of  all  grades  and  that 
the  schools  adjust  themselves  as  wisely  as  possible  to  the  new 
conditions  to  the  end  that  no  boy  or  girl  shall  have  less  oppor- 
tunity for  education  because  of  the  war  and  that  the  Nation 
may  be  strengthened  as  it  can  only  be  through  the  right  educa- 
tion of  all  its  people. 

Cordially  and  sincerely  yours, 

WOODROW  WILSON 
Hon,  Franklin  K.  Lane, 
Secretary  of  the  Interior, 


WELLESLEY   COLLEGE 
CALENDAR 


1918-1919 


CORRESPONDENCE 


AH  inquiries  regarding  admission  should  be  addressed  to  the  Secretary 
to  the  Board  of  Admission. 

Applications  for  general  information  should  be  addressed  to  Miss 
Mary  Caswell.  As  Secretary  of  the  Appointment  Bureau,  Miss 
Caswell  is  also  prepared  to  furnish  full  and  confidential  information  in 
regard  to  the  qualifications,  character,  and  experience  of  former  stu- 
dents of  the  College  as  candidates  for  teaching  and  other  vocations. 
Former  students  of  the  College  who  wish  situations  have  the  aid  of  the 
Appointment  Bureau. 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS 


AND 


Correspondence 
Calendar  .... 
Board  of  Trustees 

Standing  Committees   . 
Oppicers    of    Instruction 
Government     . 

Standing  Committees   . 
Foundation  and  Purpose 
Admission  .... 

Definition  of  Requirements 

By  Examination    . 

By  New  Plan 

To  Advanced  Standing 

Of  Candidates  for  M.A.  Degree 

Of  Students  not  Candidates  for 

a  Degree 

Courses  of  Instruction: — 

Archaeology,  Classical  . 

Art 

Astronomy 

Biblical  History     .... 

Botany 

Chemistry 

Economics 

Education 

English  Literature 

English  Composition     . 

English  Language 

French     

Geology  and  Geography 

German 

Greek 

History    .       ... 

Hygiene 


S3 
54 
58 
60 
62 
66 
68 
72 
76 
82 
84 
85 
89 
92 
97 
100 
106 


Italian     .... 

Latin        .... 

Mathematics 

Music       .... 

Philology,  Comparative 

Philosophy  and  Psychology 

Physics    .... 

Reading  and  Speaking 

Spanish    .... 

Zoology  and  Physiology 
Examinations  (College)  . 
Degrees: — 

Requirements  for  B.A.  Degree 

Requirements  for  M.A.  Degree 

Expenses   

Residence         .... 

Health 

Fellowships  and  Scholarships 

For  Graduates 

For  Undergraduates 

Libraries 

Gymnasium        .... 
Art  Building  and  Collections 
Music  Equipment   . 
Laboratories  and   Scientific 

Collections 
Forms  of  Bequest 
Degrees  Conferred  in  1918 
Certificates  in  Hygiene 
Honor  Scholarships 
Summary  of  Students  . 
Officers  of  Alumna  Association 
Index  


PAGE 

112 
114 
118 
121 
128 
129 
134 
137 
139 
140 
143 

143 
146 
146 
149 
150 
150 
ISO 
153 
IS8 
IS8 
IS9 
159 

160 
164 
16s 
167 
168 
170 
171 
173 


1918 

1919 

1920 

SHIS 

3anuav? 

3m 

3anuariB 

3 

M 

T 

W 

T 

F 

S 

s 

M 

T 

W 

T|F 

S 

s 

H 

T 

W 

T 

F 

s 

8 

M 

T 

W 

T 

F 

2 

3 
~3 

I 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

.. 

.. 

. 

I 

2 

3 

4 

I 

2 

3 

4 

s 

.. 

.. 

.. 

I 

7 

8 

9 

10 

II 

13 

13 

s 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

II 

12 

4 

S 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

M 

'5 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

12 

n 

14 

I") 

16 

17 

18 

13 

14 

XS 

16 

17 

18 

19 

II 

12 

I? 

14 

IS 

16 

•7 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

2S 

20 

31 

22 

2.3 

24 

25 

26 

i8 

19 

30 

21 

22 

33 

24 

29 

'!?: 

'.'. 

!! 

26 

27 

38 

29 

30 

31 

27 

". 

29 

30 

31 

25 

26 

37 

28 

29 

30 

31 

HuflUflt 

ifebiuav? 

Buduet 

jfebruarie    | 

I 

3I  ; 

I 

., 

.. 

.. 

I    S 

I 

2 

3I  4 

S 

61  7 

4 

s 

6 

7 

8 

910 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

3 

4 

S 

6 

7 

8   9 

9 

10 

II 

12 

13I14 

II 

12 

13 

'4 

>5 

16117 

9 

10 

" 

13 

13 

14 

IS 

10 

II 

12 

I- 

14 

i>ii6 

IS 

16 

17 

18 

19 

30  21 

i8 

19 

20 

21 

22 

232. 

16 

17 

18 

«9 

30 

21 

33 

17 

18 

<9 

30 

21 

2223 

23 

23 

24 

2S 

36 

2728 

25 

26 

27 

=1=!l^°i^: 

'.' 

'.'. 

'.' 

36 

27 

" 

•• 

24 
31 

25 

26 

27 

28 

2930 

29 

•• 

Septembei- 

/iDavcb 

Septembei- 

imaicb      1 

I 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

•  • 

■■ 

.. 

.. 

1 

.. 

I 

3 

3 

4 

S 

6 

.. 

X 

3 

3    4 

S 

6 

8 

9 

10 

II 

.2 

13 

14 

2 

3 

4 

S 

6 

7 

8 

7 

8 

9 

10 

II 

12 

13 

7 

8 

9 

10  II 

12 

13 

'S 

16 

'7 

18 

19 

20 

21 

9 

10 

II 

12 

13 

14 

IS 

[4 

IS 

16 

17 

iS 

19 

20 

14 

IS 

16 

17  It 

19 

20 

22 

23 

24 

25 

27 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

21 

33 

23 

24 

2S 

26 

27 

22 

23 

242s 

36 

27 

29 

30 

•  • 

•• 

23 

24 

25 

3b 

27 

28 

29 

28 

29 

30 

28 

29 

30 

31  .. 

.. 

30 

31 

..|.. 

©ctobev 

Ilpdl 

October 

Bpril       1 

I 

2  3 

4 

5 

.. 

I 

3 

3 

4 

S 

I 

2 

3 

4 

I 

2|3 

6   7 

8 

910 

II 

12 

6 

7 

i 

9 

10 

13 

.s 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

II 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9;I0 

13  14 

'5 

16  17 

18 

19 

»3 

14 

IS 

16 

17 

18 

19 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

11 

12 

13 

14 

IS 

I617 

20  21 

22 

23I24 

25 

26 

20 

21 

22 

33 

34 

3"; 

26 

19 

20 

21 

22 

21 

24 

2S 

18 

19 

30 

21 

23 

2324 

2728 

29 

'1^: 

27 

28 

29 

30 

't! 

28 

29 

30 

31 

25 

36 

27 

'" 

29 

30  .. 

movcjubev 

/©as 

IRovembei- 

m»>2      1 

3 

4 

5 

"e 

*7 

I 
8 

2 

9 

4 

'5 

6 

7 

I 
8 

2 

9 

3 

10 

3 

3 

4 

5 

"e 

7 

8 

2 

3 

4 

S 

t; 

8 

10 

II 

12 

1.1 

14 

»5 

16 

II 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

9 

10 

II 

13 

14 

IS 

9 

10 

II 

13 

13 14 

IS 

'7 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

2- 

19 

20 

21 

22 

21 

24 

16 

17 

18 

19 

30 

21 

22 

16 

17 

18 

19 

3021 

22 

24 

25 

2627 

28 

29 

30 

25 

2627 

=8 

CJ 

30 

31 

23 

30 

34 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

23 

30 

li 

25 

26 

2728 

!? 

December 

5une 

December 

3une       1 

I  2 

3   4 

S 

6 

7 

1 

3 

3 

4 

S 

6 

7 

I 

3 

3 

4 

S 

6 

..).. 

I 

3 

3   4|5| 

«  9 

10  11 

12 

13 

n 

8 

9 

10 

II 

12 

13 

14 

7 

8 

9 

12 

13 

67 

8 

9 

10  II  12I 

1516 

17  18 

19 

20 

21 

IS 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

14 

IS 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

1314 

IS 

16 

17  18 

19 

2223 

242s 

26 

27 

28 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

31 

33 

23 

24 

2S 

26 

27 

302I 

32 

23 

242s 

36 

2930 

31  .. 

^ 

.. 

= 

29 

!I 

= 

^ 

= 

28 

29 

30 

31 

^ 

^ 

2728 

29 

30 

11 

CALENDAR 


Academic  Year  1918-1919 

Examinations September  16-19,  19 18. 

Academic  year  begins Monday,  September  23. 

Holiday,  Thanksgiving  Day,  November  28. 

Recess  from  12.30  p.  m.  Wednesday,  December  18,  1918,  until  12.30 
p.  M.  Wednesday,  January  8,  1919. 
Registration  closes  for  all  students  at  12.30  p.  m.  Wednesday,  January  8, 
Second  Semester  begins        ....  Monday,  February  10. 

Recess  from  12.30  p.  m.  Friday,  March  28,  until  12.30  p.  m.  Tuesday, 
April  8. 
Registration  closes  for  all  students  at  12.30  p.  m.  Tuesday,  April  8. 

Commencement '        Friday,  June  13. 

Alumna  Day Saturday,  June  14. 

Academic  Year  1919-1920 

Examinations September  15-18,  19 19. 

Registration  closes  for  new  students  at  10  p.  m.  Monday,  September  15. 
Registration  closes  for  all  other  students  at  10  p.  m.  Friday,  September 

19. 
Halls  of  Residence  open  for  new  students  at  9  a.  m.  Monday,  September 

15- 
Halls  of  Residence  open  for  all  other  students  at  2  p.  m.  Thursday, 

September  18. 

Academic  year  begins Monday,  September  22. 

Holiday,  Thanksgiving  Day,  November  27. 

Recess  from  12.30  p.  m.  Wednesday,  December  17,  1919,  until  12.30 

p.  m.  Wednesday,  January  7,  1920. 
Registration  closes  for  all  students  at  12.30  p.  m.  Wednesday,  January  7. 
Second  Semester  begins       ....  Monday,  February  9. 

Recess  from  12.30  p.  m.  Friday,  March  26,  until  12.30  p.  m.  Tuesday, 

April  6. 
Registration  closes  for  all  students  at  12.30  p.  m.  Tuesday,  April  6. 

Commencement Tuesday,  June  15. 

Alumna  Day Wednesday,  June  16. 


Trustees 


1918-19 


BOARD   OF  TRUSTEES 


EDWIN  FARNHAM   GREENE,  B.A Boston. 

President  of  the  Board. 

WILLIAM  HENRY  LINCOLN BrookUne. 

Vice  President. 

SARAH  LAWRENCE Boston. 

Secretary. 


LEWIS  KENNEDY  MORSE,  B.A.,  LL.B. 
Treasurer. 


Boston. 


WILLIAM  FAIRFIELD  WARREN,  ST.D.,  LL.D 
LILIAN  HORSFORD   FARLOW     .... 

EDWIN  HALE  ABBOT,  LL.B 

LOUISE  McCOY  NORTH,  M.A 

ANDREW  FISKE,  Ph.D 

GEORGE  EDWIN  HORR,  D.D.,  LL.D.  .  . 
GEORGE  HOWE  DAVENPORT  .... 
WILLIAM  EDWARDS  HUNTINGTON,  S.T.D. 


BrookUne. 

Cambridge. 

Cambridge. 

.  Madison,  N.J. 

Boston. 

Newton  Centre. 

Boston. 

LL.D., 


Newton  Centre. 

WILLIAM  BLODGET,  B.A Chestnut  Hill. 

CAROLINE  HAZARD,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  LL.D.      .       Peace  Dale,  R.I. 
GEORGE  HERBERT  PALMER,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  L.H.D.,  LL.D., 

Cambridge. 
RUTH  SHARPLESS   GOODWIN,  B.A.        .       .     Philadelphia,  Pa. 


B.S. 


EUGENE  V.  R.  THAYER,  BA.     . 
GALEN  L.  STONE     .... 
PAUL  HENRY  HANUS,  S.B.,  LL.D. 
CANDACE   CATHERINE  STIMSON. 
ALICE  UPTON  PEARMAIN,  M.A.     . 

BELLE  SHERWIN,   B.S 

CHARLOTTE  HOWARD   CONANT,   B.A 
ELLEN  FITZ  PENDLETON,  M.A.,  Litt.D 


New  York  City. 

BrookUne. 

Cambridge. 

New  York  City. 

Boston. 

Cleveland,  0. 

Natick. 


LL.D. 


{ex  officio)  Wellesley  College. 


1918-19  Trustees 

EXECUTIVE   COMMITTEE 


Edwin  Farnham  Greene,  B.A.,  Chairman. 
Andrew  Fiske,  Ph.D.  Lewis     Kennedy    Morse,     B.A., 

George  Howe  Davenport.  LL.B.  {ex  officio). 

Galen  L.  Stone.  Ellen    Fitz    Pendleton,.    M.A., 

Candace  Catherine  Stimson,  B.S.     Litt.D.,  LL.D.  {ex  officio). 


FINANCE   COMMITTEE 


William  Blodget,  B.A.  Galen  L.  Stone. 

Edwin  Farnham  Greene,  B.A.     Lewis    Kennedy    Morse,    B.A., 

Eugene  V.  R.  Thayer,  B.A.  LL.B.  {ex  officio). 


COMMITTEE  ON  BUILDINGS 


George  Howe  Davenport,  Chairman. 
Sarah  Lawrence.  Ellen    Fitz     Pendleton,    M.A., 

William  Blodget,  B.A.  Litt.D.,  LL.D. 

Alice  Upton  Pearmain,  M.A.       Edwin  Farnham  Greene,  B.A, 

Lewis  Kennedy  Morse,  B.A.,  LL.B. 


COMMITTEE  ON  GROUNDS 


Galen  L.  Stont:,  Chairman. 
Lilian  Horsford  Farlow.  Ellen    Fitz    Pendleton,    M.A., 

Caroline  Hazard,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,      Litt.D.,  LL.D. 

LL.D.  Edwin  Farnham  Greene,  B.A. 

Eugene  V.  R.  Thayer,  B.A.         Lewis  Kennedy  Morse,B.A.,LL.B. 


COMMITTEE  ON   LIBRARY 


Trustee  Members 

George  Herbert  Palmer,  M.A.,  Ellen    Fitz     Pendleton,    M.A., 

Litt.D.,  L.H.D.,  LL.D.  Litt.D.,  LL.D.  {ex  officio). 

Lilian  Horsford  Farlow.  Lewis  Kennedy  Morse,  B.A.,LL.B. 

Faculty  Members 

Margaret  Pollock  Sherwood,  Mabel  Elisabeth  Hodder,  Ph.D. 

Ph.D.  Alice  Huntington  Bushee,  M.A. 

Mary    Whiton    Calkins,   M.x\.,  Ethel     Dane     Roberts,     B.A., 

Litt.D.,  LL.D.  B.L.S.  {ex  officio). 

John  Charles  Duncan,  Ph.D. 


1918-19  Faculty 


OFFICERS   OF   INSTRUCTION   AND 
GOVERNMENT » 


ELLEN  FITZ  PENDLETON,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  LL.D., 

President. 
SARAH  FRANCES  WHITING,  Sc.D., 

Professor  of  Physics  and  Astronomy,  Emeritus. 
MARY  ALICE  WILLCOX,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Zoology,  Emeritus. 
ANGIE  CLARA  CHAPIN,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Greek  Language  and  Literature. 
KATHARINE  LEE  BATES,  M.A.,  Litt.D., 

Professor  of  English  Literature. 
ALICE  VAN  VECHTEN  BROWN, 

Clara  Bertram  Klimball  Professor  of  Art. 
MARY  WHITON  CALKINS,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  LL.D., 

Professor  of  Philosophy  and  Psychology. 
ELLEN  LOUISA  BURRELL,  B.A., 

Professor  of  Pur«  Mathematics,  Emeritus. 
HAMILTON  CRAWFORD  MACDOUGALL,  Mus.D., 

Professor  of  Music. 
ELIZABETH  KIMBALL  KENDALL,  M.A.,  LL.B., 

Professor  of  History. 
ADELINE  BELLE  HAWES,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Latin  Language  and  Literature. 
MARGARETHE  MtJLLER, 

Professor  of  German  Language  and  Literature. 
SOPHIE  CHANTAL  HART,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 
MARGARET  CLAY  FERGUSON,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Botany. 
ELIZA  HALL  KENDRICK,  Ph.D., 

Helen  Day  Gould  Professor  of  Biblical  History. 
ELIZABETH  FLORETTE  FISHER,  B.S., 

Professor  of  Geology  and  Geography. 

« The  oflficers  of  instruction  are  arranged  in  three  groups;   the  first  group  includes 
professors  and  associate  professors,  the  second  instructors,  and  the  third  other  officers. 


10 


Faculty  1918-19 


AMY  MORRIS  ROMANS,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Hygiene,  Emeritus. 
MARGARET  HASTINGS  JACKSON,^ 

Professor  of  Italian  and  Curator  of  the  Frances  Pearsons  Plimp- 
ton Library  of  Italian  Literature. 

MALVINA  BENNETT,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Reading  and  Speaking. 
ALICE  R0BERTS0N,3  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Zoology. 
ARTHUR  ORLO  NORTON,^  M.A., 

Professor  of  the  History  and  Principles  of  Education. 
LOUISE  SHERWOOD  McDOWELL,s  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Physics. 
LOUIS  PERDRIAU,  Lie.  es  L., 

Professor  of  French  Language  and  Literature. 
ANNA  JANE  McKEAG,  Ph.D.,  LL.D., 

Professor  of  the  History  and  Principles  of  Education. 

EVA  CHANDLER,  B.A., 

Professor  of  Mathematics. 
MARY  SOPHIA  CASE,  B.A., 

Professor  of  Philosophy. 
VIDA  DUTTON  SCUDDER,  M.A., 

Professor  of  English  Literature. 
KATHARINE  MAY  EDWARDS,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Greek  and  Comparative  Philology. 
CHARLOTTE  ALMIRA  BRAGG,  B.S., 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry. 
MARGARET  POLLOCK  SHERWOOD,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  English  Literature. 
ADELAIDE  IMOGENE  LOCKE,  B.A.,  S.T.B., 

Associate  Professor  of  Biblical  History. 
HELEN  ABBOT  MERRILL,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Mathematics. 
MARIAN  ELIZABETH  HUBBARD,  B.S., 

Professor  of  Zoology. 

» Absent  on  Sabbatical  leave,  in  foreign  service. 

J  Absent  on  Sabbatical  leave. 

*  Absent  on  Sabbatical  leave  in  Government  service. 

s  Absent  on  Sabbatical  leave  in  Government  service  for  the  first  semester. 


1918-19  Faculty  11 

ALICE  WALTON,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Latin  and  Archaeology. 

ELEANOR  ACHESON  McCULLOCH  GAMBLE,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Psychology  and  Director  of  the  Psychological  Labo- 
ratory. 

ALICE  VINTON  WAITE,  M.A., 

Professor  of  English  Language  and  Literature. 
Dean. 

CLARENCE  GRANT  HAMILTON,  M.A., 
Professor  of  Music. 

LAURA  EMMA  LOCKWOOD,^  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Language. 
MARTHA  HALE  SHACKFORD,  Ph.D., 
Professor  of  English  Literature. 

CAROLINE  REBECCA  FLETCHER,  M.A., 
Associate  Professor  of  Latin. 

JULIA  SWIFT  ORVIS,  Ph.D., 
Professor  of  History. 

NATALIE  WIPPLINGER,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  German. 

GRACE  EVANGELINE  DAVIS,  M.A., 
Associate  Professor  of  Physics. 

ROXANA  HAYWARD  VIVIAN,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Mathematics  and  Director  of   the  Department  of 
Hygiene. 
CHARLES  LOWELL  YOUNG,  B.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

EDNA  VIRGINIA  MOFFETT,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  History. 

CAROLINE  BURLING  THOMPSON,^  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Zoology. 
LINCOLN  WARE  RIDDLE,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Botany. 
MARTHA  PIKE  CONANT,^  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

<  Absent  on  leave. 

7  Absent  on  leave  for  the  second  semester. 

«  Absent  on  leave  for  the  first  semester. 


12  Faculty  1918-19 

EMMA  MARIE  SCHOLL,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  German. 

AGNES  FRANCES  PERKINS,  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

MABEL  ELISABETH  HODDER,  Ph.D., 
Professor  of  History. 

LAETITIA  MORRIS  SNOW,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  Botany. 

WILLIAM  SKARSTROM,  M.D., 

Professor  of  Hygiene. 
JOSEPHINE  HARDING  BATCHELDER,  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

ANNA  PRICHITT  YOUNGMAN,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Economics. 
CLARA  ELIZA  SMITH,'  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics. 
EUGENE  CLARENCE  HOWE,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Hygiene. 
AMY  KELLY,  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Language  and  Composition. 
JOHN  CHARLES  DUNCAN,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Astronomy  and  Director  of  the  Whitin  Observatory. 

JULIA  ELEANOR  MOODY,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Zoology. 
ALICE  IDA  PERRY  WOOD,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 
MARY  CAMPBELL  BLISS,  M.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Botany. 
ALICE  HUNTINGTON  BUSHEE,  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  Spanish. 
RUTH  FLORENCE  ALLEN,"  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Botany. 
DONALD  SKEELE  TUCKER,  M.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Economics. 
EDWARD  ELY  CURTIS,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  History. 

9  Absent  on  leave  as  exchange  professor  at  Goucher  College. 
"  Resigned  November,  1918. 


1918-19  Faculty  13 

ELIZABETH  WHEELER  MANWARING,  B.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

HELEN  SOMERSBY  FRENCH,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Chemistry. 

MURIEL  ANNE  STREIBERT,  B.A.,  B.D., 
Assistant  Professor  of  Biblical  History. 

ALFRED  D WIGHT  SHEFFIELD,  M.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

3MABEL  ANNIE  STONE,  M.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Botany. 

CAROLINE  ANGELINE  HARDWICKE, 

Assistant  Professor  of  Reading  and  Speaking. 

SARAH  RUSSELL  DAVIS, 

Assistant  Professor  of  Hygiene. 
LAURA  ALANDIS  HIBBARD,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 
MARY  JEAN  LANIER,  B.S., 

Associate  Professor  of  Geology  and  Geography. 
OLIVE  DUTCHER,  M.A.,  B.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Biblical  History. 
FRANKLIN  CHARLES  FETTfi,  M.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Hygiene. 
FRANCES  LOWATER,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physics. 
EUNICE  CLARA  SMITH-GOARD,  M.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  French. 
FLORENCE  PARTHENIA  LEWIS,"  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics. 
MABEL  MINERVA  YOUNG,  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  Mathematics. 
HETTY  SHEPARD  WHEELER,^  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Musical  Theory. 
ALICE  MARIA  OTTLEY,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Botany. 
HELENE  BUHLERT  MAGEE,^  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

"  Exchange  professor  from  Goucher  College. 
*  Absent  on  leave. 


14  Faculty  1918-19 

FREDERIC  HENRY  LAHEE,"  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  Geology. 
EMILY  JOSEPHINE  HURD, 

Instructor  in  Pianoforte. 
ALBERT  THOMAS  FOSTER, 

Instructor  in  Violin. 
MARY  FLORENCE  CURTIS,  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  Mathematics. 
LEAH  BROWN  ALLEN,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Astronomy. 
ANNIE  KIMBALL  TUELL,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  English  Literature. 
BLANCHE  FRANCIS  BROCKLEBANK," 

Instructor  in  Pianoforte. 
ANNA  BERTHA  MILLER,  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  Latin. 
EDITH  MARGARET  SMAILL, 

Instructor  in  Reading  and  Speaking. 
EDNA  BARRETT  MANSHIP, 

Instructor  in  Hygiene. 
LENNIE  PHOEBE  COPELAND,  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  Mathematics. 
MYRTILLA  AVERY,  B.L.S.,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Art. 
MARGARET  JOHNSON, 

Instructor  in  Hygiene. 
MATHILDE  BOUTRON  DAMAZY,  B.  fes  L  , 

Instructor  in  French. 
LOUISE  HORTENSE  SN0WDEN,^3  B.S., 

Instructor  in  History. 
HELEN  ISABEL  DAVIS,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Horticulture  and  Landscape  Gardening. 
MARION  DUTTON  SAVAGE,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Economics. 

BERTHA  KNICKERBOCKER  STRAIGHT,  B.A., 
Instructor  in  Art. 

">  Resigned  November,  1918. 

"  Absent  on  leave  for  the  first  semester  in  foreign  service. 

'3  Absent  on  leave  in  foreign  service. 


1918-19  Faculty  15 

KATHARINE  FORBES  LIDDELL,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 
LOUISE  PETTIBONE  SMITH,  Ph.D., 
Instructor  in  Biblical  History. 

SEAL  THOMPSON,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Biblical  History. 
ELIZABETH  HALSEY,  Ph.B., 

Instructor  in  Hygiene. 
HORACE  BIDWELL  ENGLISH,^^  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  Philosophy  and  Psychology. 
GLADYS  PRISCILLA  HAINES,''^  B.A., 

Instructor  in  French. 
JUDITH  BLOW  WILLIAMS,  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  History. 
EDITH  HAMILTON,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 
LOUISE  STELLA  WAITE, 

Instructor  in  Italian. 
FLORENCE  DIDIEZ  DAVID,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  French. 
RALPH  SPRINGER  SMALLEY, 

Instructor  in  Violoncello. 
ANGELA  PALOMO,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Spanish. 
MARY  EDITH  PINNEY,  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  Zoology. 
HELEN  LOmSA  DREW,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 
ALICE  MARGARET  HOLDEN,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  History. 
MARY  SOPHIE  HAAGENSEN, 

Instructor  in  Hygiene. 
MARGARET  TERRELL  PARKER,  B.S., 

Instructor  in  Geology  and  Geography. 
LUCY  WILSON,  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  Physics  and  Psychology. 

'4  Absent  on  leave  in  Government  service. 
»3  Absent  on  leave  in  foreign  service. 


16  Faculty  1918-19 

CAROLINE  ELIZA  VOSE,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

FLORA  ISABEL  MACKINNON,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Philosophy. 
DOROTHY  WARNER  DENNIS,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  French. 
ADA  MAY  COE,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Spanish. 
GERTRUDE  MAY  WARE,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Chemistry. 
LILLIAN  ELOISE  BAKER,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Chemistry. 
EMMA  LUELLA  FISK,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Botany. 
FRANCES  MARION  RALSTON, 

Instructor  in  Musical  Theory  and  Pianoforte. 
WILLIAM  HARDEN  CHAPMAN,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Hygiene. 
FLORENCE  BEARD   BRACQ,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  French. 
JOSEPH  GOUDREAULT, 

Instructor  in  Vocal  Music. 
MARGARET  ALGER  HAYDEN,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Zoology. 
MURRAY  PHILIP  HOROWITZ,  M.S., 

Instructor  in  Botany. 
JOSEPH  LYONS  SNIDER,^s  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Economics. 
MARY  MAUD  BELL,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Zoology. 
ALICE  VERNICE   GAY,'^ 

Instructor  in  Pianoforte. 
MARGARET  BANCROFT,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  History. 
MARTHE  ALEXIA  BOYER,  C.A.  (Lettres), 

Instructor  in  French. 

«  Appointed  for  the  second  semester  only. 
'« Appointed  for  the  first  semester  only. 


1918-19  Faculty  17 

MARY  UNDERHILL,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

MARY  BOWEN  BRAINERD,  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  English  Literature. 

MARTHE  PUGNY, 

Instructor  in  French. 

ALICE  THERESA  COSEO,  B.A., 

Assistant  in  Art. 

MARY  AUGUSTA  BEAN,  B.A., 
Assistant  in  Mathematics. 

OLIVE   GREENE,  B.A., 

Assistant  in  BibHcal  History. 

JESSIE  BUCHANAN, 

Assistant  in  Music. 
REGINA  EMMA  STOCKHAUSEN,  M.A., 
Assistant  in  Botany. 

LUCILE  ROUSH,  B.A., 

Assistant  in  Botany. 
MINNIE  RUHMPOHL,  B.A., 

Laboratory  Assistant  in  Physics. 
PAULINE  ADELAIDE    SHOREY,  B.A., 

Assistant  in  Botany. 
HARRIET  P0RTER,^6  b.A., 

Laboratory  Assistant  in  Physics. 

ALBERT  PITTS  MORSE, 

Curator  of  Zoology  Museum. 
SUSAN  GREY  AKERS,  B.A., 

Librarian  of  Mary  Hemenway  Hall. 
ANNE  TAYLOR  CASWELL,  B.A., 

Curator  of  Chemistry  Laboratory. 
KATHARINE  BULLARD  DUNCAN, 

Curator  of  Whitin  Observatory. 
CELIA  HOWARD   HERSEY,  B.A., 

Art  Museum  Assistant  in  Charge. 
EDITH  JENNETT  GRIMES,   B.A., 

Curator  of  Botany  Laboratories. 

'« Appointed  for  the  first  semester  only. 


18  Faculty  1918-19 

EDWARD  ERASTUS  BANCROFT,  M.A.,  M.D., 

Consulting  Physician. 
MABEL  AUSTIN  SOUTHARD,  M.D., 

Lecturer  on  Special  Hygiene. 
ANNA  WHITE  DEVEREAUX, 

Lecturer  on  the  Theory  and  Practice  of  the  Kindergarten. 
ELIZA  JACOBUS  NEWKIRK,^7  M.A., 

Lecturer  in  History  of  Architecture. 
LUDWIG  REINHOLD   GEISSLER,  Ph.D., 

Lecturer  in  Psychology. 
EARL  AUGUSTUS  ALDRICH,   M.A., 

Lecturer  in  English  Literature. 
R.  F.  ALFRED  HOERNLfi,^s  M.A.,  '^ 

Lecturer  in  Logic. 
EDITH  HARRIET  MOORE,^s  M.A., 

Lecturer  in  the  History  of  Architecture. 
CHARLES  HYDE  WARREN,  Ph.D., 

Lecturer  in  Mineralogy. 
HERBERT  WILBUR  RAND,^5  c.E.,  Ph.D., 

Lecturer  in  Zoology. 
ETHEL  DANE  ROBERTS,  B.A.,  B.L.S., 

Librarian. 
ANTOINETTE  BRIGHAM  PUTNAM  METCALF,  M.A., 

Associate  and  Reference  Librarian. 
LILLA  WEED,  M.A., 

Associate  Librarian. 
HELEN  MOORE  LAWS,  B.A., 

Cataloguer. 


TERESA  COHEN,  Ph.D., 

Alice  Freeman  Palmer  Fellow. 

"  Absent  on  leave  for  second  semester  in  foreign  service, 
's  Appointed  for  the  second  semester  only.       ' 


1918-19  Officers  of  Administration  19 


OFFICERS  OF  ADMINISTRATION 


ELLEN  FITZ  PENDLETON,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  LL.D., 
President. 

ALICE  VINTON  WAITE,  M.A., 
Dean. 
Professor  of  English  Language  and  Literature. 

KATHARINE  PIATT  RAYMOND,  B.S.,  M.D., 
Resident  Physician. 

EDITH  SOUTHER  TUFTS,  M.A., 
Registrar. 

IVIARY  CASWELL, 

Secretary  to  the  President. 

MARY  FRAZER  SMITH,  B.A., 
College  Recorder. 

MARIE  LOUISE  STOCKWELL,  B.A., 
Assistant  Secretary  to  the  President. 

FRANCES  LOUISE  KNAPP,  B.A., 

Secretary  to  the  Board  of  Admission. 

MARIAN  GIBBS  MILNE,  B.A., 

Secretary  to  the  Dean.  * 

BERTHA  LYDIA  CASWELL, 

Purchasing  Agent. 

EVELYN  AMELIA  MUNROE,  B.A., 

Cashier. 

CHARLOTTE  SCOTT  WHITON, 
Purveyor. 

MARY  SNOW, 

Head  of  Washington  House. 

HELEN  WILLARD  LYMAN,  B.A., 

Head  of  Stone  Hall. 
EVA  FANNY  SWIFT,^ 

Head  of  Crofton  House  and  Ridgeway  Refectory. 

« Absent  on  leave. 


20  Officers  of  Administration  1918-19 

HARRIET  LESTER, 

Head  of  Shafer  Hall. 

MABEL  PRIEST  DANIEL,  B.A., 
Head  of  Cazenove  Hall. 

JULIA  WOODHULL  SMITH, 
Head  of  Wilder  Hall. 

EFFIE  JANE  BUELL, 

Head  of  Pomeroy  Hall. 

CHARLOTTE  HENDERSON  CHADDERDON, 
Head  of  Claflin  Hall. 

ELIZABETH  BURROUGHS  WHEELER, 
Head  of  Eliot  House. 

KATHARINE  HARRIS, 

Head  of  Freeman  House. 

EMILIE  LOUISE  EASTMAN, 
Head  of  Fiske  House. 

FANNIE  PADDOCK  MILLER, 

Head  of  the  Elms  and  Joslin  House. 

EVA  GERTRUDE  JONES, 
Head  of  Webb  House. 

ALICE  LILLIAN  McGREGOR, 
Head  of  Beebe  HaU. 

ALICE  VARNEY  WARD, 

Head  of  Tower  Court. 

MARTHA  FAY  CLARKE, 

Head  of  Leighton  House. 

MARY  HUBBARD   MORSE  RICHARDSON, 
Head  of  the  Homestead. 

JESSIE  ANN  ENGLES, 

Head  of  Crofton  House  and  Ridgeway  Refectory. 

JOSEFA  VICTORIA  RANTZIA  STALLKNECHT, 
Head  of  Lovewell  House. 

VIOLA  FLORENCE  SNYDER, 
Head  of  Noanett  House. 

AD  ALINE  FOOTE  HAWLEY,   B.A., 
Head  of  the  Birches. 


1918-19  Officers  of  Administration  21 

ELVIRA   GENEVIEVE  BRANDEAU, 
Head  of  Wood  House. 

MARY  FOGG, 

Head  of  Harris  House. 

FRANCES  RAYNOR  MEAKER, 
Head  of  Norumbega  House. 

FLORENCE  IRENE  TUCKER,  B.A., 

Assistant  to  the  Cashier. 

LEILA  BURT  NYE, 

Manager  of  Post  Office. 

AMY  HARDING  NYE, 

Assistant  to  the  Registrar. 


HENRY  HERBERT  AUSTIN,  B.S., 

Superintendent  of  the  CoUege  Plant. 

FREDERICK  DUTTON  WOODS,  B.S., 
Superintend^t  of  Grounds. 


22  Standing  Committees  1918-19 


STANDING  COMMITTEES 


Board  or  Admission.— Misses  Chapin,  Smith-Goard,  Walton  {Chair- 
man),  Young;  the  Dean  ex  officio. 

Committee  on  Graduate  Instruction. — Misses  Ferguson,  Hawes, 
Hibbard,  Hubbard,  Kendrick,  McKeag  {Chairman) ;  the  Dean  ex  officio. 

Library  Committee. — Misses  Roberts  {Chairman),  Bushee,  Calkins, 
Sherwood;  Mrs.  Hodder;  Mr.  Duncan;  the  President  and  Librarians  ex 
officio. 

Committee  on  Instruction. — Dean  Waite  {Chairman  ex  officio), 
Misses  McDowell,  Snow,  Wipplinger,  Youngman;  Messrs.  Norton,  Perdriau. 

Committee  on  Academic  Requests. — Dean  Waite  {Chairman  ex 
officio),  Misses  Batchelder,  Bragg,  Dutcher,  Edwards,  Fisher;  Mr.  Tucker. 

Committee  on  Constitutions. — Misses  French,  Wood  {Chairman)  \ 
Mr.  Curtis. 

Faculty  Members  in  Senate  of  College  Government  Asso- 
ciation.— President  Pendleton,  ex  officio;  Misses  Hart,  Lanier,  Man- 
waring;  Mr.  SheflSeld. 


1918-19  Foundation  and  Purpose  23 

WELLESLEY   COLLEGE 

Wellesley,  Massachusetts 


FOUNDATION  AND  PURPOSE 

Wellesley  College  was  established  for  the  purpose  of 
furnishing  to  young  women  who  desire  to  obtain  a  liberal 
education  such  advantages  and  facihties  as  are  enjoyed  in 
institutions  of  the  highest  grade.  The  first  building  of  the 
College,  erected  and  equipped  under  the  supervision  and 
through  the  personal  means  of  the  founder,  was  opened  to 
students  in  1875,  with  the  announced  purpose  ''of  giving  to 
young  women  opportunities  for  education  equivalent  to  those 
usually  provided  in  colleges  for  young  men."  Throughout 
his  work  the  founder  auned  to  put  into  visible  form  his  ideal 
of  the  higher  education  for  women,  "the  supreme  develop- 
ment and  unfolding  of  every  power  and  faculty." 

By  the  charter,  granted  by  the  Commonwealth  of  Massa- 
chusetts, "the  corporation  of  Wellesley  College  is  authorized 
to  grant  such  honorary  testimonials,  and  confer  such  honors, 
degrees,  and  diplomas,  as  are  granted  or  conferred  by  any 
University,  College,  or  Seminary  of  learning  in  this  Com- 
monwealth; and  the  diplomas  so  granted  shall  entitle  the 
possessors  to  the  immunities  and  privileges  allowed,  by  usage 
or  statute,  to  the  possessors  of  like  diplomas  from  any  Uni- 
versity, College,  or  Seminary  of  learning  in  this  Common- 
wealth." 

In  accordance  with  the  spirit  of  the  founder,  the  College  is 
undenominational,  but  distmctively  Christian  in  its  influence, 
discipline,  and  instruction. 

The  members  of  the  College  meet  daily  for  morning  prayers 
in  the  beautiful  chapel  presented  in  1899  by  Miss  Ehzabeth 
G.  Houghton  and  Mr.  Clement  S.  Houghton  as  a  memorial  to 
their  father.  Services  on  Sunday  are  conducted  in  this  chapel 
by  preachers  of  different  denominations.  At  all  these  services 
and  at  vespers  on  Sunday,  the  smging  is  led  by  a  trained  choir 
of  students  under  the  direction  of  the  professor  of  music. 


24  Foundation  and  Purpose  1918-19 

The  Welles]  ey  College  Christian  Association,  organized  to 
foster  religious  life  and  interest  in  social  reforms  and  in  home 
and  foreign  missions,  meets  weekly  for  prayer  and  religious 
instruction. 

The  department  of  BibHcal  History  affords  the  systematic 
study  of  the  Bible  required  of  all  students. 


1918-19  Admission  25 


ADMISSION 

Applications  for  admission  should  be  made  upon  forms 
which  will  be  furnished  by  the  Secretary  to  the  Board  of 
Admission  on  request.  An  application  fee  of  ten  dollars  is 
required  from  all  candidates  for  admission,  and  no  application 
is  recorded  until  this  fee  is  received  (see  page  148).  It  is 
desirable  that  applications  should  be  made  several  years  in 
advance,  since  the  date  of  appHcation  is  used  as  a  basis  in 
assigning  rooms  in  College  houses.  Moreover,  since  the  num- 
ber of  new  students  admitted  is  lunited  by  the  capacity  of 
lecture  rooms,  it  is  necessary  to  close  the  appUcation  list  for 
any  given  year  at  a  date  which  varies  from  year  to  year.  Candi- 
dates are  hable  to  find  the  appUcation  list  closed  if  they  do 
not  make  then:  appHcations  more  than  a  year  in  advance  of 
the  time  at  which  they  propose  to  enter. 


ADMISSION  TO  THE  FRESHMAN  CLASS 

Students  are  admitted  by  examination  (see  page  46)  or 
by  the  New  Plan  (see  pages  48  to  50). 

Every  candidate  for  a  degree  must  offer  for  admission  to 
the  freshman  class  subjects  amounting  to  fifteen  "units." 
The  units  assigned  to  the  subjects  indicate  the  number  of 
years,  with  five  recitations  a  week,  which  will  normally  be 
required  in  the  secondary  school  to  make  adequate  prepara- 
tion. 

A  place  on  the  list  of  candidates  for  admission  will  not  be 
reserved  for  an  appUcant  whose  credentials  filed  in  July  do 
not  satisfactorily  cover  twelve  of  the  fifteen  units  required 
for  admission.  The  Board  of  Admission  requires  examination 
in  September  in  all  units  not  satisfactorily  covered,  and 
reserve  the  right  to  exclude  any  candidate  whose  preparation 
is  in  their  judgment  so  defective  as  to  debar  her  from  carrying 
successfully  the  work  of  the  freshman  year. 


26  Admission  1918-19 

Of   the  fifteen  "units"  required  for   admission  eleven    are 
prescribed  as  follows: — 

English 3  units* 

History i  unit 

Latin 4  units 

Mathematics 3  units 

The  remaining  four  units  may  be  distributed  in  any  one 
of  the  three  foUowmg  ways: — 

1.  3  units  in  French  or  German  or  Greek 

combined  with 

1  unit  in  one  of  the  following  subjects: — 

Botany. 
Chemistry. 
Greek, 
t  History. 
Music. 
Physics. 

2.  2  units  each  in  two  of  the  following  subjects: — 

French. 
German. 
Greek. 
Spanish. 

3.  2  units  in  French  or  German  or  Greek  or  Spanish 

combined  with 

2  units  made  up  of  i  unit  each  in  two  of  the  following 

subjects: — 
Botany. 
Chemistry. 
Greek, 
t  History. 
Music. 
Physics. 

The  admission  subjects  are  divided  into  two  groups,  as 
follows: — 

Preliminaries:  French  3  unit  requirement  (except  Prose 
Composition  and  the  use  of  the  spoken  language),  German  3 
unit  requirement  (except  Prose  Composition  and  the  use  of 
the  spoken  language),  Greek  3  unit  requirement  (except 
Prose   Composition),   History    (prescribed   unit),    Latin    (ex- 

*  See  page  28. 

t  See  page  34. 


1918-19  Admission  27 

cept  Prose  Composition),  Plane  Geometry.  Examinations  in 
Preliminaries  may  be  taken  at  any  time  during  the  college 
preparatory  course. 

Finals:  Algebra,  Botany,  Chemistry,  English,  French  (2 
unit  requirement,  the  Prose  Composition  and  the  use  of 
the  spoken  language  of  the  3  unit  requirement),  German  (2 
unit  requirement,  the  Prose  Composition  and  the  use  of  the 
spoken  language  of  the  3  unit  requirement),  Greek  (i  unit 
requirement,  2  unit  requirement,  the  Prose  Composition  of 
the  3  unit  requirement).  History  (second  unit),  Latui  Prose 
Composition,  Music,  Physics,  Spanish  (2  unit  requirement). 
Examinations  in  Finals  may  be  taken  at  any  time  during  the 
last  two  years  before  admission,  provided  at  least  three  are  taken 
during  the  last  year.  Candidates  are  advised  to  take  English 
Composition  and  Algebra  in  the  last  year. 

A  candidate  for  admission  must  be  at  least  sixteen  years 
of  age,  and  must  present  satisfactory  evidence  of  good  moral 
character  and  good  health.  A  statement  from  the  applicant's 
physician  to  the  effect  that  she  is  organically  sound  and  in 
good  health,  together  with  a  certificate  of  vaccination  must 
be  filed  with  the  Secretary  to  the  Board  of  Admission  before 
June  first  of  the  year  in  which  admission  is  sought.  Each 
candidate  before  she  is  formally  accepted  is  given  a  thorough 
physical  examination.  The  College  reserves  the  right  to 
reject  any  candidate  if  the  results  of  this  examination  in  the 
opinion  of  the  medical  staff  justify  such  action  or  to  accept 
the  candidate  only  on  the  understanding  that  she  will  take 
five  years  to  complete  the  course. 

The  student  who  has  met  all  entrance  requirements  is 
qualified  for  immediate  matriculation  for  the  Baccalaureate 
degree  in  Arts.  All  communications  concerning  admission 
should  be  addressed  to  the  Secretary  to  the  Board  of  Admis- 
sion, Wellesley  College,  Wellesley,  Mass. 


DEFINITION  OF  REQUIREMENTS 

The  number  enclosed  in  parentheses  following  the  subject  indicates  the 
number  of  units  assigned  to  that  subject;  that  is,  the  number  of  years  with 
five  recitations  a  week  which  will  normally  be  required  in  the  secondary 
school  for  adequate  preparation  in  the  subject. 


28  Admission  1918-19 

ENGLISH  (3) 

The  study  of  English  in  school  has  two  main  objects:  (i) 
command  of  correct  and  clear  EngUsh,  spoken  and  written; 
(2)  ability  to  read  with  accuracy,  intelligence,  and  apprecia- 
tion, and  the  development  of  the  habit  of  reading  good  Htera- 
ture  with  enjoyment. 

Qrammar  and  Composition. 

The  first  object  requires  instruction  in  grammar  and  compo- 
sition. EngHsh  grammar  should  ordinarily  be  reviewed  in  the 
secondary  school;  and  correct  spelling  and  grammatical  accu- 
racy should  be  rigorously  exacted  in  connection  with  all  written 
work  during  the  four  years.  The  principles  of  EngHsh  com- 
position governing  punctuation,  the  use  of  words,  sentences, 
and  paragraphs  should  be  thoroughly  mastered;  and  practice 
in  composition,  oral  as  well  as  written,  should  extend  throughout 
the  secondary  school  period.  Written  exercises  may  well  com- 
prise letter-writing,  narration,  description,  and  easy  exposition 
and  argument.  It  is  advisable  that  subjects  for  this  work  be 
taken  from  the  student's  personal  experience,  general  knowledge, 
and  studies  other  than  EngHsh,  as  well  as  from  her  reading  in 
Hterature.  Finally,  special  instruction  in  language  and  com- 
position should  be  accompanied  by  concerted  effort  of  teachers 
in  aU  branches  to  cultivate  in  the  student  the  habit  of  using 
good  EngHsh  in  her  recitations  and  various  exercises,  whether 
oral  or  written. 

To  meet  the  requirement  in  Composition,  there  should  be  practice  in 
writing  equivalent  to  weekly  themes  the  first  two  years,  and  fortnightly 
themes  the  last  two  years  of  the  preparatory  course.  Themes  should  be 
accompanied  by  simple  outlines.  The  following  books  are  suggested: 
Scott  and  Denney's  Composition — Rhetoric;  Neal's  Thought  Building  in 
Composition;  Robins  and  Perkins's  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Rhetoric 
supplemented  by  Herrick  and  Damon's  Compositio7i  and  Rhetoric;  Shack- 
ford  and  Judson's  Composition — Rhetoric — Literature. 

Literature. 

The  second  object  is  sought  by  means  of  the  reading  and 
study  of  a  number  of  books,  from  which  may  be  framed  a  pro- 
gressive course  in  literature  covering  four  years.  The  student 
should  be  trained  in  reading  aloud  and  be  encouraged  to 
commit  to  memory  notable  passages  both  in  verse  and 
in  prose.  As  an  aid  to  Hterary  appreciation,  she  is  further 
advised  to  acquaint  herself  with  the  most  important  facts 
in  the  lives  of  the  authors  whose  works  she  reads  and  with 


1918-19  Admission  29 

their  place  in  literary  history.  A  few  of  these  books  should  be 
read  with  special  care,  greater  stress  being  laid  upon  form  and 
style,  the  exact  meaning  of  words  and  phrases,  and  the  under- 
standing of  allusions. 

Examinations. 

Two  types  of  examination  are  now  offered  to  candidates  for 
admission:  (i)  the  ordinary  examination,  divided  into  two 
parts;  (2)  the  comprehensive  examination  covering  both  com- 
position and  literature  in  one  paper.  Whichever  type  is  taken, 
no  paper  will  be  considered  satisfactory,  however  accurate  in 
subject-matter,  if  seriously  defective  in  punctuation,  spelhng, 
or  other  essentials  of  good  usage. 

Ordinary  Examinations. 

1.     Grammar  and  Composition 

In  grammar  and  composition,  the  candidate  may  be  asked 
specific  questions  upon  the  practical  essentials  of  these  studies, 
such  as  the  relation  of  the  various  parts  of  a  sentence  to  one 
another,  the  construction  of  individual  words  in  a  sentence  of 
reasonable  difficulty,  and  those  good  usages  of  modern  English 
which  one  should  know  in  distinction  from  current  errors.'  The 
main  test  in  composition  will  consist  of  one  or  more  essays  de- 
veloping a  theme  through  several  paragraphs;  the  subjects 
will  be  drawn  from  the  books  read,  from  the  candidate's  other 
studies,  and  from  her  personal  knowledge  and  experience  quite 
apart  from  reading.  For  this  purpose  the  examiner  will  pro- 
vide several  subjects,  perhaps  eight  or  ten,  from  which  the  candi- 
date may  make  her  own  selections.  She  will  not  be  expected  to 
write  more  than  four  hundred  words  per  hour. 

2.     Literature 

The  examination  in  Hterature  will  include: — 

A.  General  questions  designed  to  test  such  a  knowledge 
and  appreciation  of  Hterature  as  may  be  gained  by  fulfilling 
the  requirements  defined  under  A ,  Reading,  below.  The  candi- 
date will  be  required  to  submit  a  list  of  the  books  read  in  prep- 
aration for  the  examination,  certified  by  the  principal  of  the 
school  in  which  she  was  prepared;  but  this  Ust  will  not  be  made 
the  basis  of  detailed  questions. 

B.  A  test  on  the  books  prescribed  for  study,  which  will 
consist  of  questions  upon  their  content,  form,  and  structure, 


30  Admission  1918-19 

and  upon  the  meaning  of  such  words,  phrases,  and  allusions  as 
may  be  necessary  to  an  understanding  of  the  works  and  an 
appreciation  of  their  saUent  qualities  of  style.  General  ques- 
tions may  also  be  asked  concerning  the  lives  of  the  authors, 
their  other  works,  and  the  periods  of  literary  history  to  which 
they  belong. 

Comprehensive  Examination. 

The  purpose  of  this  examination  will  be  to  test  the  ability  of 
the  candidate  to  write  clearly  and  correctly,  and  to  show  that 
she  has  read,  understood,  and  appreciated  a  sufl&cient  amount  of 
English  literature.  Success  in  the  examination  will  not  neces- 
sarily depend  upon  a  candidate's  knowledge  of  technical  points 
in  grammar  and  rhetoric  or  of  the  subject-matter  of  particular 
books;  the  paper  will  contain  some  questions  that  cannot  be 
answered  except  by  candidates  who  are  able  to  apply  what  they 
have  learned  to  unexpected  problems.  From  the  following  list 
of  recommended  reading,  books  should  be  chosen  for  use  in 
preparing  for  this  examination. 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examina- 
tions in  English  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with  the  regulation  for  exami- 
nation in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 

A.    Reading. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  foster  in  the  student  the  habit  of  intelligent 
reading  and  to  develop  a  taste  for  good  literature,  by  giving  her  a  first- 
hand knowledge  of  some  of  its  best  specimens.  She  should  read  the  books 
carefully,  but  her  attention  should  not  be  so  fixed  upon  details  that  she  fails 
to  appreciate  the  main  purpose  and  charm  of  what  she  reads. 

With  a  view  to  large  freedom  of  choice,  the  books  provided  for  reading 
are  arranged  in  the  following  groups,  from  each  of  which  at  least  two  selec- 
tions are  to  be  made,  except  as  otherwise  provided  under  Group  I. 

Texts  for  1918  to  1922  and  for  Compreliensive  Examinations 

Group  I  (Classics  in  Translation).  1918-1919  and  Comprehensive:  The 
Old  Testament^  comprising  at  least  the  chief  narrative  episodes  in  Genesis^ 
Exodus,  Joshua,  Judges,  Samuel,  Kings,  and  Daniel,  together  with  the 
books  of  Ruth  and  Esther.  The  Odyssey,  with  the  omission,  if  desired,  of 
Books  I,  II,  III,  IV,  V,  XV,  XVI,  XVII.  The  Iliad,  with  the  omission, 
if  desured,  of  Books  XI,  XIII,  XIV,  XV,  XVII,  XXI.  The  Mneid.  The 
Odyssey,  Iliad,  and  jEneid  should  be  read  in  English  translations  of  recog- 
nized literary  excellence. 

(For  any  selection  from  this  group  a  selection  from  any  other  group 
may  be  substituted.) 


1918-19  Admission  31 

1920-1922:  as  above  with  the  omission  of  the  Iliad,  and  the  addition  of 
Book  XVII  of  the  Odyssey. 

Group  II  (Drama).  1918-1919  and  Comprehensive:  Midsummer 
Night's  Dream,  Merchant  of  Venice  *,  As  You  Like  It  *,  Twelfth  Night,  The 
Tempest,  Romeo  and  Juliet,  King  John,  Richard  II,  Richard  III,  Henry  V, 
Coriolanus,  Julius  Ccesar  *t,  Macbeth  f,  Hamlet  f.  Additional  for  Compre- 
hensive: Everyman;  Goldsmith,  She  Stoops  to  Conquer;  Sheridan,  The 
Rivals. 

1920-1922:  only  the  plays  starred  in  above  Hst. 

Group  III  (Prose  Fiction).  1918-1919  and  Comprehensive:  Malory, 
Morte  d' Arthur  (about  100  pages);  Bunyan,  Pilgrim's  Progress,  Part  I; 
S\vift,  Gulliver's  Travels  (voyages  to  LilHput  and  to  Brobdingnag) ;  Defoe, 
Robinson  Crusoe,  Part  I;  Goldsmith,  Vicar  of  Wakefield;  Frances  Bumey, 
Evelina;  Scott's  Novels,  any  one;  Jane  Austen's  Novels,  any  one;  Maria 
Edgeworth,  Castle  Rackrent  or  The  Absentee;  Dickens's  Novels,  any  one; 
Thackeray's  Novels,  any  one;  George  Eliot's  Novels,  any  one;  Mrs.  Gas- 
kell,  Cranford;  Kingsley,  Westward  Ho!  or  Hereward,  the  Wake;  Reade, 
The  Cloister  and  the  Hearth;  Blackmore,  Lorna  Doone;  Hughes,  Tom 
Brown's  Schooldays;  Stevenson's  Treasure  Island,  or  Kidnapped,  or  Master 
of  Ballantrae;  Cooper's  Novels,  any  one;  Poe,  Selected  Tales;  Hawthorne, 
The  House  of  the  Seven  Gables,  or  Twice  Told  Tales,  or  Mosses  from  an  Old 
Manse;   a  collection  of  Short  Stories  by  various  standard  writers. 

Additional  or  specified  for  Comprehensive :  The  Books  of  Merlin  and  Sir 
Balin  from  Malory's  Morte  d' Arthur;  Scott,  Ivanhoe,  and  Quentin  Durward; 
Dickens,  A  Tale  of  Two  Cities;  Thackeray,  Henry  Esmond;  George  Eliot, 
Silas  Marner;  Reade,  Griffith  Gaunt;  Stevenson,  Dr.  Jekyll  and  Mr.  Hyde; 
Cooper,  The  Spy,  The  Last  of  the  Mohicans;  Kipling,  Kim,  Captains  Coura- 
geous, Jungle  Books. 

1920-1922:  Dickens,  A  Tale  of  Two  Cities;  George  Eliot,  Silas  Marner; 
Scott,  Quentin  Durward;  Hawthorne,  The  House  of  the  Seven  Gables. 

Group  IV  (Essays,  Biography,  etc.).  1918-1919:  Addison  and  Steele, 
The  Sir  Roger  de  Coverley  Papers  *,  or  selections  from  the  Tatler  and  the 
Spectator  (about  200  pages);  Boswell,  selections  from  the  Life  of  Johnson 
(about  200  pages);  Franklin,  Autobiography;  Irving,  selections  from  the 
Sketch  Book  *  (about  200  pages),  or  Life  of  Goldsmith;  Southey,  Life  of 
Nelson;  Lamb,  selections  from  the  Essays  of  Elia  (about  100  pages); 
Lockhart,  selections  from  the  Life  of  Scott  (about  200  pages);  Thackeray, 
lectures  on  Swift,  Addison,  and  Steele  in  the  English  Humorists;  Macaulay, 
any  one  of  the  following  essays :  Lord  Clive  *,  Warren  Hastings,  Milton, 
Addison,  Goldsmith,  Frederick  the  Great,  Madame  d'Arblay;  Trevelyan, 
selections  from  the  Life  of  Macaiday  (about  200  pages);  Ruskin,  Sesame 
and  Lilies  or  selections  (about  150  pages);  Dana,  Two  Years  before 
the  Mast;  Lincoln,  selections,  including  at  least  the  two  Inaugurals,  the 
Speeches  in  Independence  HaU  and  at  Gettysburg,  the  Last  Public  Ad- 

t  If  not  chosen  for  study  under  B. 


32  Admission  1918-19 

dress,  the  Lettef  to  Horace  Greeley,  together  with  a  brief  memoir  or  esti- 
mate of  Lincohi;  Parkman,  The  Oregon  Trail  *;  Thoreau,  Walden;  Lowell, 
Selected  Essays  (about  150  pages);  Holmes,  The  Autocrat  of  the  Breakfast 
Table;  Stevenson,  An  Inland  Voyage  and  Travels  with  a  Donkey;  Huxley, 
Autobiography  and  selections  from  Lay  Sermons,  including  the  addresses 
on  Improving  Natural  Knowledge,  A  Liberal  Education,  and  A  Piece  of 
Chalk;  a  collection  of  Essays  by  Bacon,  Lamb,  DeQuincey,  HazHtt,  Emer- 
son, and  later  writers;   a  collection  of  Letters  by  various  standard  writers. 

Comprehensive:  as  above  with  the  omission  of  Irving,  The  Sketch  Book; 
and  the  addition  of  Macaulay,  Life  of  Johnson,  Two  Speeches  on  Copyright, 
History  of  England,  Chapter  III;  Lincoln,  Speech  at  Cooper  Union;  Wash- 
ington, Farewell  Address;  Burke,  Speech  on  Conciliation  with  America; 
Carlyle,  Essay  on  Burns;  Webster,  First  Bunker  Hill  Oration;  Emerson, 
Manners,  Self -Reliance;  Burroughs,  Selected  Essays;  Warner,  In  the  Wil- 
derness; Curtis,  Prue  and  I,  Public  Duty  of  Educated  Men;  Hudson,  Idle 
Days  in  Patagonia;  Clemens,  Life  on  the  Mississippi;  Riis,  The  Making 
of  an  American;  Bryce,  The  Hindrances  to  Good  Citizenship. 

1920-1922:  only  the  books  starred  in  the  above  Ust. 

Group  V  (Poetry).  1918-1919  and  Comprehensive:  Palgrave's  Golden 
Treasury  (First  Series),  Books  II  and  III,  with  special  attention  to  Dryden, 
CoUins,  Gray,  Cowper,  and  Burns;  Palgrave's  Golden  Treasury  (First 
Series),  Book  IV,  with  special  attention  to  Wordsworth,  Keats,  and  Shelley 
(if  not  chosen  for  study  under  B);  Goldsmith,  The  Traveller  and  The  De- 
serted Village;  Pope,  The  Rape  of  the  Lock;  a  collection  of  English  and 
Scottish  Ballads,  as,  for  example,  some  Robin  Hood  ballads,  The  Battle  of 
Otterburn,  King  Estmere,  Young  Beichan,  Berwick  and  Grahame,  Sir  Patrick 
Spens,  and  a  selection  from  later  ballads;  Coleridge,  The  Ancient  Mariner, 
Christabel,  and  Kubla  Khan;  Byron,  Childe  Harold,  Canto  III  or  IV,  and 
The  Prisoner  of  Chilian;  Scott,  The  Lady  of  the  Lake,  or  Marmion;  Ma- 
caulay, The  Lays  of  Ancient  Rome,  The  Battle  of  Naseby,  The  Armada,  Ivry; 
Tennyson,  The  Princess,  or  Gareth  and  Lynette,  Lancelot  and  Elaine,  and 
The  Passing  of  Arthur;  Browning,  Cavalier  Tunes,  The  Lost  Leader,  How 
They  Brought  the  Good  News  from  Ghent  to  Aix,  Home  Thoughts  from  Abroad, 
Home  Thoughts  from  the  Sea,  Incident  of  the  French  Camp,  Herve  Riel,  Phei- 
dippides.  My  Last  Duchess,  Up  at  a  Villa — Down  in  the  City,  The  Italian 
in  England,  The  Patriot,  '' De  Gustibus,"  The  Pied  Piper,  Instans  Tyrannus; 
Arnold,  Sohrab  and  Rustum,  and  The  Forsaken  Merman;  Selections  from 
American  Poetry,  with  special  attention  to  Poe,  Lowell,  Longfellow,  and 
Whitrier. 

Additional  for  Comprehensive:  Milton,  U Allegro,  II  Penseroso,  Comus, 
Lycidas;  Tennyson,  The  Coming  of  Arthur,  The  Holy  Grail;  Arnold,  Balder 
Dead;  American  Poets,  Bryant  and  Holmes. 

1920-1922:  The  poems  of  Browning  in  above  list  and  Tennyson:  The 
Coming  of  Arthur,  Gareth  and  Lynette,  Lancelot  and  Elaine,  The  Passing  of 
Arthur;  Scott,  The  Lady  of  the  Lake;  Coleridge,  The  Ancient  Mariner; 
and  Arnold,  Sohrab  and  Rustum. 


1918-19  Admission  33 

B.     Study. 

This  part  of  the  requirement  is  intended  as  a  natural  and  logical  contin- 
uation of  the  student's  earlier  reading,  with  greater  stress  laid  upon  form 
and  style,  the  exact  meaning  of  words  and  phrases,  and  the  understanding 
of  allusions.  The  books  provided  for  study  are  arranged  in  four  groups 
from  each  of  which  one  selection  is  to  be  made. 

Texts  for  1918  and  1919 

Group  I  (Dramatic  Poetry).  Shakespeare,  Julius  CcBsar,  Macbeth 
Hamlet. 

Group  II  (Epic  and  Lyric  Poetry).  Milton,  U Allegro,  II  Penseroso,  and 
either  Comus  or  Lycidas;  Tennyson,  The  Coining  of  Arthur,  The  Holy 
Grail,  and  The  Passing  of  Arthur;  The  selections  from  Wordsworth,  Keats, 
and  Shelley  in  Book  IV  oi  Palgrave's  Golden  Treasury  {First  Series). 

Group  III  (Oratory).  Burke,  Speech  on  Conciliation  with  America, 
Macaulay's  two  Speeches  on  Copyright  and  Lincoln's  Speech  at  Cooper  Union, 
Washington's  Farewell  Address  and  Webster's  First  Bunker  Hill  Oration. 

Group  IV  (Essays).  Carlyle,  Essay  on  Burns,  with  a  selection  from 
Bums's  Poems;  Macaulay,  Life  of  Johnson;  Emerson,  Essay  on  Manners. 

Texts  for  1920,  1921,  and  1922 

Group  I  (Dramatic  Poetry).    Shakespeare,  Macbeth,  Hamlet. 

Group  II  (Epic  and  Lyric  Poetry).  Milton,  L' Allegro,  II  Penseroso,  and 
Comus;  Palgrave's  Golden  Treasury  (First  Series),  Book  IV,  with  special 
attention  to  Wordsworth,  Keats,  and  Shelley. 

Group  III  (Oratory).  Burke,  Speech  on  Conciliation  with  America; 
Washington's  Farewell  Address;  Webster's  First  Bunker  Hill  Oration,  and 
Lincoln's  Gettysburg  Address. 

Group  IV  (Essays).  Macaulay,  Life  of  Johnson;  Carlyle,  Essay  on 
Burns,  with  a  brief  selection  from  Bums's  Poems. 

HISTORY  (1  or  2) 
Prescribed  Unit 

A  full  year  course  in  one  of  the  following  subjects: — 
(i)  Ancient  History,  including  a  brief  introductory  study 
of  the  earlier  nations,  but  with  special  emphasis  on  Greek 
History  to  the  death  of  Alexander,  and  on  Roman  History  to 
the  accession  of  Commodus. 

(2)  English  History,  with  due  regard  to  social  and  political 
development. 

(3)  American  History,  with  the  elements  of  Civil  Government. 
Candidates  are  advised  to  offer  the  course  in  Ancient  History 

as  a  part  of  their  preparation. 


34  Admission  1918-19 

In  the  subject  chosen,  the  student  should  acquire  accurate  knowledge 
of  the  history  as  presented  in  a  standard  text-book  of  not  less  than  300 
pages,  and  should  read  such  fuller  authorities  as  may  be  available,  in  amount 
not  less  than  500  pages.  Some  practice  in  drawing  maps  to  illustrate  ter- 
ritorial changes,  in  makmg  digests  of  lectures  and  reading,  and  in  preparing 
verbal  or  written  reports  on  subjects  assigned  for  individual  investigation 
is  essential  to  successful  work. 

Elective  Unit 

A  candidate  may  offer  one  of  these  three  subjects  as  a  second 
unit  in  History  in  place  of  the  one  unit  requirement  in  Greek, 
Music,  or  Science,  provided  that  one  of  the  two  units  offered 
is  Ancient  History,  and  that  the  work  for  the  second  unit  is 
done  during  the  last  two  years  of  the  preparatory  course. 

Except  for  students  entering  imder  the  "  New  Plan,"  the  final  examination 
in  the  second  unit  in  History  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with  the  regu- 
lation for  examination  in  "Fuials."     See  page  27. 

MATHEMATICS  (3) 

Algebra. — Factors,  Common  Divisors  and  Multiples,  Ratio 
and  Proportion,  Theory  of  Exponents  including  Iniaginaries, 
Radicals  and  Equations  involvmg  Radicals,  Inequalities,  Quad- 
ratic Equations  (including  the  theory).  Binomial  Theorem, 
Arithmetic  and  Geometric  Progressions. 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examina- 
tion in  Algebra  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with  the  regulation  for  exam- 
ination in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 

Plane  Geometry. — As  foimd  in  Chauvenet,  or  its  equivalent. 

Deficiency  in  preparation  usually  results  from  one  or  more  of  the  following 
causes:  the  use  of  text-books  which  are  too  elementary,  insuificient  time 
spent  in  preparation,  neglect  of  exercises  in  original  demonstration  in 
Geometry,  and  of  reviews  in  both  Algebra  and  Geometry.  It  is  strongly 
urged  that  there  be  constant  exercise  in  original  demonstration  in  Geometry, 
with  frequent  written  examinations  in  both  Algebra  and  Geometry,  the  prob- 
lems proposed  being  drawn  from  other  sources  than  the  text-books. 

LATIN  (4) 

Candidates  should  be  familiar  with  the  forms  and  syntax 
of  the  language  and  possess  a  vocabulary  sufficient  to  trans- 
late Latin  into  idiomatic  Enghsh  and  English  into  correct 
Latin.  They  should  also  be  able  to  translate  'at  sight  Latin 
prose  and  poetry  of  moderate  difficulty  and  to  read  Latin  prose 
and  verse  according  to  the  Roman  method  of  pronunciation 


1918-19  Admission  35 

with  strict  attention  to  vowel  quantities.  To  attain  such  pro- 
ficiency not  less  than  five  forty-minute  periods  a  week  for  four 
years  should  be  given  to  the  study  of  Latin.  The  amount  of 
prepared  reading  should  not  be  less  than  four  books  of  Csesar's 
GalHc  War,  seven  Orations  of  Cicero  (counting  the  Manilian 
Law  as  two)  and  six  books  of  Vergil's  ^Eneid.  The  reading  may 
be  selected  from  other  works  of  the  above  authors  or  Nepos, 
Sallust  and  Ovid,  but  must  include  the  pro  Archia  and  two 
other  Orations  of  Cicero  and  two  books  of  the  ^neid. 

It  is  of  special  importance  that  practice  in  writing  easy 
Latin  at  sight  should  be  continued  throughout  the  entire  period 
of  preparation  in  connection  with  the  reading  of  the  Latin  au- 
thors. In  the  last  year  special  attention  should  be  given  to 
translating  continuous  English  into  Latin  both  in  the  prepared 
and  sight  work. 

Those  who  enter  by  the  ordinary  examinations  of  the  Col- 
lege Entrance  Examination  Board  will  take  4,  5,  and  6.  The 
scope  of  the  examinations  will  include: 

(i)  Translation  at  Sight.  Candidates  will  be  examined  in 
translation  at  sight  of  both  prose  and  verse. 

(2)  Prescribed  Reading.  Candidates  will  be  examined 
upon  the  following  prescribed  reading:  Cicero's  Orations  in 
behalf  of  the  Manilian  Law  and  of  Archias  and  Vergil's  ^neid  I, 
II,  and  either  IV  or  VI  at  the  option  of  the  candidate,  with  ques- 
tions on  subject-matter,  literary  and  historical  allusions,  and 
prosody. 

(3)  Grammar  and  Composition.  Candidates  will  be  ex- 
amined upon  the  equivalent  of  Latin  6  under  the  College  En- 
trance Examination  Board. 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examina- 
tion in  Prose  Composition  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with  the  regulation 
for  examination  in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 

Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation 

Exercises  in  translation  at  sight  should  begin  in  school  with  the  first 
lessons  in  which  Latin  sentences  of  any  length  occur,  and  should  continue 
throughout  the  course  with  sufficient  frequency  to  insure  correct  methods 
of  work  on  the  part  of  the  student.  From  the  outset  particular  attention 
should  be  given  to  developing  the  ability  to  take  in  the  meaning  of  each 
word — and  so,  gradually,  of  the  whole  sentence — just  as  it  stands;  the 
sentence  should  be  read  and  understood  in  the  order  of  the  original,  with 
fuU  appreciation  of  the  force  of  each  word  as  it  comes,  so  far  as  this  can  be 
known  or  inferred  from  that  which  has  preceded,  and  from  the  form  and 


36  Admission  1918-19 

the  position  of  the  word  itself.  The  habit  of  reading  in  this  way  should  be 
encouraged  and  cultivated  as  the  best  preparation  for  all  the  translating 
that  the  student  has  to  do.  No  translation,  however,  should  be  a  mechani- 
cal metaphrase.  Nor  should  it  be  a  mere  loose  paraphrase.  The  full  mean- 
ing of  the  passage  to  be  translated,  gathered  in  the  way  described  above, 
should  finally  be  expressed  in  clear  and  natural  English. 

A  written  examination  cannot  test  the  ear  or  tongue,  but  proper  instruc- 
tion in  any  language  will  necessarily  include  the  training  of  both.  The 
school  Vv^ork  in  Latin,  therefore,  should  include  much  reading  aloud,  writing 
from  dictation,  and  translation  from  the  teacher's  reading.  Learning  suit- 
able passages  by  heart  is  also  very  useful,  and  should  be  more  practiced. 

The  work  in  composition  should  give  the  student  a  better  understandmg 
of  the  Latin  she  is  reading  at  the  time,  and  greater  facility  in  reading. 

The  teachers  of  Latin  in  the  preparatory  schools  are  urged  to 
insist  upon  the  use  of  good  English  in  translation. 

The  study  of  Greek  is  strongly  recommended  to  candidates 
who  plan  to  elect  courses  in  Latin  in  college. 

Ability  to  read  at  sight  easy  French  or  German  prose  is  of 
great  advantage  to  all  classical  students. 

GREEK  (1  or  2  or  3) 
3  Unit  Requirement 

Grammar.     The  etymology  must  he  thoroughly  mastered. 

Prose  Composition.  At  least  forty  written  exercises  based 
upon  the  Greek  of  Xenophon,  including  connected  passages 
and  accompanied  by  a  systematic  study  of  the  main  principles 
of  syntax. 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examina- 
tion in  Prose  Composition  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with  the  regulation 
for  examination  in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 

Xenophon,  Anabasis ^  three  books. 

Homer,  Iliad,  three  books,  with  scansion. 

Candidates  must  be  prepared  to  translate  at  sight  both  Attic 
and  Homeric  Greek  of  average  difficulty,  and  to  write  in  Greek 
a  connected  passage  based  upon  Xenophon. 

Particular  attention  should  be  given  to  the  correct  writing  of  Greek  with 
the  accents,  to  exercises  both  oral  and  written,  and  to  the  use  of  the  black- 
board for  constant  practice  upon  forms  and  constructions. 

2  Unit  Requirement 

Grammar.  Systematic  study  of  etymology  and  of  the  main 
principles  of  Attic  Greek  syntax.  Constant  practice  in  oral 
and  written  translation  from  English  into  Greek. 


1918-19  Admission  37 

Prose  Composition.  At  least  twenty  written  exercises  based 
upon  the  Greek  read,  including  connected  passages. 

Xenophon,  Anabasis.  Three  books,  or  an  equivalent  amount 
in  selections  from  Attic  prose  writers  of  average  dif&culty. 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examma- 
tion  in  the  2  unit  requirement  in  Greek  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with 
the  regulation  for  examination  in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 

1  Unit  Requirement 

Systematic  study  of  etymology  from  a  standard  grammar  in 
connection  with  a  book  of  First  Lessons.  Anabasis,  about 
thirty  pages.    Practice  in  writuig  Greek. 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examina- 
tion in  the  i  unit  requirement  in  Greek  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with 
the  regulation  for  examination  in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 

The  teachers  of  Greek  in  the  preparatory  schools  are  urged 
to  insist  upon  the  use  of  good  English  in  translation. 

Ability  to  read  at  sight  easy  French  or  German  prose  is  of 
great  advantage  to  all  classical  students. 

FRENCH  (2  or  5) 

The  requirements  follow  the  recommendations  of  the  Modern 
Language  Association  embodied  in  Document  No.  91  of  the 
College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

See  pages  39,  40  for  suggestions  concerning  preparation  in  the 
case  of  students  expecting  to  enter  Wellesley  College. 


2  Unit  Requirement 

(Termed  "A,  Elementary,"  by  the  College  Entrance  Exam- 
ination Board.) 

THE   AIM   OF  THE  mSTRUCTION 

At  the  end  of  the  elementary  course  the  pupil  should  be  able 
to  pronounce  French  accurately,  to  read  at  sight  easy  French 
prose,  to  put  into  French  simple  English  sentences  taken  from 
the  language  of  everyday  life  or  based  upon  a  portion  of  the 
French  text  read,  and  to  answer  questions  on  the  rudiments  of 
the  granamar  as  defined  below. 


38  Admission  1918-19 


THE  WORK  TO  BE  DONE 

During  the  first  year  the  work  should  comprise: — 
(i)  Careful  drill  in  pronunciation. 

(2)  The  rudiments  of  grammar,  including  the  inflection  of 
the  regular  and  the  more  common  irregular  verbs,  the  plural 
nouns,  the  inflection  of  adjectives,  participles,  and  pronouns; 
the  use  of  personal  pronouns,  common  adverbs,  prepositions, 
and  conjunctions;  the  order  of  words  in  the  sentence,  and  the 
elementary  rules  of  syntax. 

(3)  Abundant  easy  exercises,  designed  not  only  to  fix  in  the 
memory  the  forms  and  principles  of  grammar,  but  also  to  cul- 
tivate readiness  m  the  reproduction  of  natural  forms  of  expres- 
sion. 

(4)  The  reading  of  from  100  to  175  duodecimo  pages  of  gradu- 
ated texts,  with  constant  practice  in  translating  into  French 
easy  variations  of  the  sentences  read  (the  teacher  giving  the 
English)  and  in  reproducing  from  memory  sentences  previously 
read. 

(5)  Writing  French  from  dictation. 

During  the  second  year  the  work  should  comprise: — 

(i)  The  reading  of  from  250  to  400  pages  of  easy  modern 

prose  in  the  form  of  stories,  plays,  or  historical  or  biographical 

sketches. 

(2)  Constant  practice,  as  in  the  previous  year,  in  translating 
into  French  easy  variations  upon  the  texts  read. 

(3)  Frequent  abstracts,  sometimes  oral  and  sometimes 
written,  of  portions  of  the  text  already  read. 

(4)  Writing  French  from  dictation. 

(5)  Continued  drill  upon  the  rudiments  of  grammar,  with 
constant  appHcation  in  the  construction  of  sentences. 

(6)  Mastery  of  the  forms  and  use  of  pronouns,  pronominal 
adjectives,  of  all  but  the  rare  irregular  verb  forms,  and  of  the 
simpler  uses  of  the  conditional  and  subjunctive. 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examina- 
tion in  the  2  unit  requirement  in  French  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with 
the  regulation  for  examination  in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 

3  Unit  Requirement 

(Termed  "5,  Intermediate,"  by  the  College  Entrance  Exam- 
ination Board.) 


1918-19  Admission  39 

THE   AIM    OF   THE   INSTRUCTION 

At  the  end  of  the  intermediate  course  the  pupil  should  be 
able  to  read  at  sight  ordinary  French  prose  or  simple  poetry, 
to  translate  into  French  a  connected  passage  of  EngUsh  based 
on  the  text  read,  and  to  answer  questions  involving  a  more 
thorough  knowledge  of  syntax  than  is  expected  in  the  elemen- 
tary course. 

THE  WORK   TO   BE   DONE 

This  should  comprise  the  reading  of  from  400  to  600  pages* 
of  French  of  ordinary  difficulty,  a  portion  to  be  in  the  dramatic 
formj;  constant  practice  in  giving  French  paraphrases,  ab- 
stracts or  reproductions  from  memory  of  selected  portions  of 
the  matter  read;  the  study  of  a  grammar  of  moderate  com- 
pleteness; writing  from  dictation.! 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examina- 
tion in  the  3  unit  requirement  in  French  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with 
the  regulation  for  examination  in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 

Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation  for  the  2  and  3  Unit 
Requirements 

1.  Emphasis  should  be  laid  on  the  correct  daily  use  of  the  spoken  lan- 
guage in  the  class  room,  on  the  correct  and  intelligent  reading  of  French 
(apart  from  translation)  and  on  direct  composition,  including  the  writing 
of  short  themes  in  French. 

2.  From  the  outset  particular  attention  should  be  given  to  developing 
the  ability  to  take  in  the  meaning  of  each  word — and  so,  gradually,  of  the 
whole  sentence — just  as  it  stands;  the  sentence  should  be  read  and  under- 
stood in  the  order  of  the  original,  with  full  appreciation  of  the  force  of  each 
word  as  it  comes,  so  far  as  this  can  be  known  or  inferred  from  that  which 
has  preceded,  and  from  the  form  and  the  position  of  the  word  itself.  The 
habit  of  reading  in  this  way  should  be  encouraged  and  cultivated  as  the 
best  preparation  for  all  the  work  that  the  student  has  to  do. 

3.  It  is  particularly  urged  that  the  reading  be  chosen  from  nineteenth 
century  writers  of  prose,  verse,  and  drama,  and  if  possible  from  more  than 
five  authors. 

The  texts  suggested  are: — 

(i)  For  the  2  unit  requirement:  Laboulaye:  Contes  hleus;  Daudet: 
Trois  Contes  Choisis;  France:  Aheille;  Malot:  Sans  Famille;  de  la  Brete: 
Mon  Oncle  et  Mon  Cure;    Enault:    Le  Chien  du  Capitaine;    Legouv6  et 

•  i.  e.,  In  addition  to  the  2  unit  requirement. 

X  A  part  of  this  may  be  critical  reading,  a  part  rapid  or  outside  reading. 

t  From  texts  not  previously  memorized. 


40  Admission  1918-19 

Labiche:  La  Cigale  chez  les  Fourmis;  Daudet:  Choix  d'Extraits,  or  Le 
Petit  Chose;  Vigny:  La  Canne  de  J  one;  Augier:  Le  Gendre  de  M.  Poirier; 
Foncin:  Le  Pays  de  France^  or  Lavisse:  Histoire  de  France^  11^  annee 
(Armand  Colin,  Paris). 

(2)  For  the  3  unit  requirement:  Lamartine:  Scenes  de  la  Revolution 
franqaise;  Maupassant:  HuitContes  Choisis;  About:  Le  Roi  des  Montagnes; 
Balzac:  Le  Cure  de  Tours;  Colin:  Conies  et  Saynetes;  Colin:  Advanced 
Sight  Translation;  Sandeau:  Mile,  de  la  Seigliere;  Scribe  et  Legouv6: 
Bataille  de  Dames. 

GERMAN  (2  or  3) 

The  requirements  follow  the  recommendations  of  the  Modern 
Language  Association  embodied  in  Document  No.  91  of  the 
College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

See  pages  41  and  42  for  suggestions  concerning  preparation 
in  the  case  of  students  expecting  to  enter  Wellesley  College. 

2  Unit  Requirement 

(Termed  "A,  Elementary,"  by  the  College  Entrance  Exami- 
nation Board.) 
During  the  first  year  the  work  should  comprise: — 
(i)  Careful  drill  upon  pronunciation. 

(2)  The  memorizing  and  frequent  repetition  of  easy  colloquial 
sentences. 

(3)  Drill  upon  the  rudiments  of  grammar,  that  is,  upon  the 
inflection  of  the  articles,  of  such  nouns  as  belong  to  the  language 
of  everyday  life,  of  adjectives,  pronouns,  weak  verbs,  and  the 
more  usual  strong  verbs,  also  upon  the  use  of  the  more  common 
prepositions,  the  simpler  uses  of  the  modal  auxiliaries,  and  the 
elementary  rules  of  syntax  and  word  order. 

(4)  Abundant  easy  exercises  designed  not  only  to  fix  in  mind 
the  forms  and  principles  of  grammar,  but  also  to  cultivate 
readiness  in  the  reproduction  of  natural  forms  of  expression. 

(5)  The  reading  of  from  75  to  100  pages*  of  graduated  texts 
from  a  reader,  with  constant  practice  in  translating  into  Ger- 
man easy  variations  upon  sentences  selected  from  the  reading 
lesson  (the  teacher  giving  the  Enghsh),  and  in  the  reproduction 
from  memory  of  sentences  previously  read. 

During  the  second  year  the  work  should  comprise: — 
(i)  The  reading  of  from  150  to  200  pages*  of  Hterature  in  the 
form  of  easy  stories  and  plays. 

*See  "Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation,"  on  pages  41,  42. 


1918-19  Admission  41 

(2)  Accompanying  practice,  as  before,  in  the  translation  into 
German  of  easy  variations  upon  the  matter  read  and  also  in  the 
off-hand  reproduction,  sometimes  orally  and  sometimes  in 
writing,  of  the  substance  of  short  and  easy  selected  passages. 

(3)  Continued  drill  upon  the  rudiments  of  the  grammar, 
directed  to  the  ends  of  enabling  the  pupil,  first,  to  use  her 
knowledge  with  facility  in  the  formation  of  sentences,  and, 
secondly,  to  state  her  knowledge  correctly  in  the  technical 
language  of  grammar. 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examina- 
tion in  the  2  unit  requirement  in  German  must  be  taken  in  accordance 
with  the  regulation  for  examination  in  ''Finals."     See  page  27. 

3  Unit  Requirement 

(Termed  "B,  Intermediate,"  by  the  College  Entrance  Ex- 
amination Board.) 

THE  WORK   TO   BE   DONE 

The  work  should  comprise  in  addition  to  the  elementary 
course, t  the  reading  of  about  400  pages*  of  moderately  difficult 
prose  and  poetry,  wdth  constant  practice  in  giving,  sometimes 
orally  and  sometimes  in  writing,  paraphrases,  abstracts,  or 
reproductions  from  memory  of  selected  portions  of  the  matter 
read;  also  grammatical  drill  upon  the  less  usual  strong  verbs, 
the  use  of  articles,  cases,  auxiliaries  of  all  kinds,  tenses  and 
modes  (with  special  reference  to  the  infinitive  and  subjunctive), 
and  likewise  upon  word-order  and  w^ord-formation. 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examina- 
tion in  the  3  unit  requirement  in  German  must  be  taken  in  accordance 
with  the  regulation  for  examination  in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 

Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation  for  the  2  and  3  Unit 
Requirements 

I.  The  books  selected  for  class  study  should  be  thoroughly  German  in 
character  and  content.  Intensive  work  on  a  comparatively  small  number 
of  pages  is  preferred  to  a  more  superficial  study  of  a  larger  number  of  pages. 

For  the  2  unit  requirement  the  number  of  pages  read  in  class  should, 
in  general,  not  exceed  300;  but  in  no  case  should  the  amount  be  less  than 
225  pages.  Not  more  than  100  of  these  pages  should  be  taken  from  readers 
arranged  especially  for  beginners. 

For  the  3  unit  requirement  not  more  than  600  pages  in  all  (i.  e.,  300  in 
addition  to  the  maximum  amount  for  the  2  unit  requirement)  should,  in 

*  See  "Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation,"  on  pages  41,  42. 
t  That  is,  the  2  unit  requirement. 


42  Admission  1918-19 

general,  be  read;  but  never  less  than  500  pages.  Not  more  than  one  work 
of  the  classical  period  of  German  Literature  should  be  included.  Besides 
this  intensive  reading,  some  rapid  home  reading  of  easier  texts  (100  pages  or 
more)  is  strongly  urged. 

2.  The  results  desired  can  not  be  obtained  if  a  considerable  portion  of 
the  time  is  spent  on  translation  from  German  into  English,  or  vice  versa. 

3.  Features  that  should  not  be  neglected  are: — 

a.  Vocabulary. — The  careful  study  of  a  goodly  number  of  common 
words  and  expressions  drawn  chiefly  from  the  texts  read. 

h.  Frequent  practice  in  the  oral  and  written  use  of  the  language  w///jom^ 
the  medium  of  English.  This  should  consist  partly  in  answering  in  German 
questions  put  in  German,  based  on  all  the  texts  read  intensively  in  class, 
partly  in  reproducing  in  German,  without  the  aid  of  questions,  the  contents 
of  these  texts  (Freie  Reproduktion). 

SPANISH  (2) 

The  requirements  follow  the  recommendations  of  the  Modern 
Language  Association  embodied  in  Document  No.  91  of  the 
College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

See  page  43  for  suggestions  concerning  preparation  in  the  case 
of  students  expecting  to  enter  Wellesley  College. 

THE   AIM   OF   THE  INSTRUCTION 

At  the  end  of  the  elementary  course  the  pupil  should  be  able 
to  pronounce  Spanish  accurately,  to  read  at  sight  easy  Spanish 
prose,  to  put  into  Spanish  simple  EngUsh  sentences  taken  from 
the  language  of  everyday  Hfe  or  based  upon  a  portion  of  the 
Spanish  text  read,  and  to  answer  questions  on  the  rudiments 
of  the  grammar,  as  indicated  below. 

THE  WORK   TO   BE  DONE 

During  the  first  year  the  work  should  comprise: 
(i)  Careful  drill  in  pronunciation. 

(2)  The  rudiments  of  grammar,  including  the  conjugation  of 
the  regular  and  the  more  common  irregular  verbs,  the  inflection 
of  nouns,  adjectives  and  pronouns  and  the  elementary  rules  of 
syntax. 

(3)  Exercises  containing  illustrations  of  the  principles  of 
grammar. 

(4)  The  careful  reading  and  accurate  rendering  into  good 
English  of  about  too  pages  of  easy  prose  and  verse,  with  trans- 
lation into  Spanish  of  easy  variations  of  the  sentences  read. 


1918-19  Admission  43 

(5)  Writing  Spanish  from  dictation. 

During  the  second  year  the  work  should  comprise: 

(i)  The  reading  of  about  200  pages  of  prose  and  verse. 

(2)  Practice  in  translating  Spanish  into  EngUsh,  and  English 
variations  of  the  text  into  Spanish. 

(3)  Continued  study  of  the  elements  of  grammar  and  syntax. 

(4)  Mastery  of  all  but  the  rare  irregular  verb  forms' and  of  the 
simpler  uses  of  the  modes  and  tenses. 

(5)  Writing  Spanish  from  dictation. 

(6)  Memorizing  of  easy  short  poems. 

The  emphasis  should  be  placed  on  careful,  thorough  work  with 
much  repetition  rather  than  upon  rapid  reading. 

Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation 

1.  Grammar.  In  addition  to  the  verb  drill,  the  following  points  should 
be  emphasized:  difference  between  ser  and  estar;  use  and  position  of  pro- 
nouns; prepositions  required  with  different  verbs  and  adjectives;  use  of 
subjunctive  and  infinitive. 

2.  In  reading,  two  ideas  should  be  kept  in  mind:  (a)  accurate  translation 
especially  of  idiomatic  expressions:  (&)  a  gradual  development  of  the  power 
to  think  in  Spanish,  by  requiring  the  student  to  explain  the  meaning  of 
words  and  phrases  in  Spanish  and  give  variations  of  text  also  in  Spanish. 

3.  From  the  beginning  the  student  should  gradually  become  accustomed 
to  the  use  of  the  spoken  language  in  the  class  room,  training  the  ear  by 
means  of  short  talks  on  different  subjects  given  by  the  teacher  and  the 
tongue  by  the  different  methods  already  suggested.  Original  work  in 
composition  should  also  be  required. 

The  texts  suggested  are : — 

A  collection  of  easy  short  stories  and  lyrics  carefully  graded;  Perez 
Escrich,  Fortima;  Ramos  Carrion  y  Vital  Aza,  Zaragueta;  Tres  Comedias 
Modernas;  Pedro  de  Alarcon,  El  Capitdn  Veneno;  Juan  Valera,  El  pdjaro 
verde;  Palacio  Valdes,  Jose;  Jose  Selgas,  La  mariposa  blanca;  Carolina 
Marcial  Dorado,  Espana  Pintoresca;  the  selected  short  stories  of  Pedro  de 
Alarcon  or  Antonio  de  Trueba. 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan"  the  final  examina- 
tion in  Spanish  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with  the  regulation  for 
examination  in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 

BOTANY  (1) 

The  requirement  may  be  met  in  one  of  two  ways. 
A.  By  the  course  outlined  in  the  Report  of  the  College  En- 
trance Examination  Board,  Document  No.  91. 
The  course  should  cover: — 


44  Admission  1918-19 

(i)  The  general  principles  of  plant  anatomy,  morphology, 
physiology,  and  ecology. 

(2)  A  general  knowledge  of  the  great  groups  or  phyla  of  plants. 

In  the  second  part  of  the  course  students  should  not  only  be- 
come famihar  with  the  prim.ary  subdivisions  of  the  great  groups, 
but  should  be  able  to  trace  the  evolution  of  plant  forms  by 
means  of  a  comparative  study  of  representative  plants  in  the 
various  groups. 

B.  By  covering  the  main  features  in  the  course  as  outlined 
in  the  Laboratory  Guide  for  the  Introductory  Course  in  Welles- 
ley  College.  Copies  of  these  Guides  may  be  secured  if  desired 
through  the  ofl&ce  of  the  Board  of  Admission  of  Wellesley 
College. 

Individual  laboratory  work  by  the  students  is  essential  and 
should  receive  at  least  double  the  amount  of  time  given  to  lec- 
ture and  recitation.  Records  of  the  laboratory  work,  properly 
certified  by  the  teacher,  in  which  stress  is  laid  upon  diagram- 
matically  accurate  drawing  and  precise  expressive  description, 
must  be  presented  on  or  before  June  fifteenth. 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examina- 
tion in  Botany  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with  the  regulation  for  examina- 
tion in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 

CHEMISTRY  (1) 

The  requirement  is  met  by  the  course  outlined  in  the  Re- 
port of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board,  Document 
No.  91. 

The  student  should  perform  experiments  in  the  laboratory 
to  illustrate  the  properties  of  the  most  important  elements, 
both  metallic  and  non-metallic,  and  their  compounds,  and  it 
is  strongly  recommended  that  a  few  of  these  experiments 
should  be  of  a  quantitative  nature.  Work  in  qualitative 
analysis  is  not  recommended. 

When  the  student  offers  Chemistry  as  one  of  the  four 
examinations  under  the  "New  Plan,"  she  will  be  required  to 
present  notebooks  of  laboratory  work.  These  notebooks  must 
be  indexed  and  bear  the  endorsement  of  the  teacher,  certifying 
that  the  notes  are  a  true  record  of  the  student's  work,  and  must 
be  presented  on  or  before  June  fifteenth. 

Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examina- 
tion in  Chemistry  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with  the  regulation  for 
examination  in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 


1918-19  Admission  45 

PHYSICS  (1) 

The  requirement  is  met  by  the  course  outlined  in  the  Re- 
port of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board,  Document 
No.  91.  When  the  student  offers  Physics  as  one  of  the  four 
examinations  under  the  "New  Plan,"  she  will  be  required  to 
present  notebooks  of  laboratory  work.  These  notebooks  must 
be  indexed  and  bear  the  endorsement  of  the  teacher,  certifying 
that  the  notes  are  a  true  record  of  the  student's  work,  and  they 
must  be  presented  on  or  before  June  fifteenth. 

Except  for  students  enteriDg  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  final  examina- 
tion in  Physics  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with  the  regulation  for  exami- 
nation in  "Finals."     See  page  27. 

MUSIC  (1) 

The  requirement  in  Music  (Harmony)  is  met  by  Music  B 
(Harmony)  outlined  in  the  Report  of  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board,  Document  No.  91. 

THE   WORK   TO   BE   DONE 

Knowledge  of  the  following  chords  is  required,  viz: — 

All  the  triads  in  the  major  key. 

All  the  triads  in  the  minor  key. 

The  inversions  of  all  triads. 

The  dominant  seventh  chord  and  its  inversions. 

The  diminished  seventh  chord  and  its  inversions. 
Knowledge  of  all  scales,  major,  minor  (harmonic  and  melodic), 
and  chromatic,  with  their  proper  notation. 

Knowledge  of  the  proper  way  of  making  a  manuscript. 
(See  "How  to  Write  Music"  by  Harris,  published  by  the  H.  W.  Gray 
Co.,  New  York.) 

Knowledge  of  figured  bass. 

This  will  be  demonstrated  by  adding  Soprano,  Alto,  and 
Tenor  to  a  given  figured  bass. 
Note.— Students  who  have  never  studied  Figured  Bass  will  be  given 
an  Unfigured  Bass  to  harmonize. 

Knowledge  of  harmonizing  a  melody. 

This  will  be  tested  by  harmonizing  a  given  melody,  adding 
Alto,  Tenor,  and  Bass. 
Emphasis  should  be  placed  on  the  harmonization  of  melody. 
Except  for  students  entering  under  the  "New  Plan,"  the  examination  in 
Music  must  be  taken  in  accordance  with  the  regulation  for  examination  in 
"Finals."     See  page  27. 


46 


Admission 


1918-19 


ADMISSION    BY   EXAMINATION 
JUNE   EXAMINATIONS 

Candidates  must  take  all  examinations  in  June,  except  such  as,  by  per- 
mission, may  he  postponed  until  September. 

The  admission  examinations  conducted  at  Wellesley  Col- 
lege in  June  are  the  examinations  of  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board,  of  which  Wellesley  College  is  a  member. 
These  examinations  will  be  held  June  16-21,  1919. 

The  College  Entrance  Examination  Board  will  furnish  a 
list  of  places  at  which  these  examinations  will  be  held. 

Below  will  be  found  the  list  of  examinations  of  the  College 
Entrance  Examination  Board,  corresponding  to  the  require- 
ments for  admission  to  Wellesley  College. 


Subject 

No.  OF 

Units 

College  Board  Ex.^minations 

Ordinary 

Comprehensive 

English 

3 

I  and  2 

Cp. 

History 

I 
2 

A  or  C  or  D 
A  with  C  or  D=^ 

Cp.  Ancient  or  English 

or  American 
Cp.  Ancient  with  EngHsh 

or  American 

Mathematics 

3 

A  and  C 

Cp.3 

Latin 

4 

4,  5  and  6 

Cp.  4 

Greek 

I 
2 
3 

Ai,  A2  and  B 
Ai,  F  and  BG 
Ai,F,BGandCH 

Cp.  2 
Cp.3 

French 

2 
3 

A 

A  and  B 

Cp.  2 
Cp.3 

German 

2 
3 

A 

A  and  B 

Cp.  2 
Cp.3 

Spanish 

' 

Spanish 

Cp.2 

Botany- 

I 

Botany 

Chemistry 

I 

Chemistry 

Cp. 

Physics 

I 

Physics 

Cp. 

Harmony 

I 

Music  B 

*  See  page  34. 


1918-19  Admission  47 

t 
All  applications  for  examination,  and  all  other  inquiries 
must  be  addressed  to  the  Secretary  of  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board,  431  West  117th  St.,  New  York  N.Y 
Applications  must  be  made  upon  a  blank  form  to  be  obtamed 
from  the  Secretary  of  the  Board. 

A  list  of  places  at  which  the  examinations  are  to  be  held  in  June,  19 19,  will 
be  pubUshed  about  March  ist.  In  order  that  they  may  receive  proper 
consideration,  requests  that  the  examinations  be  held  at  particular  pomts 
should  be  transmitted  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Board  not  later  than  February 
ist. 

Applications  for  examination  at  points  in  the  United  States  east  of  the 
Mississippi  River  (also  at  Minneapolis,  St.  Louis,  and  other  pomts  on  the 
Mississippi  River),  must  be  received  by  the  Secretary  on  or  before  Monday, 
May  26,  1919;  applications  for  admission  to  examination  elsewhere  m  the 
United  States  must  be  received  on  or  before  Monday,  May  19,  1919;  and 
applications  for  examination  at  points  outside  the  United  States  must  be 
received  on  or  before  Monday,  May  5,  1919- 

Applications  received  later  than  the  dates  named  will  be  accepted  when 
it  is  possible  to  arrange  for  the  examination  of  the  candidates  concerned, 
but  only  upon  payment  of  six  dollars  in  addition  to  the  usual  examination 
fee      Candidates  filing  belated  applications  do  so  at  their  own  risk. 

The  examination  fee  is  six  dollars  for  aU  candidates  examined  at_  points 
in  the  United  States,  and  twenty  dollars  for  all  candidates  exammed  at 
points  outside  of  the  United  States  and  Canada.  The  fee  should  be  re- 
mitted by  postal  order,  express  order,  or  draft  on  New  York  to  the  order 
of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

Regents  examinations  of  the  State  of  New  York  may  be 
substituted  for  the  ordinary  examinations  of  the  College 
Entrance  Examination  Board  in  certain  subjects  provided  the 
grades  are  satisfactory. 

SEPTEMBER   EXAMINATIONS 

Admission  examinations  are  offered  at  the  College  in  Sep- 
tember as  heretofore.  In  general  these  examinations  are 
open  only  to  those  candidates  who  propose  to  enter  the  cur- 
rent September.  In  September,  1919,  the  comprehensive  ex- 
aminations of  the  College  Board  will  be  used  m  place  of  the 
ordinary  examinations. 


48  Admission  1918-19 

schedule  of  examinations 
september,  1919 

Monday,  September  15 

9-12  A.M.  English. 

2-  5  p.  M.  Chemistry,  Physics. 

Tuesday,  September  16 

9-12  A.  M.  Latin. 

2-  5  p.  M.  French,  Spanish. 

Wednesday,  September  17 

9-12  A.  M.  Mathematics. 

2-  5  p.  M.  German. 

Thursday,  September  18 

9-12  A.  m.  History. 

2-  5  p.  m.  Greek. 

Botany,  Music. 

NEW   PLAN    OF   ADMISSION   FOR   SEPTEMBER,  1919 

Four  women's  colleges,  Mount  Holyoke,  Smith,  Vassar,  and 
Wellesley,  announce  a  new  method  of  admission,  to  supersede 
the  system  of  admission  by  certificate  in  19 19.  The  method  of 
admission  by  examination  in  all  subjects  will  be  continued  as  an 
alternative  to  the  new  plan.  No  change  is  made  in  the  sub- 
jects required  for  admission,  no  addition  nor  diminution  in  the 
amount  prescribed  for  admission  is  proposed.  The  new  plan 
is  similar  to  that  adopted  by  Harvard,  Princeton,  and  Yale 
in  prescribing  a  test  of  the  quality  of  the  appHcant's  scholar- 
ship and  intellectual  power. 

The  examinations  required  in  this  plan  are  of  the  type 
known  as  comprehensive  examinations  offered  by  the  College 
Entrance  Examination  Board. 

The  new  method  depends  on  two  kinds  of  evidence: 

I.  Evidence  submitted  by  the  school,  consisting  of 

a.  A  school  report  covering  the  entire  record  of  subjects 
and  grades  for  four  years. 

b.  A  statement  from  the  school  principal  including  an  esti- 
mate of  the  applicant's  scholarly  interests,  special  abiUty,  and 
character. 


1918-19  Admission  49 

2.  Evidence  submitted  by  the  candidate,  consisting  of 
Four  comprehensive  examinations,   selected   from   each  of 
the  following  groups: 

(i)  English  or  History,  selected  by  the  apphcant. 

(2)  A  foreign  language,  selected  by  the  applicant. 

(3)  Mathematics,  or  Chemistry,  or  Physics,  selected  by 
the  apphcant. 

(4)  A  fourth  subject,  designated  by  the  apphcant  from  the 
subjects  which  may  be  offered  for  admission.  This  choice 
must  be  approved  by  the  Committee  on  Admission  of  the 
respective  colleges. 

These  four  examinations  must  be  taken  at  one  time. 

At  least  two  examinations  must  cover  more  than  two  ad- 
mission units*  each. 

In  each  subject  chosen  the  comprehensive  examination 
covering  all  the  units  offered  by  her  for  admission  must  be 
taken  by  the  applicant. 

It  is  desirable  that  applicants  furnish  school  records  and 
state  the  subjects  selected  for  examination  before  January 
fifteenth  of  the  year  in  which  the  examinations  are  to  be  taken. 

The  Committee  on  Admission  of  the  individual  college 
must  give  its  permission,  based  upon  the  evidence  submitted 
by  the  school,  before  the  applicant  may  take  the  examina- 
tions. It  is  proposed  that  the  comprehensive  examination 
set  by  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board  be  judged 
by  readers  appointed  by  this  Board,  and  forw^arded  to  the 
individual  college  for  final  decision  by  the  college  Committee 
on  Admission. 

Under  the  new  plan  the  candidate,  if  admitted  to  college, 
will  be  admitted  free  from  all  conditions.  Failure  to  meet 
completely  the  standard  in  both  kinds  of  evidence  required 
will  not  necessarily  involve  rejection  of  the  applicant;  the 
Committee  may  accept  unusual  excellence  in  one  part  of  the 
credentials  submitted  as  offsetting  unsatisfactory  evidence 
or  even  failure  in  another  part.  If  the  candidate  fails  of 
admission  in  June  she  will  not  be  debarred  from  taking  ex- 
aminations under  the  old  system  in  September,  but  she  may 
not  take  the  comprehensive  examinations  for  admission  under 
the  new  plan  before  June  of  the  following  year. 

•  Note. — A  unit  as  defined  by  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board  represents  a 
year's  study  in  any  subject  in  a  secondary  school,  constituting  approximately  a  quarter  of 
a  full  year's  work. 


50  Admission  1918-19 

It  is  believed  that  this  new  type  of  admission  combines 
the  best  elements  of  the  certificate  system  and  of  the  examina- 
tion system  in  that  it  requires  the  school  record  and  estimate 
of  character,  and  also  demands  examinations  designed  to  test 
the  candidate's  intellectual  power,  not  alone  her  memory  of 
prescribed  facts.  Furthermore,  the  method  offers  the  appli- 
cant the  fullest  opportunity  to  show  her  ability  in  subjects  in 
which  she  beUeves  herself  best  quaUfied. 

This  plan  substitutes  a  uniform  method  of  administration 
in  place  of  the  various  certificate  forms  now  used  by  the  four 
colleges  and  gives  the  school  entire  freedom  in  the  sequence 
of  its  work  making  no  requirement  of  certain  subjects  in  the 
last  years. 

Comprehensive  examinations  according  to  the  new  plan 
are  given  by  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

ADMISSION  TO  ADVANCED  STANDING 

Candidates  for  advanced  standing  must  fulfill  the  require- 
ments for  admission  to  the  freshman  class,  and  must  also  be 
prepared  to  be  examined  in  the  required  studies  previously 
pursued  by  the  class  which  they  wish  to  join,  and  in  a  suffi- 
cient number  of  electives  to  give  full  standing  with  that  class. 

Such  candidates,  if  they  come  from  other  colleges,  may 
present  certificates  of  college  work,  but  should  clearly  under- 
stand that  these  do  not  necessarily  exempt  them  from  ex- 
aminations. The  credentials  required  are  an  official  statement 
of  the  admission  and  college  records,  a  marked  catalogue _  of 
the  institution  from  which  the  candidate  transfers  indicating 
admission  subjects  and  courses  taken,  and  a  letter  of  honorable 
dismissal.  The  marked  catalogue  with  certain  required  sup- 
plementary information  should  be  received  by  February  first. 
The  official  record  and  letter  of  honorable  dismissal  are  due 
not  later  than  July  first.  Candidates  for  advanced  standing 
whose  credentials  admit  them  to  Jtmior  or  higher  rank,  will  take 
precedence  of  candidates  for  the  freshman  class  in  the  assign- 
ment of  rooms. 

All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  the  College 
Recorder. 

Candidates  are  referred  to  page  25  for  the  general  state- 
ment as  to  the  time  at  which  applications  should  be  made. 


1918-19  Admission  51 


ADMISSION  OF   CANDIDATES  FOR  THE  M.A.   DEGREE 

Candidates  for  the  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  must  be  gradu- 
ates of  Wellesley  College  or  of  other  institutions  of  satisfac- 
tory standing,  and  must  present  adequate  credentials  as  to 
their  ability  to  carry  on  the  work  for  the  M.A.  degree. 

Applications  for  admission  as  graduate  students  should  be 
made  upon  forms  which  will  be  furnished  by  the  College  Re- 
corder on  request.  It  is  desirable  that  the  apphcation  be 
sent  by  May  first  of  the  year  in  which  the  student  proposes 
to  enter.  It  should  be  accompanied  by  records  of  standing, 
and,  if  possible,  by  papers  and  reports  of  work. 

A  matriculation  fee  of  five  dollars  is  payable  w^hen  a  student 
is  accepted  as  a  candidate  for  the  Master's  degree.  The 
amount  of  this  fee  will  be  deducted  from  the  diploma  fee  of 
twenty-five  dollars  payable  when  the  degree  is  received. 

Thirty  scholarships,  as  described  on  page  152,  are  open  to 
accepted  candidates  for  the  M.A.  degree,  not  residing  in  col- 
lege buildings.* 

Circulars  containing  full  information  for  graduate  students 
will  be  sent  on  appUcation  to  the  College  Recorder.  For 
requirements  for  the  M.A.  degree  see  page  146. 

ADMISSION  OF  STUDENTS  NOT   CANDIDATES 
FOR  A  DEGREE 

AppKcants  who  give  satisfactory  evidence  of  ability  to 
pursue  advanced  courses  of  study  may  be  admitted  at  the 
discretion  of  the  Board  of  Admission,  provided  that  they 
satisfy  the  requirements  of  the  departments  which  they  pro- 
pose to  enter.  It  will  be  noted  that  opportunities  of  prose- 
cuting work  along  special  lines  are  thus  open  to  persons  of 
experience  and  success  in  teaching  who  possess  the  requisite 
qualifications  for  admission  to  college  classes. 

Apph cants  of  less  maturity  and  acquirement  are  not  ordi- 
narily admitted,  but  if  such  desire  admission  they  must  ex- 
pect to  meet,  by  examination  or  by  certificate  from  an  ac- 
credited school,  the  requirements  prescribed  for  admission 
to  the  freshman  class,  or  a  full  equivalent  for  them  and  to 
satisfy  such  additional  requirements  as  are  prescribed  by  the 

*  With  the  present  dormitory  accommodations  it  is  not  ordinarily  possible  to  reserve 
rooms  on  the  campus  for  graduate  students;  if  candidates  secure  places  in  college  buildings 
they  must  pay  the  full  charge  for  board  and  tuition. 


52  Admission  1918-19 

departments  which  they  propose  to  enter.  Specific  state- 
ments of  these  requirements  in  Music  will  be  found  on  pages 
126,  127;  in  Hygiene  on  page  106. 

All  courses,  graduate  as  well  as  undergraduate,  are  open 
to  special  students,  subject  to  the  conditions  stated  by  the 
various  departments;  but  every  such  student  is  expected  to 
choose  a  primary  subject  to  which  she  should  devote  the 
greater  part  of  her  time.  A  student  who  creditably  com- 
pletes a  prescribed  group  of  courses  will  be  granted  a  certifi- 
cate. 

As  the  capacity  of  halls  of  residence  is  not  sufiicient  for 
candidates  for  degrees,  special  students  cannot  be  lodged  in 
the  college  buildings.  Comfortable  homes  may  be  found  in 
the  village  at  about  the  same  expense  as  in  college  houses. 

All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  the  Secretary 
to  the  Board  of  Admission. 


1918-19  Courses  of  Instruction  53 


COURSES  OF  INSTRUCTION 

The  following  Courses  of  Instruction  are  offered  by  the 
several  departments.  The  College  reserves  the  right  to  with- 
draw the  offer  of  any  course  not  chosen  by  at  least  six  students. 

All  courses  are  classified  in  grades  I,  II,  III;  grade  I  in- 
cluding elementary  courses  and  grade  III  the  most  advanced 
courses.  The  Roman  numeral  following  the  title  of  a  course 
indicates  the  grade  to  which  it  belongs. 

CLASSICAL  ARCH/EOLOGY 

Professor:  Alice  Walton,  Ph.D. 

1.    History  of  Classical  Sculpture  (Art  2).    III. 

Open  to  juniors  arid  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
either  Art,  or  Greek,  or  Latin,  or  ivho  have  completed  one  full  course 
and  are  taking  a  second  in  any  of  these  three  departments.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Walton. 

The  course  will  present  the  principles  of  Greek  and  Roman 
Sculpture,  as  developed  from  the  earhest  beginnings  through  the 
Great  Periods  into  the  Roman,  with  references  to  the  minor  arts, 
such  as  vase  painting,  coins,  and  so  forth,  as  they  are  related  to  the 
main  development.  The  work  of  the  fifth  and  fourth  centuries 
wiU  be  especially  emphasized. 

4t.  History  of  Greek  Pottery.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Opefi  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  and  have  studied  Greek 
for  one  year.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 

The  course  will  include  the  sequence  of  decorative  styles  and  the 
principles  of  design  in  vase  painting  with  especial  emphasis  upon 
the  great  period  of  the  fifth  century.  Constant  reference  will  be 
made  to  the  collection  of  vases  in  the  Boston  Museum  of  Fine  Arts. 

5f .  Greek  and  Roman  Coins.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  4.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 

Greek  coin  types  will  be  considered  especially  for  their  artistic 
quality,  Roman  coins  for  their  historical  value. 

X  Archaeology  4-5  and  Latin  15-18  are  not  usually  given  in  the  same  year. 


54  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

ART 

Professor:  Alice  van  Vechten  Brown. 
Instructors:  Myrtilla  Avery,  M.A. 

Bertha  Knickerbocker  Straight,  B.A. 

LECTURERS:    ELIZA   JACOBUS    NEWKIRK.^'''    M.A. 

Alice  Walton,  Ph.D., 

professor  of  arch/eology. 
Edith  Harriet  Moore, ^^  M.A. 
Assistant:  Alice  Theresa  Coseo,  B.A. 
Museum  Assistant  in  Charge  :  Celia  Howard  Hersey,    B.A. 
Assistant  Cataloguer:  Gladys  Adams  Turnbach,  B.A. 

1.  History  of  Architecture  from  the  Classic  Period  through  the 

Renaissance.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  12.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year.  -^^gg  Newkirk,  Miss  Moore. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  a  general  view  of  the  develop- 
ment of  styles  and  a  thorough  understanding  of  their  essential 
elements,  both  constructive  and  decorative. 

First  semester:  Introduction  to  the  subject  and  history  of  archi- 
tecture from  the  classic  to  the  Gothic  periods. 

Second  semester:  Architecture  of  the  Gothic  and  Renaissance 
periods. 

2.  History  of  Classical  Sculpture  (Archaeology  i).    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
either  Art,  or  Greek,  or  Latin,  or  who  have  completed  one  full  course 
and  are  taking  a  second  in  any  one  of  these  three  departments.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year.  -^^^^^  Walton. 

The  course  will  present  the  principles  of  Greek  and  Roman  Sculp- 
ture, as  developed  from  the  earhest  beginnings  through  the  Great 
Periods  into  the  Roman,  with  references  to  the  minor  arts,  such  as 
vase  painting,  coins,  and  so  forth,  as  they  are  related  to  the  main 
development.  The  work  of  the  fifth  and  fourth  centuries  will  be 
especially  emphasized  in  1918-1919. 

3.  History  of  Italian  Painting  through  the  Fifteenth  Century. 

II. 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  12.     Three  hours  a  week 
>''  ^  y^^''  Miss  Brown. 

1'  Absent  on  leave  for  the  second  semester  in  foreign  service. 
»s  Appointed  for  the  second  semester  only. 


1918-19  Art  55 

A  general  review  of  movements  and  schools  with  special  emphasis 
upon  the  following  artists :  Giotto,  Duccio,  The  Lorenzetti,  Masaccio, 
Botticelli,  Perugino,  Piero  della  Francesca,  Mantegna,  The  Bellini. 
A  text-book  required. 

4.    History  of  Renaissance  Architecture.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Newkirk. 

A  critical  study  of  the  works  of  important  architects  of  the 
Italian  Renaissance. 

6.  Thi;ory  of  Interior  Decoration.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  4  or  course  16.  Three 
hours  a  week  jor  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Straight. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  develop  a  basis  for  taste  and  to  for- 
mulate its  underlying  principles;  to  apply  the  general  principles 
of  design  in  criticism  and  to  give  an  understanding  of  the  esthetic 
values  of  decoration  in  general. 

The  laboratory  method  will  be  used  at  the  discretion  of  the  In- 
structor, including  constructive  criticism  of  existing  examples. 

7.  Special  Studies  in  the  Art  of  the  Middle  Ages.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2  or  10  or  4  or  4.6  or  16.6. 
Also  open  on  recommendation  of  the  Department  concerned  to  students 
in  the  Department  of  History  or  oj  English  Literature  who  have  com- 
pleted or  are  taking  one  full  course  in  the  Mediceval  period  and  have 
taken  or  are  taking  a  second  course  in  the  same  department.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Avery. 

An  introduction  to  the  study  of  the  Art  of  the  Middle  Ages  as 
expressed  especially  in  the  minor  arts,  as  glass,  enamel,  textiles,  wood, 
ivories,  goldsmith's  art,  jewehy,  but  also  including  iconography 
and  interrelations  and  methods  in  general. 

10.  History  of  Italian  Painting  during  the  High  Renaissanci;.  III. 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  j.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Brown. 

In  this  course  critical  study  will  be  given  to  the  position  and 
quaUty  of  the  foUomng  artists:  Leonardo,  Michelangelo,  Raphael, 
Correggio,   Giorgione,  Titian,  Tintoretto,  and  Veronese.     Critical 


56  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

and  artistic  study  of  photographs  is  required,  and  an  understand- 
ing of  the  methods  used  by  Crowe  and  Cavalcaselle,  Morelli,  Beren- 
son  and  other  critics. 

12.  Introductory  Course  in  the  History  of  Art.    I. 

Open  to  freshmen,  sophomores,  and  juniors.  Prerequisite  to  all  other 
courses  except  course  i j.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Brown,  Miss  Avery,  Miss  Coseo. 

This  course,  while  complete  in  itself,  offers  a  review  of  the  general 
development  of  architecture,  sculpture,  and  painting  as  a  founda- 
tion for  further  election,  and  aims  to  develop  an  appreciation  of 
aesthetic  values  by  means  of  a  close  study  of  photographs  and  of  the 
works  themselves,  through  the  laboratory  method. 

13.  Outline  Course  in  the  History  of  Art.    II. 

Open  to  seniors  only.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year.    No  prerequisites. 

Miss  Avery. 

This  course  furnishes  an  outline  of  the  general  development  of 
styles  in  Architecture,  Sculpture,  and  Painting,  and  auns  to  give 
a  general  knowledge  and  aesthetic  appreciation  of  important 
monuments. 

17.  Romanesque  and  Gothic  Sculpture.    II.     (Not  given  in  1918- 

1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  Art  12.  Three  hours  a  week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Avery. 

A  study  of  mediaeval  sculpture  with  emphasis  on  the  French  and 
Italian  sculpture  of  the  thirteenth  century  through  the  Pisani. 
Some  work  will  also  be  included  on  Early  Christian  and  Byzantine 
ivories,  and  there  will  be  a  few  summarizing  lectures  on  the  sculpture 
of  the  Itahan  Renaissance.  The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  make 
the  connection  between  Ancient  and  Renaissance  Art. 

18.  Graduate   Course  in  Italian   Painting.    III.     (Not  offered  in 

1918-1919.) 

19.  Certain  Periods  in  Northern  Art.    III.     (Not  offered  in  191 8- 

1919.) 


1918-19  Art  57 

Studio  Practice 

5.    Studio  Practice.    I. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors.  No  prerequisites.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester.*     {Nine  hours  oj  studio  practice.) 

Miss  Brown,  Miss  Newkirk,  Miss  Coseo. 

Drawing,  sketching,  modeling. 

14.    Studio  Practice.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  5.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester.'*'     {Nine  hours  of  studio  practice.) 

Miss  Brown,  Miss  Straight. 

Sketching,  water  color,  painting  in  oil. 

16.    Studio  Practice.    II. 

Open  by  permission  of  the  department  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have 
completed  course  14.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester.* 
{Nine  hours  of  studio  practice.) 

Miss  Straight. 
Design. 


General  Notes. — Practical  work  may  be  taken  independently 
of  the  History  of  Art  and  will  count  toward  the  degree  if  one  or 
more  courses  in  the  History  of  Art  are  taken  before  graduation. 
After  one  course  in  the  History  of  Art  has  been  completed,  three 
hours  of  practical  work  as  indicated  in  5,  14,  16,  above,  equivalent 
to  nine  hours  of  practice,  may  count  toward  the  degree;  four  and 
one-half  hours  of  practical  work,  equivalent  to  thirteen  and  one- 
half  hours  of  practice,  may  so  count,  if  six  hours  in  the  History  of 
Art  have  been  completed. 

Students  in  art  courses  are  required  to  use  laboratory  methods, 
examining  and  comparing,  sketching  or  describing  the  photographs 
used  in  illustration. 

Previous  preparation  in  drawing  is  not  required. 

N.  B.  Any  student  who  desires  to  give  yearly  the  time  of  one 
full  course  to  studio  work  throughout  her  college  course  may  do  so 
by  spending  five  years  in  college  before  taking  her  degree  instead 
of  four. 

The  art  library  is  open  to  students  from  8.00  to  5.30  daily,  and 
from  7.15  to  9.15  on  announced  evenings. 

•  See  General  Notes. 


58  Courses  or  Instruction  1918-19 

ASTRONOMY 

n        professor:  john  charles  dungan,  ph.d. 
Instructor  :  Leah  Brown  Allen,  M.A. 
Curator  :  Katharine  Bullard  Duncan. 

1.  Descriptive  Astronomy.     I. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Duncan,  Miss  Allen. 

A  general  survey  of  the  facts  of  Astronomy,  of  the  methods  by 
which  they  are  obtained  and  of  the  theories  that  account  for  them; 
facts  with  which  every  educated  person  should  be  familiar,  in  order 
to  understand  the  astronomical  allusions  occurring  in  literature  and 
to  be  alive  to  the  beauty  of  the  order  that  is  about  us. 

2.  Uranography.     I. 

Open  to  seniors  and  graduate  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Allen. 

This  course  will  be  given  Monday  evenings  at  7.30  o'clock. 
On  clear  evenings,  naked  eye  study  of  the  constellations  and  tele- 
scopic observations  of  the  moon,  planets,  and  other  objects  of  in- 
terest. On  cloudy  evenings,  study  of  photographs,  maps,  and 
apparatus  illustrating  the  motions  of  the  heavenly  bodies. 

3.  Advanced  General  Astronomy.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  and  who  have  completed 
or  are  taking  Physics  or  Chemistry.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Allen. 

Practice  with  the  equatorial  telescope,  and  consultation  of 
original  memoirs  in  the  detailed  study  of  modern  discoveries  in 
reference  to  the  solar  system,  variable  stars,  and  stellar  spectroscopy. 

4.  Observatory  Practice.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Mr.  Duncan. 

Practical  work  in  the  astronomy  of  position.  Time,  longitude, 
latitude,  star  catalogues,  mean  and  apparent  place.  Use  of  the 
sextant,  transit  and  other  instruments  of  the  observatory.  Simple 
computations. 


1918-19  Astronomy  59 

5.  Astrophysics.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  a  course  in  Diferential  Calculus 
and  either  a  course  in  Astronomy  or  one  in  Optics.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Duncan. 

Astronomical  spectroscopy,  photography,  and  photometry.  The 
laws  of  radiation.     Solar  and  sidereal  physics;  stellar  motions. 

6.  Determination  of  Orbits.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  Astronomy  i  and  a  year  of  Calculus. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Duncan. 

Determination,  from  three  observations,  of  the  elliptic  and 
parabolic  orbits  of  bodies  in  the  solar  system.  Orbits  of  visual  and 
spectroscopic  binary  stars.     Theory  and  practice. 

7.  Celestial  Mechanics.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  Differential  and  Integral  Calculus. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Duncan. 

The  attraction  of  bodies  of  various  forms  under  Newton's  law  of 
gravitation.  The  problems  of  two  and  of  three  bodies.  Perturba- 
tions. 

Courses  6  and  7  are  companion  courses  and  will  usually  be  given 
in  alternate  years;  both  have  a  mathematical  as  well  as  astro- 
nomical interest.  The  trained  astronomer  should  be  acquainted  with 
both. 

8.  Observatory  Practice.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.  One  hour  a  week  for. 
a  year.    By  special  permission,  two  or  three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Duncan,  Miss  Allen. 

Use  of  the  observatory  equipment  in  work  not  covered  by  Course 
4.  The  specific  subjects  will  vary  from  year  to  year  with  such  chang- 
ing conditions  as  the  configuration  of  the  planets,  the  appearance 
of  new  stars  and  comets,  the  occurrence  of  eclipses,  etc.  The  course 
may  be  taken  repeatedly. 


60  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

BIBLICAL   HISTORY,   LITERATURE,   AND 
INTERPRETATION 

PROFESSOR:    ELIZA    HALL    KENDRICK,    PH.D. 

Angie  Clara  Chapin.  M.A.,  professor  of  greek. 
Associate  Professors:  Adelaide  Imogene  Locke,  B.A.,  S.T.B. 
Olive  Dutcher,  M.A.,  B.D. 
AsissTANT  Professor:  Muriel  Anne  Streibert,  B.A.,  B.D. 

INSTRUCTORS:    LOUISE    PETTIBONE   SmITH,   PH.D. 

Seal  Thompson,  M.A. 

ASSISTANT:    OLIVE   GREENE,    B.A. 

The  class  of  igi8  will  meet  the  requirement  for  a  degree  by 
adding  to  course  i  or  lo  (Calendar  1915-1916)  or  to  courses  i.  2. 
described  below  one  of  the  courses:  3,  4,  5  or  8-12  (Calendar  191 6- 
1917). 

The  class  of  19 19  and  succeeding  classes  will  meet  the  require- 
ment by  taking  t.  2,  and  4  or  5. 

1.  2.  The  Development  of  Thought  in  the  Old  Testament.    I. 

Required  of  sophomores.  Course  i,  three  hours  first  semester.  Course 
2,  three  hours  second  semester.  Course  i  will  he  ofered  also  in  the 
second  semester,  and  course  2  in  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Locke,  Miss  Dutcher,  Miss  Streibert, 
Miss  Smith,  Miss  Thompson,  Miss  Greene. 
It  is  the  purpose  of  this  course  to  offer  studies  in  the  develop- 
ment of  religion  and  ethics  in  the  Old  Testament.  There  will  be 
included  such  historical  study  of  Hebrew  national  life  and  such 
presentation  of  the  literary  problems  connected  with  the  Old  Testa- 
ment as  are  necessary  to  make  inteUigible  the  development  of 
thought. 

4.    The  Life  of  Christ.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  i  and  2.     Three  hours 
a  week  either  semester. 

Miss  Kendrick, 
Miss  Streibert,  Miss  Thompson. 
Aim:  (i)  To  study  the  environment  of  Christ  in  the  govern- 
ment, institutions,  manner  of  life,  ideals,  and  literature  of  the  Jewish 
people  of  his  time. 

(2)  To  follow  the  unfolding  of  his  life  from  the  historical  point 
of  view. 

(3)  To  study  the  teachings  of  Christ:  (a)  in  their  historical 
connections  as  far  as  possible;  (6)  topically. 

(4)  To  become  acquainted  with  the  leading  problems  regarding 
the  person  and  work  of  Christ,  with  different  points  of  view  and  with 
the  best  literature  on  the  subject. 


1918-19  Biblical  History  61 

8.  The  Apostolic  Age.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  4.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Kendrick,  Miss  Thompson. 

It  is  the  purpose  of  this  course  to  offer  studies  in  the  essential 
teachings  of  Christianity  as  represented  by  the  several  New  Tes- 
tament writers  outside  of  the  authors  of  the  Synoptic  Gospels. 
There  will  be  included  such  historical  study  of  New  Testament 
times  and  such  presentation  of  the  questions  connected  with  New 
Testament  Introduction  as  are  necessary  to  make  intelHgible  the 
development  of  Christian  thought. 

6.    Greek  Testament.    Text  study  of  the  Synoptic  Gospels.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  i  and  2  and  Greek  i.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Chapin. 

6.  Greek  Testament.     Special  study  of  the  Gospel  of  John.     II. 

(Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  5.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Chapin. 

7.  Sources  of  New  Testament   Greek  in  the  Septuagint.    III. 

(Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  5  {Calendar  igid-igif). 
One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Chapin. 

9.  History  of  Religions.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  the  required  courses  in  Biblical 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Locke. 

Introductory  study  of  primitive  religions  followed  by  an  outline 
comparative  study  of  the  rise  and  development  of  the  leading 
historic  faiths. 

11.    Elementary  Hebrew.    HI. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Smith. 

The  elements  of  Hebrew  grammar,  with  practice  in  translation 
and  the  memorizing  of  a  vocabulary.  Reading  of  selections  from 
the  Old  Testament. 

At  the  end  of  the  course  the  student  should  be  able  to  read  simple 
Hebrew  and  to  use  the  language  in  the  study  of  the  Old  Testament. 


62  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

14.  Second  Year  Hebrew.    III.     (Not  offered  in  19 18-19 ig.) 

Open  to  those  who  have  completed  course  11.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Smith, 

Reading  from  the  Prophets.  Study  of  Hebrew  syntax.  The 
elements  of  text  criticism. 

15.  Interpretations  of  Christianity.    III.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Kendrick. 

The  aim  of  this  course  will  be  to  trace  in  the  devotional  and  con- 
troversial literature  of  certain  of  the  most  important  periods  of  the 
Christian  Church,  from  the  beginning  to  the  present  day,  varying 
conceptions  of  the  essentials  of  Christianity,  to  consider  the  effect 
upon  these  conceptions  of  some  of  the  most  important  currents  of 
thought  of  the  period  studied  and  to  make  constant  comparison  with 
New  Testament  religion. 


BOTANY 

Professors:  Margaret  Clay  Ferguson,  Ph.D. 
Lincoln  Ware  Riddle,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professor:  Laetitia  Morris  Snow,  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professors:  Mary  Campbell  Bliss,  M.A. 

Ruth   Florence  Allen, lo  Ph.D. 
Mabel  Annie  Stone,   M.A. 
Instructors:  Alice  Maria  Ottley,   M.A. 
Helen  Isabel  Davis,   B.A. 
Emma  Luella   Fisk,   B.A. 
Murray  Philip  Horowitz,   M.S. 
Assistants:  Regina  Emma  Stockhausen,   M.A. 

LUCILE    ROUSH,     B.A. 

Pauline  Adelaide  Shorey,  B.A. 
Curator:  Edith  Jennett  Grimes,  B.A. 
Laboratory  Assistant:   Ruth   Margery  Addoms.   B.A. 

5.    Plant  Studies.    I. 

Open  to  freshmen  and  sophomores.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Ferguson,  Miss  Bliss,  Miss  Stone,  Miss  Fisk, 

Miss  Stockhausen,  Miss  Roush,  Miss  Addoms. 

This  course  is  designed  to  bring  the  student  into  sympathy  with 
the  plant  world,  to  cultivate  the  power  of  careful  observation, 

10  Resigned  November,  1918. 


1918-19  Botany  63 

to  give  a  knowledge  of  the  fundamental  principles  of  plant  life 
and  plant  breeding,  and  of  the  general  principles  of  floriculture. 
The  course  is  developed  on  purely  scientific  lines,  but,  at  the  same 
time,  it  seeks  so  to  relate  our  study  of  plants  to  all  life  as  to  give 
the  student  that  familiar  and  intimate  acquaintance  with  her  living 
environment  which  makes  for  the  broadest  culture  of  to-day. 

The  structure  and  development  of  certain  plants  are  studied 
from  seed  germination  to  fruit  formation,  and  the  more  simple 
problems  connected  with  the  adjustment  of  plants  to  their  sur- 
roundings are  investigated.  Students  are  trained  to  know  the 
herbaceous  plants  in  their  spring  condition,  to  recognize  the  early 
flowers,  and  to  know  our  common  trees  both  in  their  winter  and  in 
their  summer  aspect. 

1.  General  Botany.    II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors,  and  to  sophomores  who  have  completed 
course  5  or  its  equivalent.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Riddle,  Miss  Snow. 

This  course  treats  of  plant  structures,  plant  physiology,  the 
relation  of  plants  to  their  environment,  and  the  evolution  of  the 
plant  kingdom.  A  certain  amount  of  field  work  accompanies  the 
laboratory  studies. 

2.  Natural  History  op  the  Thallopiiytes  and  Bryophytes.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Mr.  Riddle. 

A  study  of  the  structure  and  classification  of  the  Algae,  Fungi, 
Lichens,  Liverworts,  and  Mosses;  of  the  occurrence  of  these  plants 
in  nature;  and  of  their  adaptation  to  the  environment. 

3.  Taxonomy  and   Geographical  Distribution  of  the   Spermato- 

PHYTES.     III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Mr.  Riddle. 

4.  Bacteria,  Yeasts,  and  Moulds  in  the  Home.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  one  full  course  in  Botany  or 
Chemistry  or  Zoology.  Three  hours  a  week  for  a  semester;  offered  in 
both  semesters. 

Miss  Snow,  Miss  Allen,  Miss  Shorey. 

This  course  is  devoted  to  a  consideration  of  bacteria,  yeasts, 
and  moulds  in  their  relation  to  the  affairs  of  daily  life;    special 


64  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

emphasis  is  placed  on  the  importance  of  these  organisms  in  the 
household,  their  connection  with  water  and  milk  suppUes,  and 
with  the  preservation  of  foods. 

7.  Plant  Problems.    III. 

Open  to  graduate  students.     Three  or  six  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Ferguson,  Mr.  Riddle,  Miss  Snow. 

This  is  primarily  a  laboratory  course,  but  a  definite  weekly 
appointment  is  made  with  each  student  for  a  report  of  the  papers 
read  and  of  the  progress  of  her  study;  and  a  final  paper  or  thesis 
embodying  the  results  of  her  investigations  is  required.  A  special 
problem  in  one  of  the  following  subjects  is  assigned  to  each  student: 
embryology,  histology,  physiology,  ecology,  taxonomy. 

8.  Ferns  and  Flowering  Plants.    II.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  5  or  6.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  a  year. 

9.  Plant  Ecology.    III.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Snow. 

This  course  considers  plants  in  relation  to  their  environment. 
It  includes  a  study  of  (i)  the  changes  in  form  and  structure  of 
plant  parts  in  response  to  variations  in  external  conditions,  (2) 
the  vegetation  of  the  earth  in  past  ages  and  (3)  the  present  grouping 
of  plants  according  to  environmental  conditions. 

A  large  proportion  of  the  laboratory  work  will  be  conducted  in 
the  greenhouses  and  the  field. 

11.    Landscape  Architecture.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  its  equivalent  and  have 
completed  or  are  taking  practical  work  in  Art.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Davis. 

A  preliminary  study  of  the  principles  of  design  as  applied  to  the 
problems  of  landscape  architecture.  The  lectures  are  supplemented 
by  field  study  of  the  ornamental  value  of  plant  material;  by  excur- 
sions to  various  estates  for  observation;  and  by  laboratory  practice 
in  original  design. 


1918-19  Botany  65 

12.  Horticulture  and  Landscape  Gardening.    II.     (Not  offered  in 

1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  its  equivalent.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Davis. 

13.  Comparative  Morphology,  Cytology,  and  Embryology.    III. 

Open  to  seniors  {and  by  special  permission  to  juniors)  who  have  com- 
pleted  course  i.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  year. 

Miss  Ferguson,  Miss  Stone. 

Studies  in  technique;  the  evolution  of  plant  forms;  structure, 
development  and  contents  of  the  plant  cell;  nuclear  and  cell  divi- 
sion; tissue  formation.  Especial  emphasis  is  placed  on  tracing  the 
development  and  homologies  of  sporogenous,  reproductive,  and 
embryological  organs,  and  on  the  problems  of  evolution  and  in- 
heritance. In  connection  with  these  studies,  practical  exercises 
are  given  in  the  most  approved  methods  of  cytological  and  his- 
tological technique. 

14.  Botanical  Seminary.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Required  of  graduate  students,  and  open  to  seniors  by  permission  of 
the  department.    One  hour  a  week  for  the  year. 

Miss  Ferguson. 

15.  Advanced  Bacteriology.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  Botany  4,  and  have  completed  or 
are  taking  a  course  in  Chemistry.  A  course  in  Physics  is  recommended, 
hut  not  required.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Horowitz. 

This  course  gives  practical  training  in  the  methods  used  in  bac- 
teriological laboratories  and  considers  the  problems  of  Public  Health. 


WAR  EMERGENCY  COURSE. 

10.    The  Principles  of  Agriculture.    II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  in  college  one  year  of 
Botany,  Chemistry,  Geography,  Physics  or  Zoology.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  a  year.  This  course  does  not  count  toward  the  science  re- 
quirement. 

Miss  Davis,  Miss  Ferguson,  Miss  Ottley. 

This  course  aims  to  teach  the  fundamental  principles  of  scientific 
agriculture.  In  so  far  as  possible  the  practical  application  of  these 
principles  will  be  carried  out  on  the  farm  during  the  fall  and  spring. 


66  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 


CHEMISTRY 

Associate  Professor:  Oharlotte  Almira  Bragg,  B.S. 
Assistant  Professor:  Helen  Somersby  French,  Ph.D. 
instructors:  gertrude  may  ware,  m.a. 
Lillian  Eloise  Baker,  B.A. 
Assistant:  Anne  Taylor  Caswell,  B.A. 

1.  Elementary  Chemistry.    Lectures  and  Laboratory  Work.    I. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bragg,  Miss  Baker. 

Course  i  is  for  beginners  in  Chemistry,  and  is  intended  to  fa- 
miliarize the  student  with  the  important  properties  of  the  elements 
and  their  compounds,  with  their  modes  of  preparation,  and  with 
such  tests  as  shall  lead  up  to  the  study  of  systematic  Qualitative 
Analysis;  also  to  present  the  laws  governing  chemical  reactions, 
the  meaning  of  chemical  equations,  and  the  more  recent  theories 
adopted  in  the  science. 

2.  Qualitative  Analysis.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  4.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Ware. 

The  lectures  of  this  course  deal  with  the  theory  of  solutions  and 
the  laws  of  chemical  and  physical  equilibrium  as  a  basis  for  ana- 
lytical work,  with  special  applications  to  the  work  of  the  laboratory. 
The  separation  and  the  characteristic  reactions  of  the  important 
metals  and  acids  are  learned  by  the  analysis  of  solutions  of  known 
composition,  and  the  work  is  constantly  tested  by  the  analysis  of 
unknown  substances. 

3.  Qualitative  Analysis.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  2  and  5  and  have  completed 
or  are  taking  course  7.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Ware. 

4.  General  Chemistry.    I. 

Open  to  students  who  have  met  the  adfnission  requirement  or  its  equiv- 
alent.    Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  French,  Miss  Caswell. 

The  course  aims  to  give  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  funda- 
mental principles  of  the  science,  and  to  take  up,  so  far  as  time 
allows,  subjects  of  interest  and  importance  in  daily  life. 


1918-19  Chemistry  67 

5.  Quantitative  Analysis.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Ware. 

This  course  is  designed  to  give  training  in  manipulation  in  gravi- 
metric and  volumetric  analysis.  The  theories  discussed  in  course 
2  are  applied  to  the  work  of  the  laboratory,  and  problems  related 
to  the  work  are  included  in  the  class  discussions. 

6.  Air,  Water,  and  Food  Analysis.    III.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  i,  2,  5,  aftd  7.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Bragg. 

7.  Organic  Chemistry,  with  Laboratory  Work  in  Organic  Prep- 

arations.   III. 
Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  courses 
2  and  5  and,  by  special  permission,  to  seniors  who  have  completed  course 
I  or  course  4.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  French,  Miss  Caswell. 

8.  Theoretical  Chemistry.    III. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  7.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  French. 

9.  Selected  Subjects  in  Theoretical  and  Physical  Chemistry,  with 

laboratory  work  in  the  determination  of  vapor  densities 
and  molecular  WEIGHTS.     III.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  seniors  and  graduates  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  8. 

Three  hours  a  week  for  a  semester. 

10.  Quantitative  Analysis.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  2  and  5  and  have  completed 
or  are  taking  course  7.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Ware. 

11.  Historical  Chemistry.    II.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  4.     Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  first  semester. 

This  course  treats  of  the  beginnings  of  Chemistry,  and  its  de- 
velopment to  modem  times.  It  includes  a  study  of  the  work 
of  the  alchemists,  and  of  the  Uves  and  discoveries  of  the  more 
prominent  founders  of  the  science. 


68  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

12.  Advanced  Laboratory  Course:  Organic  Preparations.  III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  7.     Three  hours  a  week  for 
the  first  semester. 

Miss  French. 

13.  Chemistry  in  its  Applications  to  Daily  Life.    II.     (Not  given  in 

1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  course  4.     Three  hours 
a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  French. 

The  subject-matter  of  the  course  will  include  such  topics  as  the 
chemistry  of  illuminants,  of  photography,  of  soaps;  pure  air  and 
pure  water,  how  recognized  and  how  obtained;  the  modern  prob- 
lems of  dye-stuffs  and  of  various  other  chemical  industries;  and 
the  question  of  pure,  economical,  and  nourishing  food. 

Lectures,  with  illustrative  experiments.     No  laboratory  work. 

This  course  will  not  count  toward  a  major  in  Chemistry. 

14.  Chemistry  in  its  Applications  to  Other  Sciences.    II.     (Not 

given  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  course  4.     Three  hours 
a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  French. 

This  course  will  include  certain  subjects  from  Physical  Chemistry, 
as  Absorption,  Osmosis,  Thermo-chemistry,  Electrolytes,  Colloids, 
Radio-activity;  some  chapters  from  Organic  Chemistry,  including 
the  Fats,  Carbohydrates  and  Proteids;  together  with  a  review  of 
such  parts  of  Inorganic  Chemistry  as  might  be  of  special  use  in 
the  study  of  other  sciences. 

Lectures  with  illustrative  experiments.     No  laboratory  work. 

This  course  will  not  count  toward  a  major  in  Chemistry. 


ECONOMICS  AND  SOCIOLOGY 

Associate  Professor  :  Anna  Prichitt  Youngman,  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professor;  Donald  Skeele  Tucker,  M.A. 
Instructors;  Marion  Dutton  Savage,  M.A. 
Joseph  Lyons  Snider,  B.A.is 

1.    Elements  of  Economics.    I. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors,  but  intended  primarily  for 
sophomores  and  juniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Youngman,  Mr.  Tucker. 

An  introductory  course  designed  to  give  the  student  acquaintance 
with  economic  facts  and  training  in  economic  reasoning.     Illus- 

"  Appointed  for  the  second  semester  only. 


1918-19  Economics  and  Sociology  69 

trations  will  be  drawn  from  actual  observation  of  the  conditions 
determining  prices,  land  values,  wages,  profits,  and  standards  of 
living.  In  the  second  semester,  certain  legislative  problems  re- 
lating to  currency,  banking,  the  tariff,  etc.,  will  be  discussed  in  class. 

2.  Economic  History  of  the  United  States.    II.     (Not  offered  in 

1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  course  75.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Mr.  Tucker. 

A  study  of  our  national  development  in  its  material  and  social 
aspects. 

3.  Economic  History  of  England.    I. 

Open  without  prerequisite  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Mr.  Tucker. 

This  course  will  include  a  survey  of  the  chief  economic  changes 
in  English  history,  but  especial  attention  will  be  devoted  to  the 
period  smce  the  industrial  revolution.  The  course  will  be  closed  by 
a  series  of  lectures  on  the  problems  which  have  arisen  in  the  conduct 
of  the  present  war. 

4.  Socialism  and  Social  Reform.    III.     (Not  offered  in  191 8-1 919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  courses  15-13.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

First  Semester.  A  history  of  the  development  of  socialist 
thought,  including  a  brief  survey  of  the  Utopian  Socialists  and  a 
critical  study  of  the  theories  of  Karl  Marx. 

Second  Semester.  A  comparative  study  of  the  aims  and  methods 
of  different  types  of  socialist  organizations  and  of  contrasting 
schools. 

Some  or  all  of  the  following  will  be  considered:  individualism, 
philosophic  anarchism,  trade  unionism,  syndicaHsm,  guild  socialism, 
co-operation,  progressivism  and  the  single  tax.  The  scope  and 
limits  of  government  functions  will  be  critically  considered. 

5.  Railroads:   Rates  and  Regulation.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  courses  15-13-  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Mr.  Tucker. 

A  brief  survey  of  some  of  the  fiscal,  economic,  and  social  problems 
arising  from  our  modem  means  of  transportation.     Among   the 


70  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

topics  discussed  will  be  the  following:  history  of  American  railroad 
construction;  railway  charters;  powers  of  directors  and  stock- 
holders; nature  of  railway  securities;  financing,  construction  and 
development  work;  inter-company  relations  and  the  construction 
of  systems;  railroad  traffic  and  rates;  forms  of  waste  that  are  profit- 
able to  the  companies  that  commit  them;  history  of  American  railway 
regulation;  the  problems  and  possibilities  of  government  operation. 

6.  Social  Economics.    III. 

Open  to  seniors  {and  hy  special  permission  to  juniors)  who  have  com- 
pleted course  i  or  courses  15-13.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Savage. 

A  study  of  the  dependent,  defective,  and  delinquent  classes, 
accompanied  by  discussion  of  methods  of  deaUng  with  each. 

7.  Social  Economics.    III. 

Open  to  seniors  {and  hy  special  permission  to  juniors)  who  have  com- 
pleted course  i  or  courses  15-13.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Savage. 

A  discussion  of  problems  of  community  life,  and  of  methods  of 
meeting  certain  normal  social  needs,  such  as  housing,  sanitation, 
education,  and  recreation. 

8.  The  Modern  Labor  Movement.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  courses  15-13.     Three 
\       hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Savage. 

A  study  of  modem  industrial  problems  with  special  attention  to 
the  viewpoint  of  the  employer  and  that  of  organized  labor. 

9.  An  Introduction  to  General  Sociology.    II.     (Not    offered  in 

1918-1919.) 

Open  to  seniors  and  hy  special  permission  to  juniors.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  a  year. 

An  introduction  to  the  study  of  society — its  development  and  its 
present  structure  and  functioning. 

It  is  proposed  to  take  up:  {a)  the  environmental,  biological,  psy- 
chological, and  technological  factors  conditioning  society;  {h)  social 
relations  among  backward  peoples;  (c)  facts  and  theories  of  social 
organization  with  especial  reference  to  present  conditions. 


1918-19  Economics  and  Sociology  71 

10.  Immigration.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  course  15.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Mr.  Snider. 

A  study  of  immigration  into  the  United  States,  the  race  elements 
represented,  and  their  geographical  distribution;  the  social,  polit- 
ical, and  economic  influence  of  our  foreign  populations;  the  history 
of  restrictive  legislation  and  the  arrangements  thus  far  provided 
for  the  reception  and  care  of  aliens. 

11.  General  Principles  OF  Taxation.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  courses  15-13.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Youngman. 

This  course  will  deal  with  the  principles  of  taxation  with  special 
reference  to  conditions  in  the  United  States.  Each  student  will 
be  required  to  make  a  study  of  the  tax  system  of  some  one  state 
or  municipahty. 

12.  Corporate  Organization  and  Control.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  courses  15-13.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Youngman. 

The  development  of  large  scale  production  and  the  growth  of 
corporate  business;  characteristic  forms  of  industrial  combination; 
state  and  federal  regulatory  legislation  and  judicial  decisions  re- 
lating thereto;  alleged  advantages  and  evils  of  industrial  combina- 
tion; proposed  remedies  for  the  latter. 

13.  Economic  Development.    II. 

Open  only  to  students  who  have  completed  course  15.     Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  second  semester. 

Mr.  Tucker. 

A  survey  of  the  chief  stages  of  economic  life,  in  an  effort  to 
understand  the  development  of  the  institutions  which  character- 
ize our  present-day  money  economy.  Especial  emphasis  will  be 
laid  on  the  distinctive  features  of  modem  industrialism. 

15.    Introduction  to  Economic  Life.    II. 

Open  to  seniors  and  juniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Mr.  Tucker. 

A  brief  survey  of  modern  economic  life  with  especial  reference 
to  the  working  of  the  money  economy.    The  topics  considered  will 


72  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

include  production,  its  factors  and  limits;  money  and  banking; 
the  determination  of  the  value  of  money,  the  fixing  of  prices  and 
the  forces  determining  wages,  salaries,  and  other  incomes. 

16.  Money  and  Banking.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  coarse  i  or  courses  15-13.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Youngman. 

The  course  deals  mainly  with  the  principles  of  money  and^  bank- 
ing, but  it  is  also  designed  to  give  the  student  some  acquaintance 
with  the  history  and  chief  characteristics  of  typical  modern  systems 
of  banking. 

17.  Economics  of  Consumption.    II.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  course  15.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

This  course  will  deal  with  both  theoretical  and  practical  aspects 
of  the  use  of  wealth.  Some  or  all  of  the  following  topics  will  be 
discussed:  the  division  of  pubUc  and  private  incomes  between 
use  as  capital  and  use  for  immediate  consumption  (functions  and 
limits  of  saving),  "Engel's  law,"  standards  of  living,  workingmen's 
budgets  and  the  minimum  wage,  Veblen's  theory  of  conspicuous 
consumption,  the  role  and  social  limits  of  luxury,  final  utiUty  and 
its  relation  to  expenditure.  The  function  of  women  in  directing 
household  expenditure  will  be  considered  throughout. 

20.    Industrial  and  Social  Legislation.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  courses  15-13- 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Savage. 

A  study  of  government  regulation  of  industrial  and  social  con- 
ditions by  means  of  labor  laws,  social  insurance,  and  other  reform 
measures. 

EDUCATION 

Professors:  Arthur  Orlo  Norton,*  M.A. 

Anna  Jane  McKeag,  Ph.D.,  LL.D. 
Assistant  PROFESSOR:  Muriel  Anne  Streibert,  B.A.,  B.D., 

assistant  professor  of  biblical  history. 
Lecturer:  Anna  White  Devereaux. 
6.    Introductory  Course  in  Education.    II. 

Open  to  juniors  who  have  completed  or  who  are  taking  the  required 
course  in  Philosophy,  and  to  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  McKeag. 

*  Absent  on  Sabbatical  leave  in  Government  service. 


1918-19  Education  73 

This  course  is  organized  to  meet  the  needs  not  only  of  prospec- 
tive teachers  but  also  of  all  who  are  interested  in  the  intelligent 
direction  of  education  as  a  phase  of  social  service.  Its  purpose  is 
to  give  a  general  survey  of  the  practices,  theories,  and  problems  of 
modern  education. 

The  work  of  the  course  is  illustrated  throughout  the  year  by 
visits  to  assigned  schools  for  the  observation  of  children  and  of 
class-room  practice,  by  examples  of  school  work,  and  by  lantern 
slides. 

2.  Advanced   Course  in  the  History   of   Education.    III.     (Not 

given  in  1918-1919.) 
Opefi  to  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  Education  6,  and  to 
graduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Norton. 

From  the  point  of  view  of  this  course  modern  education  appears 
as  the  outcome  of  a  long  series  of  historic  events,  the  effects  of 
which  are  visible  in  the  ideals,  studies,  modes  of  teaching,  and 
organization  of  our  present  schools,  colleges,  and  universities. 
The  purpose  of  the  year's  work  is  to  study  in  some  detail  the  most 
important  events  in  the  history  of  European  and  American  edu- 
cation, and  their  effects  on  the  present  course  of  educational  affairs. 

The  lectures  are  constantly  illustrated  by  original  manuscripts, 
facsimiles,  early  editions  of  noted  text-books,  and  similar  historical 
documents,  by  translations  from  the  sources,  and  by  numerous 
lantern  slides. 

3.  Problems  in  Education.     III.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  graduates  who  have  completed  a  full  course  in  Education. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  McKeag. 

The  subject-matter  of  this  course  will  vary  from  year  to  year 
in  accordance  with  the  equipment  and  needs  of  students.  The 
topics  for  study  will  be  chosen  from  the  field  of  experimental  or 
statistical  investigation  or  from  that  of  the  general  science  of  edu- 
cation. 

4.  Secondary  Education.    III. 

Open  by  permission  to  seniors  who  have  completed  a  ftdl  course  in 
Education,  and  to  graduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  McKeag. 

The  history  and  principles  of  secondary  education,  with  special 
reference  to  the  high  schools  of  the  United  States.  A  study  will  be 
made  of  approved  methods  of  teaching  English,  foreign  languages, 
sciences,  mathematics,  and  history  in  high  schools.     Opportunity 


74  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

will  be  given  for  observation  of  the  work  of  specially  successful 
high  school  teachers  in  the  subject  which  the  student  expects  to 
teach. 

In  connection  with  this  course  the  Department  of  Education 
requires  from  graduates  a  semester  of  systematic  practice  teaching 
in  a  high  school,  to  be  done  as  independent  work,  under  the  guid- 
ance of  the  Department  and  with  the  co-operation  of  the  principal 
of  the  high  school.  Practice  in  teaching  is  not  open  to  under- 
graduates. 

9.    Elementary  Education:  History,  Theory,  Practice,  and  Prob- 
lems.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  io  graduates  who  have  completed  Philosophy  i,  or  an  equivalent, 
and  one  full  course  in  Education.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Course  9  includes  a  brief  survey  of  the  history  of  elementary  edu- 
cation in  the  United  States,  a  detailed  study  of  present  elementary 
school  practice,  a  critical  discussion  of  the  principles  which  underHe 
that  practice,  and  the  investigation  of  selected  problems  in  element- 
ary education. 

The  purpose  of  the  course  is  to  give  to  each  student  a  knowledge 
of  existing  conditions  and  problems,  some  facility  in  handhng  the 
tools  and  methods  of  practical  research  in  this  field,  and  abihty  to 
formulate  her  views  as  to  the  ideas,  scope,  and  work  of  the  elemen- 
tary schools. 

5.    Principles  and  Problems  of  Religious  Education.    III. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  the  first  semester  of  Education  6. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Streibert. 

The  aims  of  rehgious  education  in  the  Hght  of  the  fundamental 
characteristics  and  present  tendencies  of  Christianity.  The  re- 
hgious development  of  the  individual.  The  selection  and  use  of 
BibUcal  material  for  different  ages.  The  Sunday  school:  its 
organization,  curricula,  and  methods  of  teaching;  its  relation  to 
the  home. 

10.    Principles  and  Methods   of  Teaching  French  in  Secondary 
Schools.    III.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  in  1918-igig  to  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  French 
4,  and  thereafter  only  to  seniors  who  have  also  completed  the  first  se- 
mester of  Education  6.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  teach  the  students  how  to  impart  to 
their  pupils,  in  the  shortest  possible  time,  a  speaking,  understanding, 
reading,  and  writing  knowledge  of  French.  After  a  survey  of  the 
general  difficulties  arismg  from  Enghsh  habits  of  thought  and  of 


1918-19  Education  75 

expression  already  formed,  the  instructor  will  deal  with  the  several 
aspects  of  modem  language  work,  such  as  the  teaching  of  vocabu- 
lary, of  grammar,  of  composition  and  of  translation,  the  selection 
and  use  of  books,  the  correction  and  elimination  of  errors,  the 
equipment  of  the  teacher  and  of  her  department  in  the  high  school. 

7t.  The  History,  Theory,  and  Problems  of  the  Kindergarten.    III. 
(Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  graduates  who  have  completed  Philosophy  i  or  an  equivalent, 
and  one  full  course  in  Education.  {Courses  7  and  8  must  ordinarily 
he  taken  together.)     Four  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Devereaux. 

The  reconstruction  of  educational  theories  in  the  eighteenth 
and  early  nineteenth  centuries.  The  relation  of  this  reconstruc- 
tion to  the  work  of  Froebel.  The  origins  and  history  of  the  kinder- 
garten movement  in  Europe  and  America.  Exposition  and  criti- 
cism of  the  theory  of  kindergarten  practice.  Other  forms  of  sub- 
primary  education:  the  Waverley  plan,  the  Montessori  methods; 
their  relation  to  kindergarten  practice.  The  kindergarten  and  the 
primary  school. 

8.    Kindergarten    Practice:     Materials,     Methods,     Exercises, 
Technique.    III.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  graduates  who  have  completed  Philosophy  i,  or  an  equivalent, 
and  one  full  course  in  Education  (see  note  below).  Four  hours  a 
week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Devereaux. 

Course  8  deals  in  general  with  practical  applications  of  the 
theory  given  in  course  7.  It  includes  on  the  one  hand  a  detailed 
study  of  the  materials,  devices,  exercises,  and  methods  of  the 
kindergarten,  and  on  the  other,  extensive  observation  of  their 
use,  with  practice  in  teaching. 

Note. — Courses  7  and  8  must  ordinarily  be  taken  together. 
They  will  occupy  two  thirds  of  the  student's  time  for  the  year. 
Students  who  are  preparing  to  conduct  kindergartens  or  kinder- 
garten training  classes  are  required  to  take  a  third  course,  usually 
in  Education,  to  be  determined  on  consultation  with  the  head  of 
the  department  of  Education.  AbiHty  to  play  on  the  piano  the 
music  of  kindergarten  songs  and  games  is  a  prerequisite  of  these 
courses. 
X  See  note  under  course  8. 


76  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 


ENGLISH 


I.     English  Literature 


Professors:  Katharine  Lee  Bates.  M.A.,  Litt.D. 

VIDA    DUTTON    SCUDDER.  M.A. 

Margaret  Pollock  Sherwood,  Ph.D. 
Alice  Vinton  Waite.  M.A. 
Martha  Hale  Shackford,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Professors:  Laura  Emma  Lockwood,^  Ph.D. 
Charles  Lowell  Younq,  B.A. 
Martha  Pike  Conant,^  Ph.D. 
Alice  Ida  Perry  Wood,  Ph.D. 
Laura  Alandis  Hibbard.  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professor:  Elizabeth  Wheeler  Manwarinq,  B.A. 
Lecturer  :  Earl  Augustus  Aldrich,  M.A. 

INSTRUCTORS:   ANNIE    KIMBALL   TUELL,    M.A. 

Mary  Bowen   Brainerd,  Ph.D. 

ASSISTANT:   CATHERINE  OAKES,   M.A. 

1.  Outline  History  of  English  Literature.    I. 

Open  to  freshmen,  sophomores,  and  juniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Wood,  Miss  Tuell,  Miss  Hibbard,  Mrs.  Brainerd, 
Miss  Conant,  Miss  Markley. 

The  object  of  the  course  is  to  give  the  student  a  general  survey 
of  English  literature  and  to  prepare  the  way  for  more  specialized 
work.  The  course  is  conducted  by  lectures  and  critical  studies 
of  selected  masterpieces. 

2.  American  Literature.    II. 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  i,  and  to  all  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Young. 

This  course  attempts  to  give  a  comprehensive  account  of  Ameri- 
can literature.  After  a  brief  introductory  study  of  the  Colonial 
and  the  Revolutionary  background,  the  class  reads  in  turn:  (i) 
the  Uterature  of  the  Middle  States;  (2)  of  New  England;  (3)  of 
the  country  at  large  since  the  Civil  War,  especially  the  South  and 
the  West;  (4)  contemporary  poetry.  Stress  is  laid  in  the  class 
room  on  the  most  representative  writers. 

'  Absent  on  leave. 

« Absent  on  leave  for  the  first  semester. 


1918-19  English  77 

3.  English  Lyric  Poetry  of  the  Sixteenth  and  Early  Seventeenth 

Centuries.    II. 
Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  i.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Conant. 

This  course  considers  the  lyrics  of  Wyatt,  Surrey,  Sidney,  Spenser, 
and  Shakespeare;  the  poems  of  Donne,  Herbert,  Vaughan,  Tra- 
heme,  Herrick,  and  Lovelace;  and  Milton's  lyrics  as  a  final  expres- 
sion of  the  Renaissance.  A  brief  survey  completes  the  history  of 
the  Enghsh  lyric.  The  course  aims  to  study  the  Ufe  and  personality 
of  each  poet;  the  historical  background;  and,  chiefly,  the  essential 
beauty  of  this  literature,  thus  developing  a  keener  appreciation  of 
the  lyrical  quality  in  poetry. 

4.  Milton.    II.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  i.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

The  primary  object  of  this  course  is  the  critical  study  of  Milton 
as  a  master  in  lyric,  epic,  and  dramatic  poetry,  and  as  a  writer  of 
notable  prose.  The  character  and  genius  of  the  poet  are  considered 
as  influenced  by  the  poHtical  and  reUgious  conflict  of  the  times. 
Special  emphasis  is  placed  on  the  comparison  of  Milton's  work  with 
that  of  other  great  writers  who  have  used  the  same  Uterary  forms. 

5.  The  Literary  History  of  Prose  Forms  in  the  Essay.    II.     (Not 

offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  i.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

This  course  considers  the  development  of  essay  Hterature  from 
the  formal  classicism  of  Bacon,  through  the  satire  of  Swift,  Defoe, 
and  the  pamphleteers,  to  the  famiUar  essay  of  Addison,  Goldsmith, 
and  Lamb,  and  the  character  essay  in  Leigh  Hunt,  Landor,  and 
Thackeray. 

6.  Victorian  Prose.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  i,  and  have 
completed  or  are  taking  a  second  three-hour  course.     Three  hours  a  week 

for  a  year. 

Mr.  Aldrich. 

This  course  attempts  to  appreciate,  with  due  reference  to  the 
historical  background,  the  distinctive  values  of  Victorian  prose. 
The  stress  in  class  room  is  laid  on  Dickens,  Thackeray,  Newman, 
Carlyle,  Macaulay,  Arnold,  George  Eliot,  Pater,  and  Ruskin. 


78  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

7.  English  Poetry  of  the  Nineteenth  Century.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  i,  and  have 
completed  or  are  taking  a  second  three-hour  course.     Three  hours  a 

week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Sherwood. 

This  course  considers  the  work  of  the  Georgian  and  the  Vic- 
torian poets  in  their  relation  to  one  another  and  to  contemporary 
movements,  pohtical,  social,  ethical,  and  aesthetic.  Extended  study 
is  given  to  Wordsworth  and  Coleridge;  Shelley  and  Keats;  Tenny- 
son and  Browning;  with  briefer  readings  from  Byron,  Scott,  Landor, 
Clough,  Arnold,  Rossetti,  Morris,  and  Swinburne. 

8.  English  Literature  of  the  Fourteenth  Century.    II. 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  i;  to  sophomores  who  have  completed  English  Co?nposition  i 
with  credit  and  who  plan  a  major  concluding  with  course  lo;  to  juniors 
who  plan  a  major  concluding  with  course  lo.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Shackford. 

This  course  centres  in  a  chronological  study  of  the  major  portion 
of  Chaucer's  work.  Attention  is  given  to  Chaucer's  chief  Latin, 
French,  and  ItaUan  sources,  to  contemporary  Enghsh  hterature 
and  social  conditions.  Special  study  is  made  of  various  metrical 
romances  and  of  Piers  Plowman. 

9.  Shakespeare.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  i,  and  have 
completed  or  are  taking  a  second  three-hour  course;  also  to  juniors  who 
are  beginning  their  major  with  course  8.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bates. 

Shakespeare's  plays  and  sonnets  will  be  read  and  discussed,  and 
a  few  selected  plays  will  be  closely  studied.  The  Tudor  and  Stuart 
times,  and  Shakespeare's  hfe  and  art,  as  changing  with  the  times, 
will  form  the  background  of  the  work. 

10.    Historical  Development  of  English  Literature.    III. 

Opeyi  to  graduates,  and  required  of  seniors  who  are  7najoring  in  English 
Literature  and  have  not  had  course  i.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Scudder. 

This  course  proposes  a  study  of  consecutive  masterpieces  chosen 
to  illustrate  the  development  of  Enghsh  hterature  from  the  time 
of  Beowulf  to  the  end  of  the  Victorian  age.  It  aims  to  focus  atten- 
tion upon  successive  phases  of  national  thought  and  hfe  as  ex- 
pressed in  sahent  and  representative  books. 


1918-19  English  79 

11.  Modern  Authors.    III. 

Open  to  graduates  y  and  to  approved  seniors  who  have  completed  two 
three-hour  courses  in  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Shackford. 

Two  or  more  authors  are  chosen  each  year  for  special  study. 
In  1918-1919  the  choice  is  Wordsworth,  Keats,  and  Browning. 

12.  Critical   Problems    oe   the   Literature    of   the   Fourteenth 

Century.    III. 
Open  to  graduates,  and  to  approved  seniors  who  have  completed  two 
three-hour  courses  {not  including  course  8)  in  the  department.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hibbard. 

This  course  aims  to  introduce  students  to  some  of  the  more  im- 
portant problems  in  the  hterature  of  Chaucer  and  of  his  contem- 
poraries. Special  effort  is  made  to  investigate  the  differentiation 
of  literary  types  in  this  era;  the  influence  of  foreign  writers;  the 
growth  of  a  national  spirit;  and  some  of  the  vital  questions  of 
textual  criticism. 

13.  Social  Ideals  in  English  Letters.    III. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in  English  Liter- 
ature or  Economics  or  History,  or  who  have  completed  one  full  course  in 
any  of  these  departments  and  are  taking  another  course.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Scudder. 

This  course  studies  the  expression  in  EngHsh  Hterature  of  social 
compunction,  social  criticism  and  social  ideals.  It  covers  a  swift 
survey  from  the  time  of  Piers  Plowman  to  that  of  Blake,  and  a 
closer  consideration  of  the  literature  of  the  nineteenth  and  twentieth 
centuries  in  its  social  bearing. 

14.  English  Masterpieces.    II. 

Open  only  to  seniors  who  have  completed  no  full  course  in  the  department, 
or  course  i  only.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Scudder,  Miss  Conant. 

This  course  is  intended  to  develop  a  sympathetic  appreciation 
of  literature  through  the  study  of  chosen  masterpieces.  The 
work  includes  readings  from  Wordsworth,  Coleridge,  Shelley, 
Carlyle,  Ruskin,  Arnold,  Browning,  Shakespeare,  Scott,  Jane 
Austen  and  Thackeray;  also,  if  time  permits,  from  modern  drama 
and  recent  verse. 


80  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

15.  Dryden  AND  Pope.     II.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  i.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

This  course  centres  in  the  personality,  work,  and  influence  of 
Dryden  and  of  Pope,  while  including  a  knowledge  of  important 
contemporary  writers,  and  the  social,  political,  and  historical  back- 
ground. 

16.  Tendencies  of  Twentieth  Century  Poetry.    III. 

Open  only  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  already  completed  two  three- 
hour  courses  in  the  department.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bates. 

This  course  proposes  to  point  out  the  special  significance,  as 
related  to  the  Enghsh  tradition,  of  the  work  of  certain  contemporary 
poets,  English  and  American,  especially  those  who  have  won  dis- 
tinction since  1900. 

17.  Development  of   English  Prose   Fiction    to    1830.    II.     (Not 

offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  all  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  i.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

The  work  extends  from  the  chivalric  romance  through  the  six- 
teenth-century experiments  with  new  types  of  fiction,  and  the 
eighteenth-century  development  of  the  novel,  to  selected  master- 
pieces of  Jane  Austen  and  of  Scott. 

18.  The  British  Ballad.    II.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  i.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Hibbard. 

This  course  studies  the  Enghsh  and  Scottish  popular  ballad  and 
the  modern  hterary  ballad.  Special  attention  will  be  given  to  folk 
lore  elements  in  the  ballad  and  to  the  significance  of  the  recent  re- 
vival of  interest  in  folk  dance  and  story. 

19.  Poetics.    II. 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  i,  and  also  to  students  who  are  majoring  in  English  Composition. 
One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Manwaring. 

This  course  has  for  its  object  such  study  of  the  laws  of  English 
versification  as  may  secure  for  the  general  student  of  literature 
a  keener  and  more  intelligent  appreciation  of  poetic  expression, 
and  for  students  interested  in  verse  composition  opportunity  for 
experiment  and  criticism. 


1918-19  English  81 

20.  Spenser.     II.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  i.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Tuell. 

This  course  proposes  a  study  of  Spenser,  with  special  reference 
to  his  position  as  a  Renaissance  type.  The  Faerie  Queene  and 
minor  poems  will  be  studied  as  Renaissance  forms  with  some  atten- 
tion to  sources  in  classic  and  continental  Hteratures. 

21.  Introduction  to  Arthurian  Romance.    II. 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  i.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  year. 

Miss  Scudder,  Miss  Hibbard. 

This  course  traces  the  development  of  the  Arthurian  cycle  from 
the  twelfth  through  the  fifteenth  centur>^  There  is  reading  in 
translation  of  the  chronicles  and  the  early  verse  romances;  and 
in  the  original  of  Enghsh  romances  easily  accessible,  including 
Malory's  Morte  Darthur. 

22.  English  Romanticism.    III. 

Open  to  graduates,  and  to  approved  seniors  who  have  completed  two 
three-hour  courses  in  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Sherwood. 

A  study  of  the  Romantic  Movement  in  England  from  its  begin- 
nings in  the  eighteenth  century  on  through  the  work  of  the  early 
nineteenth  century  poets.  Certain  phases  of  the  relation  of  Eng- 
hsh to  German  Uterature  and  to  French  hterature  during  the  period 
of  reaction  are  studied. 

23.  Critical  Studies  in  English  Drama.    III. 

Open  to  graduates  and  to  approved  seniors.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Bates. 

This  course  attempts  to  give  graduate  training  in  hterary  inves- 
tigation. To  each  student  is  assigned  some  special  problem^  of 
source,  authorship  or  the  like,  which  she  pursues  till  her  conclusion 
is  reached,  reporting  progress  from  week  to  week  in  the  seminar. 

24.  Special  Studies  in  American  Literature.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  and  have  completed  or 
are  taking  a  three-hour  course  of  grade  II  {not  course  2)  in  the  depart- 
ment.    Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Young. 

In  19 18-19 1 9  this  course  studies  the  interpretation  of  American 
life  in  the  national  hterature. 


82  Courses  or  Instruction  1918-19 

25.  Beginnings    of   the     English    Renaissance  from    Caxton  to 

Spenser.    III.     (Not  oUered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  graduates,  and  to  approved  seniors  who  have  completed  two 
three-hour  courses  in  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Conant. 
This  course  aims  to  give  graduate  training  and  so  to  present 
the  beginnings  of  the  English  Renaissance  that  the  student  may 
rightly  estimate  the  achievements  of  the  great  EHzabethans. 

26.  History  of  English  Drama.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  i.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wood. 

This  course  traces  the  history  of  EngHsh  drama  from  the  begin- 
nings in  folk-plays  and  the  hturgy  of  the  Church,  through  the 
Miracles  and  Moralities,  the  Elizabethan  dramatists,  and  the 
comedy  and  tragedy  of  the  seventeenth  and  the  eighteenth  cen- 
turies, to  the  final  development  into  contemporary  forms. 

27.  Contemporary  Drama.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  a  full  grade  III 
course  in  the  department.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Waite. 

The  modern  Enghsh  drama  is  considered  in  relation  to  par- 
allel European  drama. 

II.     English   Composition 

Professor:  Sophie  Chantal  Hart,  M.A. 
Associate  Professors:  Agnes  Frances  Perkins,  M.A. 

Josephine  Harding  Batchelder,  M.A. 

Amy  Kelly,  M.A. 
Assistant  Professors  :  Elizabeth  Wheeler  Manwaring,  B.A. 

Alfred  Dwight  Sheffield.  M.A. 

INSTRUCTORS:  HELENE  BUHLERT  MAGEE,^  M.A. 

Katherine  Forbes  Liddell,  B.A. 
Edith  Hamilton.  M.A. 
Annie  Kimball  Tuell,  M.A. 
Helen  Louisa  Drew,  M.A. 
Caroline  Eliza  Vose.  M.A. 
Mary  Underhill,  B.A. 

1|.  General  Survey,    I. 

Required  of  freshmen.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Perkins,  Miss  Batchelder,  Miss  Kelly, 

Mr.  Sheffield,  Miss  Liddell,  Miss  Hamilton, 

Miss  Tuell,  Miss  Drew,  Miss  Vose,  Miss  Underhill. 

First  semester:    expository  writing,  with  emphasis  on  structure. 

'  Absent  on  leave. 

t  If  a  student  submits  papers  notably  deficient  in  English  as  part  of  her  work,  in  any  de- 
partment, she  will  incur  a  condition  in  English  Composition,  whether  or  not  she  has  com.- 
pleted  the  requirement  in  English  Composition. 


1918-19  English  83 

Weekly  themes.  Second  semester:  expository  writing,  critical  and 
interpretative;  description;  simple  narrative.  Fortnightly  themes 
or  their  equivalent. 

2.  Intermediate  Course  in  Expository  Writing.    I. 

Required  of  students  who  have  made  D  grade  in  the  second  semester  of 
course  i.     Three  hours  a  week  for  one  semester. 

Miss  Vose. 

3.  Argumentation  and  Debates.    II. 

Open  to  sophomores  and  juniors  who  have  completed  course  i.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Kelly. 

Debates  throughout  the  year. 

5.     Oral  Exposition.    II. 

Open  to  sophomores  and  juniors  who  have  completed  course  i.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year.    Either  semester  may  he  elected  separately. 

Mr.  Sheffield. 

First  semester:  expository  analysis;  the  ordering  of  source  material 
with  a  view  to  effective  presentation;  short  speeches  based  on 
written  outlines.  Second  semester:  ParHamentary  procedure; 
the  technique  of  group  discussion;  common  types  of  public  address. 

8.    Advanced  Expository  Writing.    II. 

Open  to  sophomores  and  juniors  who  have  completed  course  i.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year.     Either  semester  may  be  elected  separately. 

Miss  Perkins,  Miss  Batchelder. 

First  semester:  a  critical  study  of  the  abstract,  the  editorial, 
the  review,  the  special  article,  as  exemplified  in  the  newspaper  and 
weekly  periodical.  Fortnightly  themes.  Second  semester:  the 
essay  form,  biography,  the  critical  review,  the  interpretative  study 
of  prose  style.     Fortnightly  themes  or  their  equivalent. 

6.    Narrative  Writing  and  Short  Themes.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  i  and  to  sopho- 
mores who  have  completed  one  semester  of  course  5  or  course  8.  Two 
hours  a  week  for  a  year.     Either  semester  may  he  elected  separately. 

Miss  Manwaring. 

Four  short  themes  or  their  equivalent  per  week.  Long  themes 
at  stated  intervals.  Critical  analysis  in  the  class  room  of  themes 
submitted. 


84  Courses  or  Instruction  1918-19 

10.    The  Theory  and  History  of  Criticism.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hart. 

Lectures  on  the  critical  theory  of  Plato  and  Aristotle  and  on  the 
more  important  English  and  French  critics. 

16.    Advanced  Course  in  English  Composition.    III. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  course  j,  5,  8,  or  6.     Three  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hart. 

Studies  in  structure  and  style,  with  frequent  practice  in  writing. 


III.     English  Language 

AssooiATE  Professor:  Laura  Emma  Lockwood,^  Ph.D. 

PROFESSOR:  ALICE   ViNTON    WAITE,   M.A. 

Associate  Professor:  Amy  Kelly,  M.A. 

Assistant  Professor:  Alfred  Dwight  Sheffield,  M.A. 

1.  Old  English.    IL 

Open  to  juniors,  seniors,  and  approved  sophomores,  who  have  com- 
pleted a  year  oj  language  in  college.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Sheffield. 

A  study  of  the  grammar  and  vocabulary  of  Old  English.  The 
reading  of  Beowulf  and  of  selections  from  old  English  poetry  and 
prose. 

2.  Old  and  Middle  English.    HI.     (Not  ofifered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  juniors,  seniors,  and  graduates  who  have  completed  course  i. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Kelly. 

First  semester:  the  reading  of  the  poetry  of  Cynewulf  and  of 
selections  from  the  Riddles.  Second  semester:  the  study  of  the 
Middle  English  dialects  based  upon  Emerson's  Middle  English 
Reader.  The  reading  of  the  romances  of  Havelock,  King  Horn, 
Emare,  and  The  Siege  of  Troy. 

3.  History  of  the  English  Language.    III.    (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Waite. 

Origin    and    structure   of    the    Enghsh   Language    in   vocabulary, 
grammatical  inflections,  and  syntax  as  the  basis  of  modern  usage. 

*  Absent  on  leave. 


1918-19  French  85 

4.    Seminar  in  Old  English.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  graduates,  a7td  to  seniors  by  permission  of  the  department. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lockwood. 

A  study  of  Old  English  inflections,  phonology,  and  syntax.  The 
reading  of  the  best  pieces  of  Uterature  in  Old  English  prose  and 
poetry.  A  particular  problem  in  either  literature  or  language  is 
assigned  to  each  student  for  investigation. 


FRENCH 

PROFESSOR:   LOUIS   PERDRIAU,  LiO.   ks   L. 

Assistant  Professor:  Eunice  Clara  Smith-Qoard,  M.A.  (Chairman). 

INSTRUCTORS:    MATHILDE   BOUTRON    DAMAZY,  B.  E8  L. 

Gladys  Priscilla  Haines. ^^  B.A. 
Florence  Didiez  David,  M.A. 
Dorothy  Warner  Dennis,  B.A. 
Florence  Beard  Bracq,  M.A. 
Marthe  Alexia  Boyer,  C.A.  (Lettres). 
Marthe  Pugny. 

All  courses  beginning  with  course  i  are  conducted  in  French. 

1%.  Elementary  Course.    French    phonetics,    grammar,    composi- 
tion, READING,  EXERCISES  IN  SPEAKING,  AND  DICTATION.      I. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  David,  Miss  Dennis,  Miss  Bracq. 

The  course  includes  (i)  a  practical  study  of  French  pronunciation 
with  phonetic  drill;  (2)  the  practical  study  of  French  grammar; 
(3)  readings  on  French  life  and  French  institutions. 

2%.  Intermediate  Course.    French  phonetics,  syntax,  composition, 

readings  from  contemporary  authors  of  note;  exercises  in 

speaking;   writing  from  dictation.    I. 

open  to  all  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  the  two    unit 

admission  requirement  in  French.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Smith-Goard,  Miss  David,  Miss  Dennis,  Miss  Bracq. 

The  course  includes  (i)  a  practical  study  of  French  pronuncia- 
tion with  phonetic  drill;  (2)  a  systematic  review  of  syntax  intro- 
ductory to  theme  writing  and  oral  narrative;  (3)  selected  readings, 
prepared  and  sight,  from  modern  writers. 

'3  Absent  on  leave  in  foreign  service. 

t  First-year  French  may  not  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree  if  taken  after  the  sopho- 
more year,  nor  second-year  French  if  taken  after  the  junior  year.  French  i  and  German 
I  may  not  both  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree. 


86  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

3.    French  Phonetics,  Grammar  and  Composition.    I. 

Open  to  students  who  have  met  the  three  unit  admission  requirement 
in  French.  This  course  may  not  he  elected  without  course  5,  except 
by  permission  of  the  department.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Smith-Goard,  Miss  Damazy,  Miss  Pugny. 

The  course  includes  (i)  a  practical  study  of  French  pronunciation 
with  phonetic  drill;  (2)  a  study  of  the  French  language  based  on 
a  series  of  LeQons  de  langue  franqaise;  (3)  weekly  written  exercises 
based  on  the  class  work. 

5.    Outline  History  of  French  Literature.    I. 

Open  to  students  who  have  met  the  three  unit  admission  requirement 
in  French.  This  course  may  not  be  elected  without  course  3,  except 
by  permission  of  the  department.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Smith-Goard,  Miss  Damazy,  Miss  Pugny. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  the  students  a  very  general  view 
of  the  history  of  French  Uterature  from  the  seventeenth  century 
to  the  present  time,  and  thus  to  encourage  and  prepare  students  to 
take  up  more  speciahzed  studies  in  more  advanced  courses. 

The  course  is  based  on  a  short  Histoire  de  la  litterature  franqaise, 
and  on  the  reading  and  explanation  of  short  representative  selections 
from  the  authors  studied. 

24.    French  Phonetics,  Grammar  and  Composition.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2.  This  course  may  not 
be  elected  without  course  2g,  except  by  permission  of  the  department. 
One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Damazy,  Miss  Boyer. 

The  course  includes  (i)  practical  study  of  French  pronunciation 
with  phonetic  drill;  (2)  a  study  of  the  French  language  based  on  a 
series  of  Lemons  de  langue  frangaise;  (3)  weekly  written  exercises 
based  on  the  class  work. 

29.    History  of  French  Literature.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2.  This  course  may  not 
be  elected  without  course  24,  except  by  permission  of  the  department. 
Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Damazy,  Miss  Boyer. 

The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  show  briefly  the  evolution  of  French 
Uterature  from  the  Renaissance  to  the  present  time.  It  is  based 
on  a  short  Histoire  de  la  litterature  franqaise,  the  reading  and  ex- 
planation of  representative  short  texts. 


1918-19  French  87 

7.    Practical  Phonetics  with  Advanced  Grammar  and  Composition. 
II. 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  3  and  5,  or  24  and  29. 
One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Pugny. 

The  course  consists  of  a  series  of  lessons  in  practical  phonetics 
and  advanced  grammar,  with  weekly  written  or  oral  exercises  based 
on  the  lessons. 

4.    Practical  Phonetics  with  Advanced  and  Historical  Grammar. 

III.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  stidents  who  have  completed  courses  3  and  5  or  24  and  29,  and 
12,  also  to  seniors  taking  course  12.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Advanced  phonetics;  linguistic  and  grammatical  study  of  texts; 
free  composition;  causeries  on  method  in  learning  and  teaching 
modern  languages. 

This  course  is  designed  for  students  who  intend  to  teach  French. 

12.  The  Classical  Period  of  French  Literature.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  3  and  5,  or  courses  24  and 
29.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Perdriau,  Miss  Damazy,  Miss  Boyer. 

As  an  introduction  to  this  course,  a  short  study  will  be  made 
of  the  origin  of  French  classicism  in  the  Renaissance  movement  of 
the  sixteenth  century;  but  the  main  object  of  the  course  will  be 
the  study  of  the  evolution  of  French  classical  literature  during  the 
seventeenth  centur}^,  in  the  works  of  the  great  dramatists  and  prose 
writers:  Descartes,  Comeille,  Racine,  Moliere,  La  Fontaine, 
Boileau,  Mme.  de  Sevigne,  Pascal,  La  Bruyere. 

13.  Com-E-RSATION  AND  JOURNAL  ClUB.      II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  who  are  taking  course  12.    One 

hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Smith-Goard. 

Oral  and  written  reports,  reviews  and  discussion  of  important 
magazine  articles,  current  events.  The  aim  of  the  course  is  two- 
fold: practice  in  the  use  of  the  spoken  language,  and  a  brief  study 
of  the  France  of  to-day  and  of  French  institutions. 

9.    Literature  of  the  French  Revolution.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  12.     Three  hours  a  week 

for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Damazy. 

This  course  aims  to  give  a  comprehensive  view  of  the  Uterature 
of  the  French  Revolution  as  exempUfied  in  certain  representative 


88  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

philosophers    and    orators    (Voltaire,    J.    J.    Rousseau,    Diderot, 
Mirabeau,  Robespierre,  etc.) 

A  special  study  will  be  made  of  the  origin  of  romanticism  as  found 
in  the  work  of  Rousseau  and  his  disciples  in  France  and  abroad. 

10.    The  Romantic  and  the  Realistic  Periods  oe  the  Nineteenth 

Century.    III. 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  g.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  seco7id  semester. 

Miss  Damazy. 

This  course  treats  of  French  romanticism  as  expressed  in  the 
works  of  the  masters  of  its  various  forms — criticism,  drama,  lyric, 
novel.  The  writers  studied  include:  A.  de  Musset,  A.  Lamartine, 
A.  de  Vigny,  V.  Hugo,  A.  Dumas,  H.  de  Balzac,  G.  Sand,  G.  Flaubert, 
Taine,  Renan,  etc. 

15.     Contemporary  French  Literature  from  the  beginning  of  the 
Naturalistic  Period  to  the  Present  Time.    III. 
Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  12.     Three  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Perdriau. 
The  object  of  this  course:  To  give  to  advanced  students  general 
information  about  the  contemporary  French  novehsts,  poets,  dram- 
atists, critics,  and  philosophers.  The  authors  studied  as  repre- 
sentative of  the  contemporary  French  period  are:  E.  Zola,  G.  de 
Maupassant,  A.  Daudet,  P.  Loti,  P.  Bourget,  A.  France,  M.  Barr^s, 
Baudelaire,  Leconte  de  Lisle,  J.  M.  de  Heredia,  F.  Coppee,  Sully- 
Prudhomme,  P.  Verlaine,  H.  de  Regnier,  Madame  de  Noailles; 
M.  Maeterlinck,  E.  Rostand;  F.  Brunetiere,  J.  Lemaitre;  H. 
Poincare,  H.  Bergson,  and  the  war-writers. 

30.     Studies  in  Style.     III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  7.     One  hour  a  week  for 
a  year. 

This  course  is  related  to  course  15. 

IL    Old  French  and  Old  French  Literature.     III.     (Not  offered  in 

1918-1919.) 
Open  to  graduates,  and  to  seniors  by  permission  of  the  departme^it. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Phonology  with  reading  of  La  Vie  de  St.  Alexis,  La  Chanson  de 
Roland,  Aucassin  et  Nicolete,  Chretien  de  Troyes.  Gaston  Paris: 
Extraits  des  Chroniqueurs  franqais.  Selections  from  Constans: 
Chrestomathie  de  I'ancien  franqais.  The  history  of  the  French 
language  is  traced  from  its  origin  to  the  present  time,  and  illus- 
trated  by   texts   read.     For   reference,    Darmesteter:     Gratnmaire 


1918-19  Geology  and  Geography  89 

Historique;  Gaston  Paris:  Manuel  de  la  litter ature  franqaise  du 
moyen  age;  also  standard  works  on  the  subject  in  the  college  Ubrary. 
Lectures,  critical  reading. 

20.     Old  Provencal.     III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  graduate  students  only. 

This  course  is  complementary  to  course  ii.  Together  these 
courses  mark  the  synchronic  Hnes  of  development  of  the  langue 
d'oil  and  the  langue  d'oc. 

The  department  is  prepared  to  direct  research  work  for  graduate 
students  in  special  subjects  in  Old  French  and  Old  French  litera- 
ture, also  in  modern  French  language  and  Hterature. 


GEOLOGY  AND  GEOGRAPHY 

PROFESSOR:    ELIZABETH    FLORETTE   FISHER,    B.8. 

Associate  Professor:  Mary  Jean  Lanier,  B.S. 

INSTRUCTORS:  FREDERICK  HENRY  LAHEE.^*^  PH.D. 

Margaret  Terrell  Parker,  B.S. 
Lecturer:  Charles  Hyde  Warren,  Ph.D. 
Laboratory  Assistants:  Isabel  Deminq  Bassett,  B.A. 
Isabel  Whiting,  B.A. 

I.     Geography 

8.    Physiography.    I. 

Open  to  freshmen  and  sophomores.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Fisher,  Miss  Parker,  Miss  Bassett. 

This  course  is  designed  to  give  an  understanding  of  the  physical 
features  of  the  land  and  ocean,  which  affect  life.  The  origin  and 
significance  of  land  forms  will  be  so  treated  as  to  explain  the  de- 
velopment of  rivers,  glaciers,  valleys,  plains,  plateaus,  and  moun- 
tains, and  to  point  out  the  changes  which  these  forms  are  under- 
going to-day.  It  gives  some  account  of  the  rocks  and  soils  that  are 
characteristic  of  the  different  land  forms. 

Lectures  and  recitations  accompanied  by  parallel  studies  in  the 
laboratory  and  field. 

3.    Industrial  and  Commercial  Gejography.    II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors,  and  to  sophomores  who  have  completed  a 
year  of  science  in  college.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lanier. 

This  course  treats  of  the  influence  of  the  geographic  factors  of 
the  physical  environment  on  man,  his    industry  and  his  needs; 
the  production  of  various  commodities  which  supply  the  needs  of 
"  Resigned  November,  1918. 


90  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

man,  and  the  transportation  of  these  commodities.  The  course 
includes  the  treatment  of  the  climatic  factors— temperature,  mois- 
ture, winds,  storms,  and  weather— and  their  influence  upon  vari- 
ous soils  and  the  production  of  crops;  the  natural  resources  for 
water  supply;  the  effect  of  young  and  mature  streams  upon  settle- 
ment and  industry;  the  uses  and  problems  of  inland  waterways; 
life  on  plains,  plateaus,  and  mountains;  the  importance  of  shore- 
line topography  in  transportation;  the  location  and  growth  of 
cities,  and  of  state  and  national  boundaries.  Emphasis  will  be 
placed  upon  the  influence  of  geographic  factors  in  history. 

Lectures  and  recitations.  Laboratory  and  field  work  equiva- 
lent to  two  hours  a  week. 

A  student  who  has  completed  or  is  taking  course  i  may  take  the 
second  semester  of  course  3. 

6.  Geographic  Influences  in  the  Development  of  the  United 

States.    III. 
Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  i  or  course  j, 
or,  under  special  conditions,  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed 
course  8  and  have  done  work  in  history.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
first  semester. 

Miss  Fisher. 

Regional  geography  of  the  United  States  in  its  physical,  eco- 
nomic, commercial,  and  historical  aspects;  including  a  study  of 
the  relation  of  the  continent  to  the  world  as  a  whole,  and  the  influ- 
ence of  its  natural  resources  upon  its  industrial  development  and 
upon  the  course  of  American  History. 

7.  Geographic  Influences  in  the  Development  of  Europe.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  i  or  course  3, 
or,  under  special  conditions,  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed 
course  8  and  have  done  work  in  history.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
second  semester. 

Miss  Lanier. 

Regional  geography  of  Europe  in  its  physical,  economic,  commer- 
cial, and  historical  aspects;  including  a  study  of  the  relation  of  the 
continent  to  the  world  as  a  whole,  and  the  influence  of  its  natural 
resources  upon  its  industrial  and  historical  development. 

9.    Conservation  of  our  Natural  Resources.    IL 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.  To  count  toward  a  major  in  the  depart- 
ment but  not  toward  the  science  requirement.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
the  second  semester. 

Miss  Fisher. 

The  natural  resources  of  the  United  States  and  their  influence 
upon  national  development.    This  course  aims  to  study  soils,  forests, 


1918-19  Geology  and  Geography  91 

mineral  resources,  etc., — their  exploitation  and  their  conservation. 
A  detailed  study  of  the  work  of  reducing  erosion,  reclaiming  swamp 
and  arid  lands,  and  developing  scientific  agriculture  and  forestry; 
problems  of  water  supply,  control  of  water  power,  and  use  of  inland 
waterways;  questions  of  economic  efficiency  in  mining  processes 
and  the  use  of  mineral  fuels  and  metals. 

10.  Industrial  and  Commercial  Geography  of  South  America.  II. 
Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.  To  count  toward  a  major  in  the  depart- 
ment hut  not  toward  the  science  requirement.  J'hree  hours  a  week  for 
the  first  semester. 

Miss  Lanier. 
The  physical  features,  climates,  and  resources  of  the   continent; 
their  effects  on  the  development  and  prospects  of  the  several  coun- 
tries.    Special  attention  is  given  to  geographic  influences  on   trade 
between  the  United  States  and  South  America. 

II.     Geology 

1.  Geology.    II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors,  and  to  sophomores  who  have  completed  a 
year  of  science  in  college.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Parker. 

The  work  of  the  atmosphere,  rivers,  glaciers,  oceans,  volcanoes, 
and  earthquakes  in  modifying  the  surface  of  the  earth.  Records  of 
the  work  accomplished  as  shown  in  rocks.  Evolutionary  develop- 
ment of  the  earth  and  its  inhabitants  as  revealed  in  these  structures 
and  interpreted  by  these  forces.  Lectures,  recitations  and  six  field 
lessons  during  the  year. 

A  student  who  has  completed  or  is  taking  course  3  may  take  the 
second  semester  of  course  i. 

2.  Mineralogy.     II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors,  and  to  sophomores  who  have  completed 
a  year  of  science  in  college.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Mr.  Lahee,  Mr.  Warren. 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work.     Characteristics  and  origin  of  the 

more  important  mineral  species.    The  course  includes  blow  pipe 

analysis   and   crystallography.     A   reference    collection   is   always 

available  for  students'  use. 

4.    Field  Geology.    III.     (Not  offered  in  19 18-19 19.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  course  j.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Lahee. 

Advanced  field  study  with  lectures  and  discussions.  The  aim 
of  the  course  is  to  give  students  training  in  the  methods  of  research 


92  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

work  in  the  field.  The  course  involves  a  study  of  the  geologic  and 
geographic  influences  in  eastern  Massachusetts;  the  various  im- 
portant results  of  rock  structure  and  glaciation;  many  effects  of 
the  geographic  conditions  on  economic  development;  the  agricul- 
tural interests  in  the  lowlands;  and  the  commercial  and  fishing 
activities  of  the  seaports.  The  structural  and  topographic  signifi- 
cance of  the  Boston  Basin  as  a  geographical  unit  will  be  the  broad 
subject  under  consideration  throughout  the  year. 

5.    Petrology.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
the  second  semester. 

Mr.  Lahee,  Mr.  Warren. 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work.  Laboratory  study  of  the  more 
important  rock  species.  Igneous,  sedimentary,  and  metamorphic 
rocks.  The  work  is  intended  to  afford  the  student  an  opportunity 
to  become  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  macroscopic  characteristics 
of  the  principal  rock  types  and  the  methods  of  petrographical  study, 
and  to  enable  the  student  to  gain  some  acquaintance  with  the 
theories  of  modern  petrology. 


GERMAN 

PROFESSOR:    MaRGARETHE    MULLER. 

Associate  Professors:  Natalie  Wipplinger,  Ph.D. 
Emma  Marie  Scholl,  Ph.D. 

It-  Elementary   Course.    Grammar,   reading,   oral   and    written 

EXERCISES.     I. 
Open  to  all  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Scholl. 

The  texts  used  in  this  course  are  made  the  basis  for  a  study  of 
grammatical  forms  and  rules,  for  speaking  exercises  and  composi- 
tion work.     Frequent  written  exercises  are  required. 

2 J.  Elementary  Course.    Reading,  eree  reproduction,  written  and 

ORAL  EXERCISES,  SHORT  THEMES,  MEMORIZING  OF  POEMS.      I. 

Open  to  all  students  who  have  completed  course   i    or  the  two    unit 
admission  requirement  in  German.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wipplinger,  Miss  Scholl. 

The  methods  are  the  same  as  in  course  i.  In  connection  with 
the  reading  special  attention  is  given  to  the  learning  of  the  more 
common  idioms.     Some  pages  of  easy  reading  are  required   outside 

X  First-year  German  may  not  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree  if  taken  after  the  sopho- 
more year,  nor  second-year  German  if  taken  after  the  junior  year.  German  i  and  French  i 
may  not  both  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree. 


1918-19  German  93 

of  the  regular  class  assignments.  Several  poems  are  memorizerl. 
Frequent  written  tests  or  short  themes  are  required. 

Course  2  is  intended  to  fit  students  to  enter  courses  8,  15,  and  16. 

5.  Grammar  and  Composition.    I. 

Open  to  freshmen  who  have  met  the  three  unit  admission  requirement 
in  German,  and  required  in  connection  with  course  10.  One  hour 
a   week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Scholl. 

Review  of  elementary  grammar  and  study  of  more  advanced 
grammar.  Bi-weekly  themes;  grammatical  exercises  based  on  texts 
read  in  course  10. 

6.  Grammar  and  Phonetics.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  at  least  three  hours 
of  grade  II.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Systematic  study  of  German  Grammar.  Elements  of  phonetics 
(Biihnendeutsch).  Exercises  in  oral  and  written  expression.  Dis- 
cussion of  methods  of  teaching  German. 

This  course  is  designed  especially  for  those  intending  to  teach 
German. 

8.  Grammar  and  Composition.    II. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  2 
or  equivalent,  and  required  of  those  taking  courses  15  and  16.  One  hour 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  the  student  practice  in  oral  and 
written  expression.  Bi-weekly  themes;  grammatical  exercises 
based  on  the  material  treated  in  courses  15  and  16. 

9.  History  of  the  German  Language.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  three  hours  of 
grade  II,  and  are  taking  other  work  in  German.  One  hour  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

This  course  aims  to  give  a  fuller  and  more  thorough  understand- 
ing of  modern  German  through  the  study  of  its  historical  develop- 
ment.    Text-book:  Behagel's  Die  deutsche  Sprache. 

10.  Outline  History  of  German  Literature.    I. 

Open  to  freshmen  who  have  met  the  three  unit  admission  requirement 
in  German,  and  required  in  connection  with  course  5.  Two  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Scholl. 

The  object  of  this  course  is  to  furnish  the  student  with  the  vocab- 


94  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

ulary  necessary  for  the  reading  and  discussion  of  literature,  and 
to  give  her  a  general  historical  background  for  the  more  detailed 
study  of  German  Uterature  in  subsequent  courses.  Texts  used: 
Maria  Stuart,  Wenckebach's  Meisterwerke,  Goethe's  Dichtung  und 
Wahrheit  (Jagemann). 

11.  Goethe's  Llfe  and  Works  (Introductory  Course).    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  22.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Muller. 

Lectures,  discussions.  Study  of  the  principal  characteristics 
of  Goethe's  life  and  works  to  the  time  of  his  literary  co-operation 
with  Schiller.  Works  discussed  in  class:  Gotz  von  Berlichingen, 
Iphigenie,  selected  poems  (Goebel).  Interpretation  of  "Storm 
and  Stress"  in  connection  with  Gotz,  of  German  classicism  in 
connection  with  Iphigenie.  Supplementary  discussion  of  some  of 
the  following:  Goethe's  Brief e  (Langemesche),  Dichtung  und 
Wahrheit,  Euripides'  Iphigenie,  Boyesen's  Life  of  Goethe. 

12.  Nineteenth  Century  Drama.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  31.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Scholl. 

Special  study  of  Kleist,  GriUparzer,  Otto  Ludwig,  Hebbel,  Ibsen, 
Hauptmann,  Sudermann,  and  others;  their  relation  to  classic  and 
romantic  art,  and  to  the  social  and  philosophical  problems  of  the 
century. 

13.  The  German  Novel.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  three 
hours  of  grade  II.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Mijller. 

Lectures  on  the  historical  development  of  the  German  novel 
before  Goethe.  Special  study  of  some  of  the  representative  novels 
by  Goethe,  Eichendorff,  Freytag,  Spielhagen,  Keller,  Storm, 
Sudermann,  and  others,  illustrative  of  certain  important  phases 
of  German  Kulturgeschichte. 

14.  Theory   of   the   Drama,   illustrated   by   classic   and   modern 

DRAMAS.     III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  three  hours  of  grade  III,  and 
to  others  by  special  permission.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Scholl. 

Study  of  the  historical  development  and  the  technique  of  the 
Greek,  modem  classic,   romantic,   social  and  naturaUstic  drama, 


1918-19  German  95 

based  on  the  theories  of  Aristotle,  Lessing,  Hebbel,  Freytag,  Volkelt 
and  other  modem  theorists. 

15.  History  of  German  Literature.    II. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  2 
or  equivalent,  and  required  in  connection  with  course  8.  Two  hours 
a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

The  course  consists  of  discussions,  reading  and  occasional  lectures 
on  the  history  of  German  Literature  before  Goethe.  The  aim  of 
the  course  is  to  trace  the  parallel  development  of  the  language, 
literature,  social  conditions,  and  rehgious  ideals  of  the  times.  Works 
read  and  discussed  are:  the  Hildehrandslied,  selections  from  the 
Nihelungenlied,  the  works  of  Wolfram,  Gottfried,  Hartmann,  the 
Minnesingers  and  the  Meistersingers,  Volkslied,  selections  from 
Luther,  Hans  Sachs, — all  according  to  Wenckebach's  Meisterwerke. 
Occasional  reference  to  Scherer's  and  Vogt  and  Koch's  Geschichte 
der  deutschen  Literatur. 

16.  History  of  German  Literature.    II. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  15^ 
and  to  others  by  permission  of  the  department;  required  in  connection 
with  course  8.     Two  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

The  course  is  a  continuation  of  course  15;  the  methods  and 
aims  are  the  same.  Chief  topic:  the  classical  period  in  German 
literature,  with  special  emphasis  on  Lessing,  Herder,  Schiller, 
Goethe. 

17.  Middle  High  German  (Introductory  Course).    III.     (Not  offered 

in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  at  least  three  hours 
of  grade  II.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

Survey  of  IMiddle  High  German  forms  and  sounds.  Transla- 
tion of  Middle  High  German  epic  and  lyric  poetry  into  the  modern 
idiom. 

18.  The  German  Romantic  School.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  31.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

A  study  of  the  development  and  spirit  of  the  German  Romantic 
School.  Outside  reading  assigned  from  the  following  reference 
books:  Haym,  Brandes,  Beers,  on  Romanticism;  R.  Huch,  Bliitezeit 


96  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

der  Romantik;  Hillebrandt's  Lectures  on  German  Thought;  Boyesen, 
Essays;  Heilborn,  Novalis.  Class  work  is  based  on  the  works  of 
Friedrich  Schlegel,  Novalis,  Tieck,  Chamisso,  Eichendorff,  Heine, 
and  others. 

19.  Lessing  as  Dramatist  and  Critic  (Seminary  Course).    III. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  three  hours  of  grade  III,  and  to 
others  by  special  permission.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Mijller. 
Treatment  of  Lessing's  critical  work  in  literature,  theology  and 
sesthetics.  Works  read  and  discussed  are:  Laokoon,  Hamburgische 
Dramaturgie,  Minna  von  Barnhelm,  Emilia  Galottl,  Axiomata, 
Anti-Gotze,  Nathan  der  Weise,  Erziehimg  des  Menschengeschlechts. 
Reference  books:  Erich  Schmidt's  Lessing,  Kuno  Fischer's  Lessing 
als  Reformator  der  deutschen  Literatur,  Kuno  Fischer's  Lessing's 
Nathan,  and  others. 

20.  Schiller  as  Philosopher  and  Writer  on  Esthetics  (Seminary 

Course).     III. 
Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  course  22  and  at  least  three  hours 
of  grade  III.      Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

Study  of  Schiller  through  his  correspondence  with  Korner, 
Goethe,  etc.,  and  his  philosophic-aesthetic  poems  and  essays.  These 
are  read  and  discussed  in  class. 

22.    Schiller's  Life  and  Works  (Introductory  Course).    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  5  and  10,  or  8,  75  and  16. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Scholl. 

Lectures,  discussions.  Study  of  Schiller's  life  and  some  of  his 
important  dramatic  works.  Texts:  Boyesen's  Schiller's  Life;  Die 
Rduber  (Cotta);  Wallenstein  (Carruth);  Schiller's  Gedichte  (Cotta); 
Schiller's  Brief e  (Kiihnemann). 

26.  Gothic.     III.     (See  Department  of  Comparative  Philology,  Course 

6.)     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  graduates  and  to  seniors  by  permission  of  the  instructor. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

27.  German  Lyrics  and  Ballads.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  5  and  10,  or  8,  15  and  16, 
and  are  taking  other  work  in  German.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Scholl. 
Historical  study  of  Minnegesang,    Volkslied,  and  the  principal 
lyric  poets  up  to  the  present  day. 


1918-19  Greek  97 

30.  Studies  in  Modern  German  Idiom.    II.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  taking  other  work  in  German,  who  have  completed 
courses  5  and  10,  or  8,  is  and  16,  and  by  special  permission  to  those 
who  have  completed  course  2.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

This  course  is  designed  to  aid  the  student  in  acquiring  a  larger 
working  vocabulary.  Modern  German  texts  are  used  as  a  basis 
of  study.     Constant  oral  and  frequent  written  practice. 

31.  Goethe's  Faust,  Part  I.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  courses  11  and  22 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Muller. 

Study  of  the  pre-Goethean  development  of  the  Faust  legend  in 
its  more  important  literary  forms.  Close  study  of  the  text  of 
Goethe's  Fatist,  Part  I.  Collateral  readings  and  reports  on  the 
relation  of  the  poem  to  Goethe's  life  and  times.  Part  II  will  be 
treated  in  a  few  final  lectures. 

32.  Goethe,  Advanced  Course  (Seminary  Course).    III. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  course  31  and  at  least  one  other 
three-hour  semester  course  of  grade  III;  students  not  taking  course  31 
till  the  senior  year,  may  by  special  permission  enter  course  32.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Muller 

Study  of  Goethe's  lyrics,  ballads,  later  dramas,  parts  of  Faust  II, 
and  other  works.  Collateral  reading  in  the  Goethe  Jahrbuch,  and 
from  Eckermann,  Graf,  Hamack,  and  others.  Consideration  of 
Goethe's  relation  to  other  literatures,  etc. 

Note. — ^The  language  of  the  class  room  in  all  courses  is  ahnost 
exclusively  German.  The  student  thus  has  constant  practice  in 
hearing,  speaking,  and  writing  German. 


GREEK 

PROFESSORS:  ANQIE  CLARA  OhAPIN,   M.A. 

Katharine  May  Edwards.  Ph.D. 

1.    Plato:  Apology  and  selections  from  other  dialogues;  Homer-. 
Odyssey  (six  or  seven  books);  Euripides:  one  drama.    I. 
Open  to  students  -who  have  met  the  three  unit  admission  requirement^ 
or  who  have  completed  course  14.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 


)8  Courses  or  Instruction  1918-19 

2.  Plato:  Phaedo;    Republic  (selections);    Euripides:  one  or  two 

dramas;  Aristophanes:  Clouds.  II.  (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  and  to  others  by  per- 
mission of  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Chapin. 

3.  Greek  Historians.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

Special  study  of  the  history  of  Greece  in  the  fifth  century  from 
Herodotus  and  Thucydides.  The  content  of  the  course  will  vary 
in  alternate  years. 

In  191 8-1 9 19  the  emphasis  will  be  upon  the  development  of  the 
Athenian  empire  and  the  Peloponnesian  war,  with  readings  from 
Thucydides,  Plutarch's  Pericles,  and  Aristophanes'  Achamians,  and 
a  few  of  the  more  important  historical  inscriptions. 

In  1919-1920  the  emphasis  will  be  upon  the  Persian  wars,  with 
readings  from  Herodotus,  Plutarch's  Themistocles,  and  yEschylus' 
Persians. 

4.  Origin  and  Development  of  Greek  Dr.\ma.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2  or  3  and  to  others  by 
permission  of  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Chapin. 

Aristotle's  Theory  of  Tragedy.  Reading  and  criticism  of  se- 
lected dramas;  iEschylus:  Prometheus;  Sophocles:  Oedipus  Tyran- 
nus,  Antigone;  Euripides:  BaccJice  or  Troades;  Aristophanes: 
Frogs  (selections).  A  study  of  all  the  extant  plays  of  ^schylus 
and  Sophocles  is  made  by  special  topics. 

5.  History  of  Greek  Poetry.    III.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  one  full  course  of  grade  III. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Chapin. 
Lectures  and  readings;    Homeric    Hymns;    Hesiod:    Works  atid 
Days;  Elegiac  and  Melic  poetry;    Pindar   (selections);     Bacchy- 
lides  (selections);  Theocritus  (selections). 

7.     Greek  Dialects.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  one  full  course  of  grade  III. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

A  comparative  study  of  the  Greek  dialects,  their  characteristics 
and  their  relations  to  each  other,  with  reading  and  study  of  inscrip- 
tions and  selected  texts. 


1918-19  Greek  99 

8.  History  of  Greek  Literature  in  English  Translations.    II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors,  and  to  sophomores  who  have  completed 
one  full  course  in  Greek,  or  Art,  or  English  Literature.  Qne  hour  a 
week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Chapin. 

Lectures  with  readings  (in  translation)  from  the  principal  authors 
from  Homer  to  Theocritus,  with  emphasis  upon  the  Greek  drama. 
One  paper  may  be  required  on  each  semester's  work. 

The  course  aims  to  give  such  a  survey  of  the  development  of 
Greek  Uterature  as  will  show  the  influence  of  Greek  thought  upon 
all  succeeding  Hterature  and  art. 

9.  Modern  Greek.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2  or  j.  One  hour  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

The  course  has  two  objects:  first,  a  practical  one,  to  give  some 
acquaintance  with  the  spoken  and  written  Greek  of  to-day;  second, 
a  hnguistic  one,  to  trace  the  historical  development  of  the  language 
from  classical  times  to  the  present. 

11.  Greek  Syntax  and  Prose  Composition.    II.     (Not  offered  in  1918- 

1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.     One  hour  a  week  for  a 
year. 

This  course  is  especially  recommended  to  those  intending  to  teach 
Greek. 

12.  Homeric  Seminary.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  one  full  course  of  grade  III. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

Critical  study  of  selected  portions  of  the  Iliad,  with  discussions 
and  lectures  on  special  problems  of  Homeric  grammar  and  antiqui- 
ties, supplemented  by  the  private  reading  of  the  greater  part  of  the 
Iliad. 

13.  Beginning  Greek.    I. 

Open  to  all  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  cover  in  one  year  the  fundamental  facts  of 
Greek  grammar  with  practice  in  reading  and  writing.  The  text-book 
is  Allen's  First  Year  in  Greek.     The  selections  are  largely  from  Plato. 


100  Courses  or  Instruction  1918-19 

14.    Second  Year  Greek.    I. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  13  or  its  equivalent.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

Plato:  selections;   Homer:   Iliad,  three  books;    practice  in  read- 
ing at  sight  and  in  writing  Greek. 

For  additional  courses  see  Comparative  Philology  and  Classical 
Archaeology. 

For  courses  in  the   study  of   Greek  Testament  see   Biblical 
History. 

HISTORY 

Professors:  Elizabeth  Kimball  Kendall.  M.A.,  LL.B 
Julia  Swift  Orvis.  Ph.D. 
Mabel  Elisabeth  Hodder,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Professor:  Edna  Virginia  Moffett,  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professor:  Edward  Ely  Curtis,  Ph.D. 

Instructors:  Louise  Hortense  Snowden.^^  B.8. 
Judith  Blow  Williams,  Ph.D. 
Alice  Marqaret  Holden,  M.A. 
Margaret  Bancroft,  M.A. 

1%.  Political  History  of  England  to  1485.    I. 

Open  to  freshmen,  sophomores,  and  juniors,  and  to  seniors  who  have  taken 
no  college  course  in  History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Kendall,  Miss  Williams. 
2%.  Political  History  of  England  from  1485  to  the  Present  Time.    I. 
Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  as  above,  and  to  freshmen 
who  have  completed  course  i,  or  who  offered  English  History  as  an  ad- 
mission subject.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Kendall,  Miss  Williams. 
The  aim  of  these  courses  is  to  train  students  in  the  use  of  his- 
torical material  and  in  dealing  with  historical  problems.     Emphasis 
is  laid  on  the  political,  social,  and  industrial  conditions  which  have 
developed  the  England  of  to-day. 

3t.  History  of  Western  Europe  from  the  Fifth  Century  to  the 
Treaties  of  Westphalia.    I. 
Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mrs.  Hodder,  Miss  Williams,  Miss  Bancroft. 

A  general  survey  of  the  history  of  Western  Europe  from  the 
decline  of  Rome  to  the  middle  of  the  seventeenth  century.     Em- 

'J  Absent  on  leave  in  foreign  service. 
t  Courses  i  and  2,  or  course  3,  or  course  10  are  prerequisite  to  later  election. 


1918-19  History  101 

phasis  is  laid  upon  such  topics  as:  the  mediaeval  Empire,  the 
Papacy,  feudalism,  monasticism,  the  Crusades,  the  rise  of  towns, 
Hundred  Years'  War,  mediseval  and  Renaissance  Ufe  and  culture, 
the  Reformation,  and  the  beginnings  of  modern  nationalities. 
The  course  aims  to  train  students  in  methods  of  historical  work 
and  to  furnish  a  background  for  the  detailed  study  of  particular 
periods. 

4.  History  of  Europe  since  the  French  Revolution.    II. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  one  full 
course  in  History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Orvis. 

This  course  involves  (i)  an  introductory  discussion  of  the  condi- 
tion of  France  on  the  eve  of  the  revolution;  (2)  a  detailed  study 
of  the  progress  of  the  revolution  and  of  the  reaction  against 
democratic  tyranny  culminating  in  imperiahsm;  (3)  an  inquiry  into 
the  influence  of  revolutionary  ideas  in  the  subsequent  history  of 
France,  Germany,  Austria,  Italy,  and  Russia. 

5.  Constitutional  History  of  England  to  1399.    II.     (Not  offered 

in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  one  full  course  in  history.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Moffett. 

A  study  of  the  development  of  English  constitutional  govern- 
ment as  an  expression  of  the  character  of  the  English  people.  The 
course  deals  with  the  Germanic  origins,  and  with  the  development 
of  EngHsh  thought  along  constitutional  Unes  to  the  close  of  the 
Plantagenet  period. 

6.  Constitutional  History  of  England  from  1399  to  the  Present 

Time.    II.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  one  full  course  in  History.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Moffett. 

A  study  of  the  later  development  of  the  English  constitution, 
the  rise  of  party  and  cabinet  government,  and  the  actual  working 
of  the  constitution  to-day. 

7.  History  of  the  United  States  from  1787.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  one  full  course  and 

have  completed  or  are  taking  a  second  course  in  History.     Three  hours 

a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Curtis. 

A  study  of  the  formation  and  development  of  the  constitution 
of  the  United  States,  with  special  reference  to  controlling  forces, 


102  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

such  as  the  organization  of  parties,  the  growth  of  democracy,  the 
rise  of  the  slave  power,  the  poHtical  effects  of  the  development  of 
the  West. 

8.t  Europe  m  the  Fifteenth  Century.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History,  or  course  3  or  10  and  two  courses  in  Art.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Moffett. 

A  study  of  the  intellectual,  religious,  and  social  life  of  the  fifteenth 
century,  and  of  the  institutions  and  movements  which  were  its 
outcome. 

9.    Diplomatic  History  of  Europe  since  1740.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Orvis. 

This  includes  (i)  a  review  of  the  period  1648-1740;  (2)  the 
Age  of  Frederick  II;  (3)  a  brief  survey  of  the  Revolutionary  and 
Napoleonic  period;   (4)  the  Age  of  Bismarck  and  its  results. 

lOJ.  Medieval  Life  aito  Institutions.    I. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moffett. 

The  course  deals  with  the  history  of  Europe  to  the  close  of  the 
fourteenth  century.  It  emphasizes  those  phases  of  mediaeval  life 
which  have  left  the  strongest  impress  upon  modem  times.  A  few 
mediaeval  sources  are  read  at  first  hand,  and  some  of  the  great 
personalities  whose  work  is  still  vital  are  studied  as  carefully  as 
time  allows.  The  aim  of  the  course  will  be  to  show  the  points  of 
contact  and  of  difference  between  the  mediaeval  spirit  and  the 
modern,  and  to  serve  as  a  foundation  for  courses  dealing  with  later 
periods,  or  as  a  background  for  the  study  of  mediaeval  art  or  htera- 
ture. 

11.    History  of  Political  Institutions.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Kendall. 

This  is  an  introductory  course  in  the  comparative  study  of  the 
origin,  character,  development,  and  aim  of  political  institutions. 

t  History  8  and  Hist^o^  i6  will  not  both  be  given  in  the  same  year. 

t  Courses  i  and  2,  or  course  3,  or  course  10  are  prerequisite  to  later  election. 


1918-19  History  103 

12.  Growth  of  the  British  Empire.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Kendall. 

This  course  includes  (i)  a  historical  review  of  the  development 
of  the  empire;  (2)  a  study  of  the  changes  of  colonial  policy;  (3) 
a  study  of  colonial  administration;  and  (4)  a  discussion  of  present 
colonial  problems. 

13.  History  of  Rome.    II. 

Open  to  sophomores^  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  one 
college  course  in  History,  or  who  are  giving  special  attention  to  Latin. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mrs.  Hodder. 

This  course  offers  a  general  survey  of  Roman  History  through 
the  reign  of  Diocletian.  The  attempt  is  made  to  present  the  prob- 
lems of  recent  scholarship  in  the  study  of  the  earher  period,  but  the 
main  emphasis  is  placed  upon  the  later  Republic  and  the  Empire. 
Particular  attention  will  be  given  to  the  economic  and  social  con- 
ditions, and  to  the  development  of  the  Roman  system  of  government . 

14.  American  History.    II. 

a.    Age  of  Discovery  and  Conquest. 

h.    The  American  Revolution. 
Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are 
taking  a  full  course  in  History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Curtis. 

In  the  first  semester  the  discovery  and  exploration  of  the  American 
continents  by  the  Spanish,  English,  and  French  will  be  treated  in 
detail,  to  be  followed  by  a  study  of  the  contest  between  the  Euro- 
pean powers  for  control  in  the  New  World.  The  second  semester 
will  be  devoted  to  a  careful  consideration  of  the  American  Revolu- 
tion, especial  attention  being  given  to  the  European  aspect  of  the 
struggle  between  England  and  her  colonies. 

15.  International  Politics.    II. 

Open  to  all  seniors  and  to  juniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
a  full  course  in  History.  One  hour  a  week  for  a  year  with  an  addi- 
tional appointment  in  alternate  weeks.  To  count  as  one  and  one-half 
hours. 

Miss  Kendall. 

The  object  of  this  course  is  to  give  a  general  view  of  international 
conditions  since  the  close  of  the  Bismarck  period,  with  especial  ref- 
erence to  the  present  relations  of  Europe,  America,  and  Asia. 


104  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

16t.  Europe  in  the  Sixteenth  Century.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918- 
1919.) 
Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moffett. 

A  continuation  of  course  8,  though  the  latter  is  not  a  prerequisite. 

A  brief  introductory  survey  of  conditions  in  the  fifteenth  century 
is  followed  by  a  more  detailed  study  of  the  sixteenth,  its  great  move- 
ments, and  its  great  personalities. 

17.  Political  History  of  Russia  from  the  earliest  times  to  the 

present.    II. 
Open  to  all  seniors  and  to  juniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
another   course   in   History.      Three   hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Orvis. 

This  course  includes  a  study  of  (i)  the  forces  which  have  made 
Russia  a  world  power,  (2)  the  development  and  poHcy  of  the  autoc- 
racy, and  (3)  the  struggle  for  freedom  culminating  in  the  revolution 
of  1917. 

18.  England  in  the  Fourteenth  and  Fifteenth  Centuries.    II.     (Not 

offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  one  college 
course  in  History,  or  who  are  giving  especial  attention  to  English  Lit- 
erature or  Economics.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mrs.  Hodder. 

A  study  of  the  poUtical,  intellectual,  and  industrial  changes  in 
England  in  the  two  centuries  of  transition  from  mediaeval  to  modern 
times. 

19.  Geography  of  European  History.    II. 

Open  to  all  seniors  and  to  juniors  and  sophomores  who  have  com- 
pleted one  college  course  in  History.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
first  semester. 

Miss  Moffett. 

The  institutions,  economic  and  social  conditions,  and  political 
history  of  some  parts  of  Europe  will  be  briefly  studied  in  connection 
with  their  topography.  Besides  the  study  of  the  more  important 
changes  of  boundaries,  the  course  will  attempt  to  strengthen  the 
connection  between  events  and  localities,  and  to  give  a  clearer  con- 
ception of  the  scene  of  events  already  studied,  or  to  be  studied,  in 
other  courses  in  European  History. 

t  History  8  and  History  16  will  not  both  be  given  in  the  same  year 


1918-19  History  105 

20.  Politics  of  Eastern  Europe.    II.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  all  seniors  and  to  juniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
another  course  in  History.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Orvis. 

The  object  of  this  course  is  to  give  a  general  view  of  Eastern  Euro- 
pean conditions  since  the  close  of  the  Age  of  Bismarck. 

21.  Selected  Studies  in  American  History.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Curtis. 

This  is  a  course  in  the  history  of  American  foreign  relations.  It 
deals  with  the  most  significant  diplomatic  problems  which  have 
arisen  as  the  result  of  war,  westward  expansion,  the  growth  of  for- 
eign commerce,  immigration,  and  the  acquisition  of  colonial  pos- 
sessions. The  origin  of  important  treaties,  the  development  of  the 
Monroe  Doctrine,  the  evolution  of  the  United  States  as  a  world 
power  will  be  traced. 

22.  England  under  the  Tudors  and  Stuarts.  ,  III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mrs.  Hodder. 

.  This  course  deals  with  the  religious  and  constitutional  struggles 
in  the  sixteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries,  with  economic  and 
social  changes,  with  international  relations,  and  with  the  founding 
of  the  British  Empire. 

23.  Constitutional  Government.    II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  either  courses  i 
and  2  or  course  j,  or  Economics  i  or  15.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Holden. 

This  is  an  introductory  course  dealing  with  comparative  modern 
governments.  In  the  first  semester  the  governments  of  Great 
Britain,  France,  Italy,  and  Germany  are  studied  as  a  basis  for 
comparison  with  the  government  of  the  United  States,  on  which 
the  second  semester  is  spent.  Throughout  the  course,  special  at- 
tention is  given  to  the  practical  working  of  governments,  to  modern 
political  tendencies,  and  to  the  relations  of  the  individual  to  the 
government.  An  aim  of  the  course  is  to  prepare  students  for  intelli- 
gent and  effective  citizenship. 


106  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 


HYGIENE 

DIRECTOR:    ROXANA    HAYWARD  VIVIAN,  PH.D.. 
PROFESSOR    OF    MATHEMATICS. 
PROFESSOR:   WILLIAM   SkaRSTROM,   M.D. 

Associate  Professors:  Eugene  Clarence  Howe,  Ph.D. 
Julia  Eleanor  Moody,  Ph.D., 

associate  professor  of  zoology. 
Assistant  Professors:  Sarah  Russell  Davis. 

Franklin  Charles  Fette,  M.A. 
Instructors:  Edna  Barrett  Manship. 
Margaret  Johnson. 
Elizabeth  Halsey,  Ph.B. 
Mary  Sophie  Haagensen. 
William  Harden  Chapman,  B.A. 
Assistants:  Fanny  Garrison,  B.A. 
Annie  Chapin  Stedman. 
Recorder:  Ruth  Parish  Reynolds,  B.A. 
Librarian  :  Susan  Grey  Akers,  B.A. 
Curator:  Anna  Elizabeth  Anderson. 

I.  Courses  Prescribed  for  the  Certificate  of  the  Department 

(i)  A  two  years' course  leading  to  the  certificate  of  the  Department  of  Hygiene  is  offered 
to  special  students.  This  course  is  especially  designed  for  the  training  of  teachers  of  hygiene. 
In  order  to  be  admitted  to  this  course,  candidates  must  be  without  organic  disease  or  serious 
functional  disorder.  A  keen  sense  of  rhythm  is  necessary.  This  course  is  open  only  to 
those  who  already  hold  the  Bachelor's  degree  either  from  Wellesley  College  or  from  some 
other  college.  In  September,  1919,  and  thereafter,  candidates  for  this  course  must  offer  both 
Chemistry  and  Physics.  Previous  courses  in  Psychology,  Education,  and  General  Biology 
are  desirable. 

(2)  A  five  years'  course  is  offered  leading  to  the  B.A.  degree  and  the  certificate  of  the 
Department  of  Hygiene.  This  course  is  open  only  to  candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  in  residence 
at  Wellesley  College.  In  general  students  in  this  course  receive  the  B.A.  degree  at  the 
end  of  the  fourth  year  and  complete  in  the  fifth  year  the  work  required  for  the  certificate  of 
the  Department  of  Hygiene.  The  following  courses  count  toward  the  Bachelor's  degree: 
course  i,  three  hours;  course   13,  three  hours. 

1.  Kinesiology. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Dr.  Skarstrom. 

Lectures  and  demonstrations  dealing  with  the  anatomical  mecha- 
nism of  movements:  the  role  of  joint  motion,  muscular  action,  grav- 
ity, leverage,  inertia  and  internal  resistance  in  the  production  and 
modification  of  gymnastic  movements  and  their  effects,  as  contrasted 
with  ''natural"  movements. 

This  course  counts  three  hours  towards  the  Bachelor's  degree. 

2.  Gymnastics. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.    Five  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Dr.  Skarstrom,  Miss  Halsey. 


1918-19  Hygiene  107 

3.  Corrective  Gymnastics  and  Massage. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Two  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Davis. 

4.  Folk  Dancing. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Manship,  Miss  Johnson. 

5.  Normal  Instruction. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Dr.  Skarstrom,  Miss  Halsey. 

6.  Dancing. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Manship,  Miss  Johnson. 

7.  Athletic  Sports. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Three  hours  a  week  in  the  fall, 
eight  hours  in  the  spring. 

Mr.  Fett^,  Miss  Davis, 
Miss  Manship,  Miss  Halsey. 

8.  Swimming.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

25.    Theory  or  Play,  Organization  of  Playgrounds  and  Athletics. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Mr.  Fett:!^. 
27.    Personal  Hygiene. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Mr.  Howe. 

A  conservative  exposition  of  the  regulation  of  the  environmental 
conditions  of  health,  and  of  the  guidance  of  adaptation  to  these 
conditions. 

30.    Practice  of  Play. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Fett£. 

35.  Remedial  Gymnastics. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Haagensen. 

36.  Physiology  of  Development.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Some  of  the  forces  and  conditions  of  individual  growth  and  of 
race  development. 


108  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

39.    Anatomy  (Zoology  ii). 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moody. 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work  upon  the  anatomy  of  the  muscles, 

viscera,  and  circulatory  and  nervous  system.     Elements  of  histology. 

9.    Theory  of  Physical  Education  and  Methods  of  Teaching. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Dr.  Skarstrom. 
The  purpose  of  this  course  is:  (i)  to  discuss  the  purposes,  scope, 
and  ideals  of  physical  education;  (2)  to  study  the  character,  selec- 
tion, classification,  arrangement,  and  progression  of  gymnastic  exer- 
cises; (3)  a  systematic  study  of  the  principles  and  technique  of 
teaching  gymnastics. 

10.  Gymnastics. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.    Four  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Dr.  Skarstrom,  Miss  Halsey. 

11.  Symptomatology  and  Emergencies.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

12.  History  of  Physical  Education.    Organization  and  administra- 

tion OF  playgrounds. 
Required  of  all  second-year  students  for  igiS-igig  only.     Three  hours 
a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Mr.  Fett£. 

The  object  of  this  course  is:  (i)  To  give  the  student  a  connected 
outline  of  the  rise  and  development  of  physical  education  as  a  sci- 
ence, to  impress  the  importance  of  national  health  through  a  survey 
of  the  causes  of  success  and  failure  in  ancient  peoples,  and  to  empha- 
size the  relation  of  the  teacher  to  the  movement  for  national  health 
to-day.    Lectures  and  assigned  reading. 

(2)  To  give  the  student  an  understanding  of  the  development  of 
the  playground  and  recreation  movement  and  its  relation  to  Com- 
munity Health,  and  to  give  a  brief  survey  of  the  latest  methods  of 
meeting  these  needs.  Lectures,  assigned  reading,  and  playground 
observation. 

(3)  Discussion  of  methods  of  coaching  and  the  management  of 
Field  and  Track  Athletics,  the  organization  and  administration  of 
group  tests  and  competition. 

13.  Physiology. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 
{Required  of  all  second-year  students  in  igi8-igig.) 

Mr.  Howe. 

Human  physiology  with  special  emphasis  on  its  appUcation  in 
personal  hygiene  and  in  physical  education.  Three  lectures  and 
one  laboratory  appointment  of  three  periods. 

This  course  counts  three  hours  towards  the  Bachelor's  degree. 


1918-19  Hygiene  100 

14.  Practice  Teaching. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students. 

Dr.  Skarstrom,  Mr.  FEXxfi, 
Miss  Manship,  Miss  Halsey. 

This  is  given  ia  the  college  classes  and  the  public  schools  of 
Wellesley. 

15.  Theory  and  Practice  of  Story  Plays  and  Rhythm  Training. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Halsey. 

16.  Folk  Dancing. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Manship,  Miss  Johnson. 

17.  Corrective  Gymnastics. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.     Two  hours  a  week  from  November 
until  May. 

Miss  Davis. 

Practice  in  the  college  clinic  for  students  needing  remedial  work. 

18.  Outdoor  Games  ajjd  Sports. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.     Eight  hours  a  week  in  the  fall, 
six  hours  a  week  in  the  spring. 

Mr.  Fett6,  Miss  Davis,  Miss  Manship, 
Miss  Halsey,  Miss  Garrison. 

19.  Anthropometry. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.      One  hour  a  week  for  the   second 
semester. 

Miss  Davis. 

Students  acquire  skill  in  the  use  of  anthropometric  instruments, 
in  recording  and  filing,  and  in  solving  problems  presented  by  the 
data  thus  secured. 

20.  Dancing. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Manshlp,  Miss  Johnson. 
Classic  dancing. 

33.    Practice  in  Teaching   .Esthetic,   Social  and   Folk  Dancing, 
and  Lectures  on  the  Relation  of  Music  to  Dancing. 
Required  of  all  second-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Manship,  Miss  Johnson. 


110  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

37.  Principles   of   Human   Behavior   as   applied   in   Problems   of 

Physical  Education. 
Required  of  all  second-year  students.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Chapman. 

A  course  in  the  study  of  the  principles  of  human  behavior  bearing 
on  problems  in  physical  education.  The  purpose  of  the  course  is  to 
demonstrate  the  relation  of  education  to  the  growth  of  the  indi- 
vidual in  both  body  and  mind. 

38.  School  Health  Problems. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  the  first 

semester. 

Mr.  Howe. 

Public  health  and  sanitary  science  with  special  reference  to 
school  conditions.    Training  in  teaching  hygiene. 


II.    Courses  open  to  all  Undergraduates 

Two  hours  in  Hygiene  are  prescribed  for  the  degree.  One  hour  of  this  requirement  is 
met  by  course  29;  the  second  hour  is  met  by  four  periods  of  practical  work,  two  penods  per 
week  in  the  freshman  year  (course  21)  and  two  in  the  sophomore  year  (course  22). 

By  special  permission  courses  23,  24  and  34  may  be  substituted  for  the  mdoor  work  ot 
courses  21  and  22.  Courses  23  (except  as  noted  below),  26,  31,  and  34  (except  as  noted 
below)  do  not  count  toward  the  degree. 

29.    Personal  Hygiene.    I. 

Required  of  freshmen.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Howe,  Miss  Halsey. 

Stress  is  laid  (i)  on  the  applicabihty  of  hygienic  practice  m  the 
immediate  situations  of  college  life,  and  (2)  on  the  development  of 
habits  of  posture  and  movement  as  a  phase  of  education.  The 
underlying  physiology  is  reduced  to  the  least  amount  needed  for 
scientific  justification  of  the  practice  of  personal  hygiene. 

21.    Gymnastics  and  Outdoor  Sports. 

Required  of  all  freshmen.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year,  counting  one- 
half  hour  toward  the  degree. 

Mr.  Fette,  Miss  Davis,  Miss  Manship, 
Miss  Johnson,  Miss  Halsey  and  Assistants. 

Outdoor  work  in  the  fall  and  spring  terms — organized  sports. 
This  part  of  the  course  is  designated  as  21  f.s.  (fall,  sprmg— see 
course  28). 

Indoor  work  in  the  winter  term — gymnastics.  This  part  of  the 
course  is  designated  as  21  w.  (winter).  Students  needing  remedial 
work  will  substitute  course  24  or  34  for  the  indoor  gymnastics. 


1918-19  Hygiene  111 

22.  Gymnastics  and  Outdoor  Sports. 

Required  of  all  sophomores  who  have  completed  course  21.  Two  hours 
a  week  for  a  year,  counting  one-half  hour  toward  the  degree. 

Mr.  Fette,  Miss  Davis,  Miss  Manship, 
Miss  Johnson,  Miss  Halsey  and  Assistants. 

Advanced  work  on  topics  as  in  course  21.  The  outdoor  work  of 
this  course  is  designated  as  22  f.s.  (fall,  spring — see  course  28), 
and  the  indoor  work  as  22  w.  (winter).  Students  needing  correc- 
tive or  remedial  work  will  substitute  course  24  or  34  for  the  gym- 
nasium practice  of  this  course. 

24.     Corrective  Gymnastics. 

Required  in  place  of  the  indoor  work  of  courses  21  and  22  in  the  case 
of  all  freshmen  and  sophomores  whose  physical  examination  indicates 
the  need  of  corrective  work. 

Miss  Davis  and  Assistants. 

23.  Gymnastics. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  courses  21  and  22  or 
their  equivalent,  and,  by  permission  of  the  instructor,  open  to  freshmen 
and  sophomores  who  have  had  an  equivalent  of  courses  21  and  22  and 
who  meet  the  requirements  of  the  department.  Two  hours  a  week  from 
November  until  May. 

Dr.  Skarstrom,  Miss  Johnson,  and  Assistants. 

26.     Dancing  (Advanced  Course). 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  31  or  an  equivalent.  One  hour  a 
week  from  November  until  May. 

Miss  Manship,  Miss  Johnson. 
28.    Organized  Sports. 

Archer}',  baseball,  basket  ball,  golf,  field  hockey,  horseback  riding, 
rowing,  running,  and  tennis. 

Two  hours  a  week  in  the  fall  and  spring  terms.    See  courses  21  and  22. 

Mr.  Fette,  Miss  Davis,  IMiss  Mansmp,  Miss  Johnson, 

Miss  Halsey,  Miss  Garrison,  and  Field  Instructors. 

31.     Dancing  (Elementary  Course). 

Open  to  students  who  have  had  no  previous  training.  One  hour  a  week 
from  November  until  May. 

Miss  Manship,  Miss  Johnson. 

34.    Remedial  Gymnastics. 

Required  in  place  of  the  indoor  work  of  courses  21  and  22  in  the  case 
of  all  freshmen  and  sophomores  whose  physical  exajninations  indicate 
the  need  of  remedial  work.  This  course  is  open  also  to  juniors  and 
seniors.    A  fee  may  he  charged  for  this  course. 

Miss  Haagensen,  Miss  Garrison, 


112  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 


ITALIAN 

PROFESSOR:    MARGARET    HASTINGS   JACKSON.^ 

Instructor:  Louise  Stella  Waite. 

If.  Elementary  Course.    I. 

Open  to  freshmen  who  offer  French  and  German  for  admission  and 
to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Waite. 

Grammar  with  written  and  oral  exercises;  reading  and  sight 
translation.     Conversation. 

2.  Intermediate  Course.    II.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  equivalent.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Grammar,  prose  composition;    reading  and  translation  at  sight; 
'    in  the  first  semester  from  modem  authors,  in  the  second  semester 
from  classic  authors. 

3.  History  of  Italian  Literature  in  the  Thirteenth  and  Four- 

teenth Centuries.     Emphasis  on  Dante.    III.     (Not  offered 

in  1918-1919.) 
Open  on  considtation  with  the  instructor  to  juniors  and   seniors  who 
have  a  reading  knowledge  of  Italian.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Selections  from  the  Vita  Nuova  and  the  Divina  Commedia  of  Dante. 
The  Sonnets  of  Petrarch  and  the  Tales  of  Boccaccio  will  be  read  in 
the  original. 

4.  History  of  Italian  Literature  in  the  Nineteenth  Century.     III. 

(Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  i  and  2  or  equivalents. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

5.  Dante  and  the  Early  Italian  Renaissance.     English  Course. 

II.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

First  semester:  Dante's  Divine  Comedy  (in  Enghsb)  and  the  condi- 
tions of  the  age  which  produced  it.     Second  semester:  The  early 

'  Absent  on  Sabbatical  leave  in  foreign  service. 

X  This  course  if  taken  in  the  senior  year  may  not  count  within  the  minimum  number 
of  hours  prescribed  for  a  degree. 


1918-19  Italian  113 

Italian  Renaissance  as  expressed  in  the  works  of  Petrarch,  Boccaccio. 
A  knowledge  of  Italian  is  not  required. 

Note. — The  Dante  Society  offers  an  annual  prize  of  one  hundred 
dollars  for  the  best  essay  on  a  subject  drawn  from  the  life  or  works 
of  Dante.  The  competition  is  open  to  students  or  graduates  of 
not  more  than  three  years'  standing  from  colleges  or  universities  in 
the  United  States.  For  subjects  and  conditions  consult  page  292 
of  the  Harvard  University  Catalogue,  1917-1918. 

7.  Italian  Prose  Writers  of  the  Fifteenth  and  Early  Sixteenth 

Centuries.     III.     (Not  offered  in  1917-1918.) 

Open  on  consultation  with  the  instructor  to  jtmiors  and  seniors  who 
have  a  reading  knowledge  of  Italian.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Selections  from  the  works  of  Macchiavelli,  Castiglione,  Savonarola 
and  other  writers  of  the  period  will  be  read  in  the  original. 

8.  Italian  Poets  of  the  Fifteenth  and  Early  Sixteenth  Centuries. 

III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  on  consultation  with  the  instructor  to  juniors  and  seniors  who 
have  a  reading  knowledge  of  Italian.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Selections  from  Poliziano,  Lorenzo  de'  Medici,  Boiardo,  Ariosto, 
Michael  Angelo,  Vittoria  Colonna  will  be  read  in  the  original. 

While  courses  7  and  8  are  continuous,  one  being  the  complement 
of  the  other,  they  may  be  elected  separately. 

9.  Literature  of  the  Italian  Renaissance.    III.     (Not  offered  in 

1918-1919.) 

Open  on  consultation  with  the  instructor  to  graduate  students  who  have 
a  reading  knowledge  of  Italian.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

It  is  not  the  intention  of  the  instructor  to  cover  the  entire  period 
of  the  Renaissance  but  to  treat  of  certain  aspects  only,  the  work  to 
adjust  itself  to  the  needs  of  the  individual  student.  Under  the 
supervision  of  the  instructor  the  student  will  choose  some  author, 
or  phase,  or  problem,  of  Itahan  Literature  for  special  study,  reporting 
thereon  weekly. 


114  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 


LATIN 

Professors  :  Adeline  Belle  Hawes,  M.A. 
Alice  Walton,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Professor:  Caroline  Rebecca  Fletcher,  M.A. 

INSTRUCTOR:   ANNA    BERTHA    MILLER,    PH.D. 

1.  LiVY,  Book  I  or  XXI-XXII;   Cicero  De  Amicitia;  Horace,  The 

Epodes.     Selections  from  other  Latin  poets.     I. 

Open  to  students  who  have  met  the  admission  requirement.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Walton,  Miss  Fletcher,  Miss  Miller. 

2.  Poetry  of  the  Augustan  Age.    Horace.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 
The  Odes  are  studied,  with  selections  from  the  Epistles. 

8.  Poetry  or  the  Augustan  Age.  Vergil.  II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Hawes. 

Selections  from  the  Bucolics,  Georgics,  and  yEneid  VII-XII. 

6.    Poetry  of  the  Augustan  Age.    Tibullus,  Propertius,  and  Ovid. 
II. 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Fletcher. 
17.    Studies  in  Tacitus  and  Pliny.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  a  semester  course  of  grade  II. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Hawes,  Miss  Walton. 

Tacitus,  Germania  and  Agricola,  with  selections  from  the  other 
works.  Pliny's  Letters.  The  work  in  PHny  includes  careful  study 
of  certain  letters  and  the  rapid  reading  of  many  others. 

13.    Cicero.    Essays  and  Letters.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  a  semester  course  of  grade  II. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Fletcher. 


1918-19  Latin  115 

3.  Contributions    or    Latin   Literature    to    Modern    Lite    and 

Thought.    II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  had  no  Latin  in  college.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Miller. 

The  formative  ideas  of  Latin  culture  studied  in  those  passages 
from  Latin  authors  in  which  they  found  enduring  expression.  Papers 
and  class  discussion  will  be  devoted  to  analyzing  and  appraising  in 
their  sources  the  ideals  current  under  such  terms  as  naturalism: 
humanism:  Alexandrianism:  citizenship:  imperial  destiny:  and  the 
State  Church. 

11.    Latin  Prose  Composition.    Intermediate  Course.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  and  are  taking  a  full 
course  in  the  department.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Fletcher. 
7.    Sight  Reading  in  Prose  and  Verse.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  are  taking  a  full  course  of  grade  II.    One  hour 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Miller, 
16.    Roman  Life  and  Customs.    II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  without  prerequisite,  and  to  sophomores 
who  have  completed  Latin  i.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hawes,  Miss  Walton, 
Miss  Fletcher,  Miss  Miller. 

Lectures,  illustrated  by  photographs  and  lantern  sUdes,  on  sub- 
jects connected  with  the  daily  life  and  surroundings  of  the  Romans, 
such  as  family  Hfe,  dress,  education,  buildings,  roads,  travel,  social 
functions,  amusements,  reKgious  customs,  etc.  The  required  read- 
ing will  be  mainly  in  Enghsh. 

4.  Comedy.    Plautus  and  Terence.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  fidl  courses.     Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Hawes. 

This  course  includes  the  careful  study  of  two  or  more  plays  to- 
gether with  the  rapid  reading  of  several  others. 

5.  Satire.    Horace  and  Juvenal.    HI. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.     Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Hawes. 

This  course  includes  the  reading  of  selected  satires  of  Horace  and 
Juvenal,  with  study  of  other  Roman  satirists  by  lecture?  and  special 
topics. 


116  Courses  or  Instruction  1918-19 

19.  LivY.    Books  I-X.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Fletcher. 

Study  of  the  sources  of  the  early  history  of  the  Roman  Republic. 
Lectures  and  collateral  reading. 

20.  Ovid,  Fasti;  Cicero,  De  Divinatione,  De  Natura  Deorum.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Fletcher. 

The  early  religious  institutions  of  the  Romans  will  be  studied  from 
these  sources  and  from  other  selected  readings. 

15t.    Topography  of  Roman  Sites.    III.     (Not  ofifered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.     Three  hours 
a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 

Architectural  History  and  Topography  of  Ancient  Rome  and  of 
typical  municipal  and  provincial  towns.     Lectures  and  discussions. 

ISJ.    Latin  Epigraphy.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 

For  the  work  in  Epigraphy,  Egbert's  Latin  Inscriptions  will  be 
used  as  well  as  facsimiles. 

21.  Latin  Literature  of  the  Early  Christian  Church.    HI. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Miller. 

Readings  from  the  Early  Christian  Apologists  and  Fathers  illus- 
trating the  contact  of  Christian  ideals  with  Pagan  thought  and  civ- 
ilization.    Latin  Hymns. 

This  course  may  count  as  an  elective  in  the  Department  of  Biblical 
History. 

10.    Latin  Prose  Composition.    HI. 

Open  at  the  discretion  of  the  instructor  to  students  who  have  completed 
course  11  and  who  are  taking  a  full  course  in  the  department.  One 
hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Fletcher. 

JLatm  15-18  and  Archaeology  4-5  are  not  ordinarily  given  in  the  same  year. 


1918-19  Latin  117 

Hf.  Literature  of  the  Roman  Empire.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  three  f till  courses.     Three  hours  a 
week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hawes. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  secure  an  acquaintance  with  many 
representative  authors  of  the  Roman  Empire,  and  to  show  the  in- 
terest and  the  value  of  the  "Silver  Latinity"  and  the  writers  of 
the  later  Imperial  Period.  The  readings,  which  include  both 
poetry  and  prose,  and  vary  somewhat  from  year  to  year,  will  in- 
clude selections  from  VeUeius  Paterculus,  Seneca,  Quintilian, 
Tacitus,  Martial,  Apuleius,  Claudian,  Boethius,  and  other  authors. 
The  course  includes  also  a  few  lectures  on  various  aspects  of  society 
in  the  time  of  the  Empire. 

Rapid  reading  without  translation  is  one  of  the  features  of  this 
course. 

22t.  History  of  Latin  Poetry.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Part  I,  Poetry  of  the  Republic. 
Part  II,  Post-Augustan  Poetry. 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  three  full  courses.     Three  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hawes. 

In  Part  I  some  study  will  be  given  to  the  beginnings  of  Latin 
poetry  and  the  earher  poets,  but  the  main  emphasis  will  be  placed 
upon  the  poets  of  the  Ciceronian  Age,  Catullus  and  Lucretius. 
Since  the  Augustan  poets  are  studied  in  the  grade  II  courses,  that 
period  will  be  considered  only  by  way  of  review  and  comparison. 
In  Part  II  the  aim  will  be  to  secure  an  acquaintance  with  repre- 
sentative poets  of  different  periods,  and  to  show  the  interest  and  the 
value  of  the  later  Latin  poetry. 

Rapid  reading  without  translation  will  be  one  of  the  features  of 
this  course. 

12.    Outline   History   of   Latin  Literature.    III.     (Not    given   in 
1918-1919.) 

Primarily  for  graduates.    Open  to  qualified  seniors  by  permission  of 
the  department. 

Lectures  and  readings,  with  direction  of  the  students'  private 
reading. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  a  general  survey  of  the  subject, 
tracing  the  beginnings  and  development  of  the  various  kinds  of 
prose  and  poetry,  and  considering  the  changes  in  the  pohtical  and 
social  conditions  under  which  Latin  literature  developed. 

t  Courses  14  and  22  are  not  given  in  the  same  year. 


118  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 


MATHEMATICS 

PROFESSORS:   HELEN   ABBOT   MERRILL,  PH.D. 

Eva  Chandler,  B.A. 

ROXANA    HAYWARD   VIVIAN,  PH.D. 

director  of  the  department  of  hygiene. 
Associate  Professors:  Clara  Eliza  Smith, ^  Ph.D. 

Florence  Parthenia  Lewis,^^  Ph.D. 
instructors:  mabel  minerva  young,  ph.d. 

Lennie  Phoebe  Copeland,  Ph.D. 
Mary  Florence  Curtis,  Ph.D. 

ASSISTANT:    MARY  AuGUSTA    BeAN,   B.A. 

1.  Higher  Algebil^.    I. 

Required  of  freshmen.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Merrill,  Miss  Chandler,  Miss  Lewis,  Miss  Young, 
Miss  Copeland,  Miss  Curtis,  Miss  Bean. 

The  elementary  theory  of  determinants,  followed  by  a  study  of 
limits  and  derivatives,  upon  which  the  work  in  series  and  theory  of 
equations  is  based. 

14.  Plane  and  Spherical  Trigonometry.    I, 

Required  of  freshmen  who  do  not  take  course  15.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Chandler,  Miss  Lewis,  Miss  Young, 
Miss  Copeland,  Miss  Curtis,  Miss  Bean. 

Exponential  equations,  trigonometric  equations  and  transforma- 
tions, solution  of  plane  and  spherical  triangles. 

15.  The  Elements  of  Analytic  Geometry.    I. 

Open  to  approved  freshmen  as  an  alternative  to  course  14.     Three  hours 
a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Merrill,  Miss  Chandler. 

A  brief  course,  covering  the  usual  topics,  and  planned  to  intro- 
duce students  as  early  as  possible  to  advanced  courses  in  mathe- 
matics.   The  necessary  topics  in  trigonometry  will  be  treated. 

2.  Conic  Sections  and  Plane  Analytic  Geometry.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  i  and  14.     Three  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Young,  Miss  Copeland. 

9  Absent  on  leave  as  exchange  professor  at  Goucher  College. 
"  Exchange  professor  from  Goucher  College. 


1918-19  Mathematics  119 

16.    History  of  Elementasy  Mathematics.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  2  or  course  j. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Copeland. 

The  evolution  of  the  fundamental  concepts  of  mathematics. 
Great  mathematicians  and  their  chief  contributions  to  elementary 
mathematics.  A  brief  survey  of  modern  developments  in  mathe- 
matics and  its  hterature.  A  standard  text  is  used,  supplemented  by 
lectures  and  short  reports  chiefly  based  upon  rare  old  books  in  the 
mathematical  Hbrary. 

7.    Introduction  to  the  Theory  of  Statistics.    II. 

Open  to  sttidents  who  have  completed  course  i  and  either  course  14 
or  course  15.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Vivian. 

Lectures  with  supplementary  reading  on  some  of  the  mathemat- 
ical principles  and  methods  used  in  statistical  work.  Each  student 
will  present  one  or  more  studies  based  upon  data  drawn  from 
economic,  psychological,  scientific  or  other  sources. 

11.    Problem  Work  in  Statistics.    II.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  and  either  course  14  or 
course  15.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Vivian. 

The  class  will  meet  two  peiiods  a  week  for  problem  work  and 
exercises  in  the  collection  and  arrangement  of  material,  and  certain 
methods  will  be  presented  in  addition  to  those  in  course  7. 

Note. — Course  7  is  primarily  for  theory  and  for  those  students 
who  wish  to  use  critically  the  statistics  of  others.  Course  11  is 
primarily  for  problem  work  and  for  those  students  who  wish  prac- 
tice in  collecting  and  arranging  statistical  material.  Students  may 
elect  course  7  without  course  11,  but  not  course  11  without  course  7. 

3.  JDlFFERENTIAL   AND   INTEGRAL   CALCULUS.      III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2  or  course  15.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Chandler,  Miss  Lewis,  Miss  Curtis. 
The  appHcations  include  a  course  in  curve  tracing. 

4.  Theory  of  Equations,  with  Determinants.    III.     (Not  given  in 

igir-igig.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  3.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Chandler. 

The  work  is  based  on  Burnside  and  Panton's  Theory  of  Equations. 


120  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

5.     Solid  Analytical  Geometry.    III.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  3.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Chandler. 

The  straight  line;  the  plane;  surfaces  of  the  second  order.  Brief 
study  of  surfaces  in  general. 

6t.  Modern  Synthetic  Geometry.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  j.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Merrill. 

Metrical  and  projective  properties  of  plane  and  sheaf  forms  of 
the  first  and  second  orders;  the  anharmonic  ratio;  harmonic  forms; 
the  method  of  inversion;  involution;  collineation;  the  law  of  dual- 
ity; theory  of  poles  and  polars;  reciprocation;  space  forms  and 
surfaces  of  the  second  order.  Given  by  lectures  and  references, 
with  constant  practice  in  the  solution  of  geometrical  problems. 

8.  Higher  Plane  Curves.     III.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Opeti  to  students  who  have  completed  course  j.     Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Young. 

Prehminary  study  of  selected  topics  in  algebra  and  of  homo- 
geneous co-ordinates.  General  properties  of  curves  derived  from 
the  homogeneous  equation  of  the  nth  degree,  and  the  principles 
developed  applied  to  a  brief  review  of  the  conic  and  a  detailed  study 
of  curves  of  the  third  order.  A  lecture  course,  with  reading  from 
standard  texts. 

9.  Introduction  to  the  Theory  of  Functions  of  a  Complex  Vari- 

able.   III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  j.     Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Merrill. 

Elementary  treatment  of  analytic  functions.     Infinite  series  and 

products,  with  appHcations  to  Beta,  Gamma,  and  elliptic  functions. 

10.     Differential  Equations.     III.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  j.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Chandler. 

A  general  course  in  ordinary  and  partial  differential  equations. 
J  Courses  6  and  17  may  not  both  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree. 


1918-19  Music  121 

17t.  Descriptive  Geometry.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  j.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Merrill. 

The  theory  and  practice  of  the  representation  of  geometric 
figures.  The  use  of  two  or  more  planes  of  projection  in  representing 
lines,  surfaces  and  solids;  intersection  of  surfaces;  shades  and 
shadows;  the  elements  of  perspective.  Two  lectures  each  week, 
with  two  additional  consecutive  periods  for  drawing  under  super- 
vision. 

MUSIC 

PROFESSORS:    HAMILTON    CRAWFORD    MACDOUQALL,    MUS.D. 

Clarence  Grant  Hamilton,  M.A. 

INSTRUCTORS:    EmILY    JOSEPHINE    HURD. 

Hetty  Shepard  Wheeler,^  M.A. 
Albert  Thomas   Foster. 
Blanche  Francis  Brocklebank.^^ 
Ralph  Springer  Smalley. 
Joseph  Goudreault. 
Frances  Marion  Ralston. 
Alice  Vernice  Gay.^^ 
Assistant:  Jessie  Buchanan. 

The  Wellesley  College  Choir  of  forty  members,  founded  in  1900, 
furnishes  the  music  for  the  Sunday  services  in  the  Memorial  Chapel. 
Any  student  with  a  good  natural  voice  is  eUgible  for  membership; 
trials  to  fill  vacancies  are  held  at  the  opening  of  each  College  year. 

The  college  Symphony  Orchestra,  consisting  of  about  thirty 
student  and  faculty  members,  was  founded  in  1906.  It  offers  ad- 
vantages of  competent  instruction  in  ensemble  playing  under  a  pro- 
fessional conductor.  It  gives  one  or  two  concerts  a  year  with  a 
program  of  classical  music.  Any  members  of  the  College  who  have 
sufl&cient  technique  are  admitted  to  membership  without  expense. 

A  Hmited  number  of  tickets  for  reserved  seats  at  the  concerts  of 
the  Boston  Symphony  Orchestra  in  Symphony  Hall,  Boston,  are 
free  to  students  in  the  department  who  are  able  to  use  them  profit- 
ably. 

I.     Musical  Theory 

The  courses  in  theory  and  history  are  open  to  all  students  without 
regard  to  previous  musical  knowledge,  and  count  toward  the  B.A. 
degree.    The  history  and  theory  courses  are  subject  to  no  separate 

'  Absent  on  leave. 

"  Absent  on  leave  for  the  first  semester  in  foreign  service 

»"  Appointed  for  first  semester  only. 

t  Courses  6  and  17  may  not  both  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree 


122  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

tuition  fee,  with  the  exception  of  courses  g,  lo,  ii,  and  12,  where  a 
nominal  fee  of  five  dollars  is  charged  for  tuning  and  repairs  of  in- 
struments. Courses  8,  4, 14, 18, 19,  and  20,  are  designed  especially 
for  those  students  desiring  to  gain  an  appreciative  knowledge  of 
musical  h'terature. 

15.    Elementary  Harmony.    I. 

Open  only  to  freshmen  who  are  taking  practical  music.  Two  hours  a 
week  for  a  year.    No  prerequisites. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

This  course  is  designed  for  freshmen  who  enter  coUege  with  the 
intention  of  specializing  in  music.  It  may  be  followed  by  course  i, 
but  not  by  course  8.  This  course  covers  musical  notation,  the 
formation  of  triads  and  chords  of  the  seventh,  the  invention  of 
melodies  and  their  harmonization,  the  simpler  kinds  of  non-har- 
monic tones,  elementary  form,  and  ear  training.  (Carefully  kept 
notebooks  are  a  part  of  the  work.) 

8.    Introductory  Harmony.    I. 

Open  to  sophojnores,  juniors,  seniors,  and  advanced  freshmen  (five-year 
music  course).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year.     No  prerequisites. 

Miss  Ralston. 

This  course  covers  the  ground  necessary  for  admission  to  course 
I  or  4,  and  also  offers  a  substantial  foundation  for  subsequent  work 
in  practical  or  theoretical  music.  It  includes  the  material  of  the 
ordinary  elementary  harmony  course  and  in  addition  emphasizes 
ear  training  and  harmonic  analysis. 

This  course  is  not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  course  15. 

1.    Advanced  Harmony.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  15  or  course  8  or  the  equiv- 
alent.    Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Hamilton. 

This  course  covers  in  extenso  the  various  classes  of  non-harmonic 
tones,  chords  of  the  ninth  modulation,  elementary  orchestration, 
writing  for  the  piano,  organ,  and  for  voices.  The  course  aims  to 
give  facility  in  elementary  composition. 

5.    Musical  Analysis.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  15  or  8  or  the  equivalent. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Ralston. 

A  course  both  technical  and  appreciative,  designed  to  furnish 
students  with  a  knowledge  of  harmony  and  musical  form  sufficient 
for  the  intelligent  understanding  of  the  standard   Classical  and 


1918-19  Music  123 

Modern  works.  The  course  takes  up  the  study  of  the  principal 
chords,  their  function  in  the  musical  sentence,  the  smaller  forms 
(song  form,  the  small  classical  and  modern  dance  forms)  and  then 
proceeds  to  the  larger  forms  (Suite,  Sonata,  Symphony,  Canon, 
Fugue,  Overture,  Sjmiphonic  Poem).  The  smaller  forms  will  be 
studied  through  individual  and  class  analysis,  individual  reports 
and  short  papers,  while  the  Victrola  and  Player-piano  will  be  freely 
used  in  the  analysis  of  the  larger  forms.  No  original  work  in 
composition  is  required. 

2.  Interpretation.    I. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  are  at  the  same  time 
taking  lessons  in  practical  music  in  the  department  and  who  have 
acquired  a  satisfactory  degree  of  skill.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall,  Mr.  Hamilton. 

This  course  is  a  training  in  the  principles  of  interpretation,  de- 
veloped through  the  performance  in  class  of  music  studied  with  the 
private  teacher  and  by  listening  to  and  analyzing  compositions  per- 
formed by  others.  The  course  concerns  itself  \vith  the  recognition 
of  the  simple  cadences,  harmonic  figuration  as  applied  to  the  accom- 
paniment, the  broader  rhythmical  distinctions,  the  relations  of  mel- 
ody and  accompaniment,  the  school  of  the  composer,  biographical 
data,  and  the  simpler  elements  of  form. 

Note. — Students  wishing  to  elect  the  course  should  apply  directly 
to  the  head  of  the  department. 

Students  may  elect  practical  music  without  electing  the  course 
in  interpretation;  but  no  one  may  elect  the  course  in  interpretation 
without  at  the  same  time  electing  practical  music. 

3.  Interpretation.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2  and  who  are  at  the  same 
time  taking  lessons  in  practical  music  in  the  department  and  hive 
acquired  a  satisfactory  degree  of  skill;  also  by  special  permission  to 
seniors.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall,  Mr.  Hamilton. 

This  course  is  a  continuation  of  course  2.  The  subject-matter 
of  the  course  is  the  thematic  and  polyphonic  melody,  the  larger 
forms,  harmony  in  its  ^esthetic  bearings,  the  aesthetic  effects  of  the 
more  complicated  rhythms,  comparative  criticism  and  the  various 
schools  of  composition.     See  note  to  course  2. 

9.    Applied  Harmony.    II.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  those  students  only  who  are  at  the  same  time  taking  course  i. 
Two  hours  a  vjeek  for  a  year.  A  laboratory  fee  of  five  dollars  is  attached 
to  this  course. 

Mr.  Hamilton. 


124  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

This  course  aims  to  realize  synthetically  at  the  pianoforte  the 
principles  taught  in  course  i,  following  what  may  be  termed  a 
laboratory  method. 

Note. — Instruction  will  be  given  in  small  classes  of  not  less  than 
three  students.  The  course  is  in  no  sense  a  substitute  for  piano- 
forte lessons.  Students  must  satisfy  the  head  of  the  department 
that  they  have  a  pianoforte  technique  adequate  for  the  work;  in 
general,  the  abiUty  to  play  the  easier  Mendelssohn  Songs  without 
Words,  and  to  read  hymn  tunes  accurately  at  sight  will  be  sufficient. 

4.    The  Development  of  the  Art  of  Music.    III.     (Not  offered  in 
1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  8,  and  i  or  5.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

A  course  in  the  appreciation  of  music  designed  to  develop  musi- 
cal perception  and  the  ability  to  listen  intelligently  to  the  best 
music.  It  includes  the  evolution  of  rhythm,  harmony,  and  melody, 
and  their  powers  and  offices  in  musical  expression;  the  principal 
musical  forms  analytically  considered;  studies  of  the  principal 
composers,  their  Hves,  their  strongest  works,  their  relation  to  the 
progress  of  musical  art.  Some  great  work  will  be  selected  for 
study  during  the  year. 

This  course  is  not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  or  are  taking 
course  14. 

10.    Applied  History.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  those  students  only  who  are  at  the  same  time  taking  course  4. 
Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year.  A  laboratory  fee  of  five  dollars  is  at- 
tached to  this  course. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

This  course  aims  to  realize  synthetically  at  the  pianoforte  the 
development  of  music  from  the  organum  of  Hucbald  to  the  Wagner 
opera.  Specimens  of  the  music  of  various  schools  and  periods 
will  be  collected,  played  and  analyzed.     See  note  to  course  9. 

6.    Counterpoint.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Ralston. 

Counterpoint  in  two,  three,  and  four  voices;  double  counter- 
point; analysis;  the  distinctions  between  strict  (modal)  and  free 
counterpoint;  the  rules  for  the  latter  deduced  from  contempora- 
neous practice;  fugue  for  two  and  three  voices. 


1918-19  Music  125 

11.  Applied  Counterpoint.     III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  those  students  only  who  are  at  the  same  time  taking  course  6. 
Two  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester.  To  this  course  a  laboratory 
fee  of  two  dollars  and  a  half  is  attached. 

This  course  aims  to  realize  synthetically  at  the  pianoforte  the 
laws  of  simple  and  double  counterpoint  by  the  constant  playing  and 
analysis  of  the  best  examples  from  the  masters.     See  note  to  course  9. 

7.    Musical  Form.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  6.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Ralston. 

This  course  aims  to  cover  the  various  imitative  forms,  the  suite 
and  sonata  forms,  the  large  forms  of  vocal  and  orchestral  music. 

Students  have  the  opportunity  of  doing  practical  work  in  com- 
position (song  form,  sonata  movem.ents,  etc.). 

12.  Applied  Form.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  those  students  only  who  are  at  the  same  time  taking  course  7. 
Two  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester.  To  this  course  a  laboratory 
fee  of  two  dollars  and  a  half  is  attached. 

This  course  aims  to  play  and  to  analyze  a  great  number  of  speci- 
mens of  the  various  forms,  with  careful  analysis  and  classification. 
See  note  to  course  9. 

14.    History  of  Music.    II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors,  and  to  sophomores  who  have  had  one 
course  in  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Hamilton. 

Lectures  on  the  history  of  music  of  all  nations,  with  assigned 
readings  and  frequent  musical  illustrations,  from  which  the  student 
is  taught  to  compile  analytical  programs  and  critiques. 

The  course  is  non-technical  and  no  previous  knowledge  of  music 
is  required.  It  is  not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  or  are 
taking  course  4. 

13.  The  Symphony  from  Joseph  Haydn  to  the  Present  Time.    III. 

(Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  i  and  4  or  their  equiva- 
lent and  who  have  some  facility  in  playing  the  pianoforte.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

A  historical  course,  tracing  the  developing  of  the  Symphony 
in  its  form,  its  instrimientation,  and  its  content. 


126  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

17.  Free  Composition.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1^18-1919.) 

Open  by  permission  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  6  and  7. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

18.  Beethoven  and  Wagner.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  its  equivalent.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 
An  intensive  course  devoted  to  the  analyses  of  selected  pianoforte 
sonatas,  chamber  music,  the  symphonies  of  Beethoven,  "Fidelio," 
and  the  operas  of  Wagner.  The  aim  of  the  course  will  be  to  give  an 
intimate  knowledge  of  the  two  composers'  works  and  to  estimate 
their  place  in  musical  history. 

19.  Schubert  and  Schumann.     II.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  and  to  sophomores  who  have  had  one  course 
in  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Mr.  Hamilton. 

An  illustrated  lecture  course,  intensive  in  character,  devoted  to 
the  study  of  the  principal  works  of  the  composers  named.  The 
romantic  movement  in  music,  the  development  of  the  German  Song, 
the  poetical  and  lyric  piano  piece  and  the  birth  of  musical  criticism 
are  among  the  principal  topics  treated. 

The  work  of  the  class  will  be  based  mainly  upon  assigned  read- 
ings and  critical  papers. 

20.  Mendelssohn  and  Chopin.    II.     (Not  oft'ered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  and  to  sophomores  who  have  had  one  course 
in  the  department.     Three  hours  a  iveek  for  the  secotid  semester. 

Mr.  Hamilton. 

An  illustrated  lecture  course,  intensive  in  character,  devoted  to 
the  study  of  the  principal  works  of  the  composers  named.  The 
beginnings  of  modernism,  the  culmination  of  sacred  music  in  the 
oratorio,  the  age  of  the  virtuoso,  the  development  of  instruments 
and  individual  and  emotional  treatment  in  music  are  the  principal 
topics  studied. 

The  work  of  the  class  will  be  based  mainly  upon  assigned  readings 
and  critical  papers. 

II.    Practical  Music  (Instrumental  and  Vocal  Lessons) 

[Attention  is  called  to  the  fact  that  a  good  student  need  not  necessarily  spend  five  years 
in  college  in  order  to  carry  on  practical  music  at  the  same  time  with  the  academic  course. 
See  (a)  below.] 

It  is  beUeved  that  students  having  a  performing  technique  will  be  able 
to  profit  by  the  theoretical  instruction  given  in  the  department  to  a  fuller 


1918-19  Music  127 

degree  than  those  without  such  a  technique.  To  encourage  students  to 
acquire  a  technique,  as  well  as  to  furnish  authoritative  instruction,  the 
department  undertakes  to  give  lessons  in  pianoforte,  organ,  violin  and 
violoncello  playing,  and  in  singing.  Practical  work  is  an  elective,  and  stu- 
dents should  notify  the  department  of  their  election  of  the  subject  in  the 
usual  manner  and  at  the  proper  time;  with  the  exception  of  theory  courses 
2  and  3  and  the  applied  music  courses  9,  10,  11,  12,  practical  work 
does  not  count  toward  the  B.A.  degree.  It  is  offered  to  all  students,  whether 
candidates  for  degrees  or  not,  as  stated  below: — 

(a)  Candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  who  propose  to  spend  hut  four  years  in 
college  may  take  practical  music,  provided  that  they  obtain  each  year  the 
permission  of  the  Dean  of  the  College  as  well  as  of  the  Professor  of  Music; 
they  must  also  take  Musical  Theory  unless  they  have  completed  two  two- 
hour  or  three-hour  courses  in  the  subject. 

(&)  Candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  who  are  willing  to  devote  five  years  to 
the  college  course  will  be  permitted  to  take  practical  music  each  year  of  the 
course.  Freshmen  may  do  so  without  taking  Musical  Theory,  but  all 
other  students  in  the  academic  and  musical  course  are  governed  by  the 
restriction  laid  down  in  (a). 

(c)  Candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  who  wish  also  the  Certificate  of  the 
Department  of  Music  should  plan  to  devote  five  years  to  the  college  course. 
Such  students  are  required  to  take  practical  music,  two  lessons  a  week, 
throughout  the  five  years.  They  must  complete,  satisfactorily  to  the 
department,  a  course  in  the  literature  of  the  instrument  chosen  or  of  the 
voice;  they  must  apply  for  the  certificate  at  least  three  years  in  advance. 
After  the  first  year  the  study  of  Musical  Theory  is  required. 

{d)  Students  not  candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  who  desire  to  specialize 
in  music  must  meet  the  requirements  prescribed  for  admission  to  the  fresh- 
man class,  and  must  in  addition  pass  an  entrance  examination,  particulars  of 
which  will  be  furnished  on  appHcation.  Special  students  must  take  both 
Musical  Theory  and  vocal  or  instrumental  lessons,  two  a  week,  with  not 
less  than  twelve  hours  of  weekly  practice.  They  must  also  take  from  six 
to  nine  hours  per  week  of  academic  work,  including  Musical  Theory,  as  may 
be  decided  in  consultation  with  the  Dean. 

(e)  Students  not  candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  who  wish  the  Certifi- 
cate of  the  Department  of  Music  must  comply  with  the  conditions  laid  down 
in  {d);  moreover,  the  academic  work  taken  must  include  modern  languages. 
Such  students  must  apply  for  the  certificate  on  entering  the  department, 
and  must  have  already  acquired  the  fundamental  technique  of  the  instru- 
ment chosen  or  of  the  voice.  The  time  occupied  in  study  for  the  certificate 
depends  upon  the  talent,  upon  the  proficiency  of  the  student  at  entrance, 
and  upon  her  subsequent  diligence;  but  in  general  four  years  at  least  are 
necessary.  The  various  courses  are  so  arranged  that  the  pupil  on  comple- 
tion will  have  an  acquaintance  with  the  best  musical  literature. 

if)  Graduates  of  Wellesley  College  or  of  other  institutions  may  make 
special  arrangement  for  instrumental  or  vocal  lessons. 


128  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

(g)  Permission  to  practice  in  Music  Hall  cannot  be  given  to  students 
not  regularly  registered  in  the  department. 

(h)  Students  whose  progress  is  not  satisfactory  may  be  required  to 
discontinue  their  lessons. 

For  tuition  and  other  charges  in  the  Department  of  Music 
see  page  146. 

COMPARATIVE  PHILOLOGY 

professor:  katharine  may  edwards,  ph.d. 
Associate  Professors:  Laura  Emma  Lookwood,  ^  Ph.D. 
Natalie  Wipplinqer.  Ph.D. 

1.     General  Introduction  to  the  Science  of  Language.    III.     (Not 
offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  seniors  and  juniors  who  have  had  at  least   one  year  of  Greek. 
One  hour  a  week  for  a  year  and  an  additional  hour  in  alternate  weeks. 
To  count  as  one  and  one-half  hours. 

Miss  Edwards. 

Lectures  on  the  origin  and  nature  of  language  and  the  principles 
of  its  Hfe  and  growth;  outhne  studies  in  phonetics;  classification  of 
languages;  groups  of  the  Indo-European  languages  with  chief  char- 
acteristics. 

3.     Comparative  Grammar  of  Greek  and  Latin.    III.     (Not  offered 
in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  and  who  have  had  at  least 
two  years  of  Greek  and  Latin.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  se- 
mester. 

Miss  Edwards. 

Historical  study  of  sounds  and  inflections  of  Greek  and  Latin  in 
relation  to  other  Indo-European  languages. 

5.  Sanskrit.     III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  graduates  only.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

6.  Gothic  (German  26).    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  graduates,  and  to  seniors  by  permission  of  the  instructor. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

Reading  of  Uljilas,  with  constant  reference  to  the  syntax,  phonol- 
ogy, and  etymology  of  the  language.  Presentation  of  fundamental 
principles  in  Germanic  Philology. 

'  Absent  on  leave. 


1918-19  Philosophy  and  Psychology  129 

8.  Old  English  (English  Language  4).     III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  graduates,  and  to  seniors  by  permission  of  the  department. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lock  wood. 

A  study  of  Old  English  inflections,  phonology  and  syntax.     The 

reading  of  the  best  pieces  of  Hterature  in  Old  Enghsh  prose  and 

poetry.     A  particular  problem  in  either  literature  or  language  is 

assigned  to  each  student  for  investigation. 

9.  Old  French  (French  11).     III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  graduates  and  to  seniors  by  permission  of  the  department. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

A  study  of  Old  French  in  numerous  old  texts  with  a  consideration 
of  the  general  laws  of  its  phonetic  development  from  Latin  to  French, 
and  the  evolution  of  its  syntax. 

Lectures,  critical  reading,  papers  on  special  subjects. 


PHILOSOPHY  AND   PSYCHOLOGY 

PROFESSORS:    MaRY  WhITON   CaLKINS.    M.A.,  LiTT.D..    LL.D. 

Mary  Sophia  Case,  B.A. 

Eleanor  Agheson   McCulloch   Gamble,  Ph.D. 
Lecturers:  Ludwig  Reinhold  Geissler,  Ph.D. 
R.  F.  Alfred  Hoernle,^^  M.A. 
instructors:  horace  bidwell  english,^*  ph.d. 
Lucy  Wilson,  Ph.D. 
Flora  Isabel  MacKinnon,  M.A. 

Graduate  Assistants  :  Helen  Wight  Wheeler,  B.A. 
Helen   Francis  Whiting,  B.A. 

READER:    GRACE    AlLERTON    ANDREWS,   M.A. 

The  requirement  in  philosophy  for  a  degree  is  met  (a)  by  course  i  (first  semester) 
followed  in  the  same  year  by  course  6  (second  semester);  or  (b)  by  course  7  (full 
year  course). 

The  department  offers  direction  to  graduate  students  in  independent  work  m 
psychology  and  in  philosophy,  and  conducts  graduate  conferences  with  individual 
students  at  stated  times. 

I.    Logic 

3.    Logic.    I. 

Open  to  sophomores  and  juniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Gamble. 

Training  in  argument  and  in  logical  criticism.  Work  expressly 
designed  to  meet  the  practical  needs  of  the  student.  The  course 
deals  not  only  with  the  principles  of  deductive  logic,  but  also  with 

'5  Appinted  for  the  second  semester  only. 
'*  Absent  on  leave  in  Government  service. 


130  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

elementary  questions  of  observation  and  testimony,  and  of  scien- 
tific, statistical,  and  legal  evidence.  Text-book:  Sellars,  Essentials 
of  Logic. 

II.     Psychology 

Courses  i  and  7  are  not  both  open  to  the  same  student. 
For  description  of  the  Psychology  Laboratory,  see  page  163. 

1.  Introduction  to  Psychology.  I. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
the  first  semester. 

Lectures,  Miss  Calkins. 
Conferences,  Miss  Calkins,  Miss  MacKinnon,  Miss  Wheeler. 

The  aims  of  this  course  are,  first  and  primarily,  to  train  students 
in  the  scientific  observation  and  description  of  consciousness; 
second,  to  apply  the  results  of  this  study  to  practical  problems  of 
conduct;  and,  finally,  to  provide  a  psychological  basis  for  the  study 
of  sociology,  of  education,  and  of  philosophy.  The  course  is  con- 
ducted (i)  by  means  of  lectures,  with  occasional  experimental  demon- 
strations, accompanied  by  class  discussions;  (2)  by  weekly  con- 
ferences \^ith  groups  of  students.  Reading  of  psychological  texts 
is  preceded  by  purely  introspective  or  by  experimental  analysis  and 
is  followed  by  the  study  of  concrete  problems.  Text-books:  Calkins, 
A  First  Book  in  Psychology,  and  James,  Psychology,  Briefer  Course. 
Collateral  reading:  Selections  from  Miinsterberg,  Psychology,  General 
and  Applied;  Miller,  The  Psychology  of  Thinking,  and  from  other 
books. 

7.    Introductory    Course   in   Experimental    Psychology    and    in 
Philosophy.    I. 
Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Lectures,  Miss  Gamble. 
Laboratory,  Miss  Gamble,  Mr.  Geissler,  Miss  Wilson, 

Miss  Whiting. 
This  course  aims  to  give  to  students  an  acquaintance  with 
primary  mental  facts,  to  give  them  a  definite  notion  of  the  topics 
treated  and  of  the  experimental  and  statistical  methods  employed 
in  psychology,  and  to  fit  them  for  more  advanced  psychological  work. 
Especial  stress  is  laid  upon  the  study  of  color-vision  and  of  memory. 
The  course  is  conducted  by  lectures  and  by  weekly  laboratory  ap- 
pointments for  the  assignment  and  discussion  of  experunental  work. 
Text-books:  Calkins,  A  First  Book  in  Psychology;  Titchener,  A 
Text-hook  of  Psychology,    Breese,  Psychology. 

The  work  in  psychology  is  supplemented  by  a  course,  nmning 
through   half   of   the   second   semester,   which  is  introductory   to 
philosophical  study.     The   reading  will  include   Berkeley's   Three 
Dialogues  between  Hylas  and  Philonous. 
1* 


1918-19  Philosophy  and  Psychology  131 

17.  Social  and  Applied  Psychology.    II. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  course  7  and  hy  permission  to 
seniors  who  have  completed  course  i.  In  igiS-igig,  three  hours  a 
week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Gamble. 
In  this  abridged  course,  the  following  topics  will  be  considered: 
(i)  the  conditions  of  mental  efficiency;  (2)  normal  individual  dif- 
ferences; (3)  intelligence  tests;  (4)  mental  deficiency  and  retarda- 
tion; (5)  socially  important  types  of  mental  aberration;  and  (6) 
the  psychological  factors  in  certain  forms  of  delinquency.  Among 
the  books  studied  will  be:  HoUingworth,  Vocational  Psychology; 
Tredgold,  Mental  Deficiency;  White,  Outlines  of  Psychiatry;  Healy, 
The  Individual  Delinqueni. 

18.  Second    Course    in    General    Experimental    Psychology.    III. 

(Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open   to   graduate  students,   to   undergraduates  who   have  completed 
course  y,  and  hy  permission  to  undergraduates  who  have  completed 
course  i.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Geissler. 

This  course  (i)  requires  first-hand  observation  of  the  chief  facts 
of  psychology;  (2)  relates  these  facts  by  means  of  lectures  and 
informal  conferences  to  the  principal  theories  of  psychology;  and 
(3)  aims  to  develop  a  good  experimental  technique.  The  course 
is  designed  for  those  who  expect  to  continue  with  psychology  or 
with  closely  related  disciplines,  either  as  teachers  or  as  students. 
Titchener:  Manuals  of  Experimental  Psychology.  Collateral  read- 
ing on  which  students  make  oral  reports. 

14.  Research  Course  in  Psychology.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  7,  a}id  to  students  who  are 
taking  or  who  have  completed  course  18.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Gamble,  Mr.  Geissler. 

This  course  consists  of  investigation  of  special  problems,  experi- 
mental or  statistical,  by  individual  students.  In  1918-1919  prob- 
lems in  the  fields  of  memorizing,  of  fatigue,  and  of  mental  tests 
will  be  included.  The  methods  employed  are  wider  than  the  prob- 
lems and  are  adapted  to  training  students  in  the  fundamental 
demands  of  research. 

15.  Second  Research  Course  in  Psychology.    III. 

Open  hy  permission  to  graduate  students.  Three  hours  a  week  for  a 
year. 

Mr.  Geissler. 


132  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

5.  Reading  Course  in  German  or  in  French  Psychological  Texts. 

II.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  are  taking  course  14,  course  ij,  course  77,  or 
course  18.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

III.     Philosophy 

6.  Introduction  to  Philosophy.    I. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  i. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Lectures,  Miss  Calkins. 
Conferences,  Miss  Calkins,  Miss  MacKinnon,  Miss  Wheeler. 

This  course  begins  with  a  brief  study  of  ethics,  treated  from  a 
psychological  starting  point,  as  the  science  of  the  moral  self.  The 
emphasized  topics  of  this  study  are  the  nature  of  goodness  and  of 
duty  and  the  relation  of  virtue  to  instinct  and  to  habit.  The  greater 
part  of  the  course  is  devoted  to  the  discussion  of  the  philosophical 
problems  raised  in  the  study  of  psychology:  the  nature  of  body, 
the  nature  of  mind,  and  the  connection  between  mind  and  body. 
The  relations  of  philosophy  to  physical  science  and  to  religion  are 
briefly  considered.  The  discussion  is  based  upon  Descartes, 
Meditations;  selections  from  Hobbes,  from  La  Mettrie,  and  from 
Haeckel;  Berkeley,  Principles  of  Human  Knowledge  and  Three 
Dialogues  between  Hylas  and  Philonous. 

16.    Social  Ethics.    II. 

Open  to  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Case. 

The  course  aims  to  develop  a  comprehensive  conception  of  human 
life  and  an  intelHgent  apprehension  of  the  significance  of  conduct, 
especially  in  its  social  aspects.  Extended  passages  are  read  from 
Plato's  Republic;  Bosanquet's  The  Philosophical  Theory  of  the 
State;  Dewey  and  Tufts'  Ethics,  Part  III;  supplementary  read- 
ings from  Mill,  Rousseau,  Treitschke,  Burns  and  others.  Lectures 
on  family  relationships,  friendship,  and  other  personal  relations; 
on  the  nature  of  social  institutions,  especially  the  state;  emphasis 
on  international  relations.     Class  discussions. 

10.    Greek  Philosophy.    II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  i 
or  course  7.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Case. 

Primarily  text  study,  (a)  Pre-Platonic  philosophy.  Fragments 
(accompanied  by  outUnes);    selections  from  Xenophon's  Memora- 


1918-19  Philosophy  and  Psychology  133 

bilia  and  from  the  dialogues  of  Plato.  Two  months,  (b)  Plato. 
Study  of  the  dialogues  with  especial  emphasis  on  Plato's  develop- 
ment. Most  of  the  year,  (c)  Post-Platonic  philosophy.  Selec- 
tions from  Aristotle's  De  Anitna,  Nicomachean  Ethics,  and  Meta- 
physics;  lectures  on  Aristotle;  brief  summary  of  post-Artistotelian 
philosophy. 

9.    Problems  of  Modern  Philosophy.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  who  are  taking  course  lo,  to  seniors,  and  to  gradu- 
ate students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Calkins. 

This  course  is  conducted  by  lectures  and  discussions  on  problems 
of  philosophy,  including  the  principle  of  causation,  the  nature  and 
existence  of  the  self,  the  nature  of  the  physical  world,  the  relation 
of  ideahsm  to  reahsm,  and  the  issue  between  pluralism  and  abso- 
lutism. Discussion  is  based  on  the  study  of  Hume,  Kant,  Spinoza, 
Leibniz  and  Fichte;  and  students  are  referred  also  to  the  writings 
of  Pearson,  James,  Royce,  Ward,  Bergson,  Russell  and  other  con- 
temporary writers. 

11.  The  Logic  of  Hegel.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  lo  and  have  completed  or 
are  taking  course  q,  atid  by  special  arrangement  to  graduate  students 
who  have  completed  course  g.     Three  hours  a  week  j or  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Case. 

Text  study  of  extended  passages  from  the  Logic  of  Hegel's  En- 
cyclopedia. 

12.  Philosophy  of  Religion.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  ii.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Case. 

(a)  Critical  study  of  methods  of  examining  reUgious  beUefs, 
especially  the  psychological  method  and  the  method  of  Hegel.  The 
relarion  of  these  methods  to  pragmaric  tests.  Readings  from  Durk- 
heim,  James,  Coe,  Royce,  Hocking,  Dewey,  and  others,  (b)  Dis- 
cussion of  special  problems  selected  by  the  class,  (c)  Concluding 
lectures  on  the  significance  of  religious  experience. 

13.  Ethics.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  by  permission  to  graduate  students.  Three  hours  a  week  for  a 
semester  or  for  a  year. 


134  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

19.  Constructive   Treatment   of   Problems   in   Metaphysics.    III. 

(Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 
Open  by  permission  to  graduate  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a 
semester  or  for  a  year. 

Miss  Calkins. 

Subject  in  1916-1917:  the  self  in  the  psychological  sciences  and 
in  philosophy. 

20.  Special  Study  of  Philosophical  Systems.    III.     (Not  given  in 

1918-1919.) 
Open  by  permission  to  graduate  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a 
semester  or  for  a  year. 

21.  Advanced  Logic. 

Open  by  permission  to  graduate  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
second  semester. 

Mr.  HoERNii;. 

A  comparative  study  of  selected  topics  from  modern  logic  and 
theory  of  knowledge,  with  special  reference  to  Bradley,  Bosanquet, 
Russell,  Husserl,  Meinong,  and  others.  The  topics  to  be  taken  up 
include:  Types  of  logical  theories;  symbols  and  meaning;  datum 
and  construction;  judgment  and  inference;  particulars  and  uni- 
versal; categorical  and  hypothetical  characters  of  judgments;  nega- 
tion; possibility;  truth  and  error. 


PHYSICS 

PROFESSOR:   LOUISE  SHERWOOD   McDOWELL,^   PH.D. 

Associate  Professor:  Grace  Evangeline  Davis,  M.A. 
Assistant  Professor:  Frances  Lowater,  Ph.D. 
Instructor:  Lucy  Wilson.  Ph.D. 
Laboratory  Assistants:  Minnie  Ruhmpohl,  B.A. 
Harriet  Porter,^^  B.A. 

.    Elementary  Physics.    I. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  McDowell,  Miss  Davis,  Miss  Wilson, 

Miss  Ruhmpohl,  Miss  Porter. 

This  course  is  for  beginners  and  presents  briefly  the  elementary 

principles  of  mechanics,  sound,  heat,  electricity,    and   light,  and 

their  simpler  applications.    The  course  is  conducted  by  means  of 

experimental  lectures  followed  by  laboratory  work. 

» Absent  on  Sabbatical  leave  in  Government  service  for  the  first  semester. 
»*  Appointed  for  first  semester  only. 


1918-19  Physics  135 

2.  General  Physics.    I. 

Open  to  students  who  have  met  the  admission  requirement.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lowater. 

This  course  is  intended  for  students  who  already  have  an  ele- 
mentary knowledge  of  the  phenomena  of  the  physical  world,  and 
presents  more  fully  than  course  i  the  fundamental  principles  and 
their  apphcations  in  everyday  life  and  in  the  other  natural  sciences . 
The  course  is  conducted  by  means  of  experimental  lectures  and 
laboratory  work. 

3.  Heat.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  j  and  by  special  permission 
to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  the  first  semester  of  course  2. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Davis. 

Thermometry,  calorimetry,  properties  of  vapors  and  gases,  lique- 
faction of  gases,  transmission  of  heat  and  its  appHcation  in  the 
heating  and  ventilation  of  buildings,  kinetic  theory,  elementary 
thermodynamics,  the  steam  engine,  the  automobile  engine. 

7.    Electricity.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  course  2  and  by  special 
permission  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  met  the  admission  require- 
ment.    Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Davis. 

Magnetic  and  electric  fields  of  force;  the  study  and  use  of  instru- 
ments for  the  measurement  of  current,  potential  difference,  resist- 
ance and  capacity;  electromagnetic  induction;  electrolytic  con- 
duction. 

5.    Light.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  7.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Lowater. 

The  wave  theory  and  its  application  to  the  phenomena  of  dis- 
persion, interference,  diffraction,  polarization,  propagation  in  crys- 
talline media;  theory  and  use  of  optical  instruments;  modern 
methods  of  illimiination;  the  history  of  optics. 

SJ.    Electric  Waves  and  Wireless  Telegraphy.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  7.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  McDowell 

X  Courses  8  and  9  are  ordinarily  given  in  alternate  years. 


136  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

9t.  Recent  De\t:lopments  in  Electricity.     III.     (Not  offered  in  191 8- 
1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  7.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester.  . 

Miss  McDowell. 

The  electrolytic  dissociation  theory;  conduction  through  gases, 
cathode  rays,  X-rays;   radio-activity;   the  electron  theory. 

6.    Meteorology.    II.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  i 
or  who  have  met  the  admission  requirement.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
second  semester. 

Miss  Davis. 

Text-book:  Milham's  Meteorology,  with  library  references.  The 
study  of  the  phenomena  of  the  weather, — air  pressure,  tempera- 
ture, progress  of  storms,  cold  waves,  winds,  clouds,  precipitation, — 
leading  to  an  understanding  of  the  principles  of  weather  prediction. 

10.  Mechanics  and  Properties  of  Matter.    III.     (Not  given  in  191 8- 

1919.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  2,  and  course  3  in 
Mathematics.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Lowater. 

Properties  of  solids,  liquids,  and  gases,  including  universal  gravi- 
tation, elasticity,  surface  tension,  capillarity,  diffusion,  osmosis. 

11.  Electricity  and  Magnetism.    Mathematical  Theory.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  7  and  also 
course  3  in  Mathematics.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  McDowell. 
The  work  is  based  upon  Starling's  Electricity  and  Magnetism  and 
free  use  is  made  of  the  Calculus. 

12.  Light.    Mathematical  Theory.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 


WAR  EMERGENCY  COURSES 

13.    Household  Physics.    II.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  course  2  and^  by 
special  permission,  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  met  the  admission 
requirement.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Lowater. 

The  course  consists  in  the  application  of  the  principles  of  mechan- 

X  Courses  8  and  9  are  ordinarily  given  in  alternate  years. 


1918-19  Reading  and  Speaking  137 

ics,  heat,  electricity,  and  illumination  to  typical  household  problems, 
machines,  and  labor-saving  devices. 
This  course  will  not  count  toward  a  major  in  Physics. 

14.  The  Automobile:  PiaNCiPLES  and  Construction.    II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  i  or  who  have 
met  the  admission  requirement.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wilson. 

Subject  matter:  the  internal  combustion  engine;  carburetors; 
systems  of  ignition,  starting,  and  transmission.  In  addition  to 
lectures  upon  the  theory,  demonstrations  will  be  given  of  the 
mechanisms  used  in  different  makes  of  cars.  So  far  as  possible 
opportunity  will  be  given  for  practice  in  the  detection  and  remedy 
of  engine  difficulties  and  defects  in  the  electrical  systems,  together 
with  instruction  in  the  care  of  storage  batteries,  etc. 

15.  Photography.    II.     (Not  given  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  i  in  Physics 
and  course  i  in  Chemistry  or  who  have  met  the  admission  requirements 
in  those  subjects.    One  hour  a  week  jor  a  year. 

Miss  Davis. 

Subject  matter:  the  camera;  the  lens,  classes,  defects  and  meth- 
ods of  testing;  shutters;  exposuremeters;  theory  and  practice  of 
development  of  plates  and  prints;  copying,  enlarging;  lantern 
shde  making;  X-ray  photography;  autochromes. 


READING  AND  SPEAKING 

Professor:  Malvina  Bennett,  M.A. 
Assistant  Professor:  Caroline  Angeline  Hardwicke. 

INSTRUCTOR:    EDITH    MARGARET    SMAILL. 

Introductory  Course  in  Vocal  Expression.    I. 
Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Hardwicke,  Miss  Smaill. 

Study  of  mental  action  in  its  effect  on  voice;  development  of  logical 
thinking. 

Body:  poise  and  bearing. 

Voice:  breathing,  articulation,  pronunciation. 

Reading  and  Speaking:  direct  address,  description,  story  telling. 

This  course  is  not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  or  are  tak- 
ing course  4. 


138  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

2.  Advanced  Course  in  Vocal  Expression.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  4.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bennett. 

Development  of  the  imagination  in  interpreting  literature. 
Body:  exercises  for  freeing  the  body  for  responsive  action. 
Voice:  exercises  for  freedom  and  purity  of  tone,  enunciation. 
Reading  and  Speaking:  current  events,  narrative  poetry,  stand- 
ard novels,  Browning  and  a  modern  play. 

3.  Interpretation  of  Shakespeare.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i,or  by  permission  to  stu- 
dents who  have  completed  course  4,  also  to  those  who  have  completed 
or  are  taking  English  Literature  q;  to  others  at  the  discretion  oj  the 
department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bennett. 

Analysis  of  characters;  reading;  scenes  selected  for  memorizing 
and  acting.     Three  plays  studied. 

4.  English  Speech.    I. 

Open  to  sophomores^  and  at  the  discretion  of  the  department  to  juniors 
and  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hardwicke. 

This  course  is  planned  primarily  for  students  who  need  special 
training  in  EngHsh  speech.  Its  aim  is  to  correct  carelessness  and 
provincialism  in  speech. 

Development  of  tone,  elemental  Enghsh  sounds,  standard  of 
pronunciation. 

Reading  and  speaking. 

5.    Elements  of  Public  Speaking.    I. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  taken  no  course  in  the  departjnent.  One 
hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hardwicke. 

The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  assist  students  intending  to  teach, 
by  criticism  on  voice,  speech,  and  manner.  Students  will  be  asked 
to  bring  for  criticism  papers  and  speeches  prepared  for  other  de- 
partments. 


1918-19  Spanish  139 

SPANISH 

Associate  Professor:  Alice  Huntington  Bushee,  M.A. 

INSTRUCTORS:  ANGELA  PALOMO,  B.A. 

Ada  May  Coe,  B.A. 

Note  i. — A  reading  knowledge  of  French  is  required  for  all  grade  III  work  and 
is  desirable  in  all  courses.     The  language  of  the  class  room  is  Spanish. 

Note  2.— In  accordance  with  the  expressed  wishes  of  the  Government  that  students 
be  ijrepared  not  only  in  the  language  but  also  in  the  life  and  conditions  existing  in 
Spain  and  Spanish  America,  the  advanced  courses  have  been  changed  somewhat 
for  the  year  1918-1019  to  meet  present  needs.  Course  7  will  base  its  work  on  the 
economic  conditions  in  Spanish  America  and  its  commercial  relations  with  the  U.  S. 
Course  6  will  devote  some  time  to  a  few  of  the  leading  problems  of  Spanish  America 
—as  the  Monroe  Doctrine,  the  Panama  Canal  and  relations  with  foreign  countries. 
Course  5  will  consider  timilar  problems  in  Spain.  Course  4  will  extend  its  "rapid 
reading"  to  manuscript  letters  and  current  newspapers  and  magazines. 

IJ.    Elementary  Course.    I. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bushee,  Miss  Palomo,  Miss  Coe. 
Grammar,  composition,   dictation,   conversation,  prepared  and 
sight  translation.     Short  lectures  are  given  occasionally  in  Spanish 
on  various  Uterary  subjects  to  train  the  ear  and  serve  as  an  intro- 
duction to  later  study. 

2.    Intermediate  Course,    I. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  or  an  equivalent.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bushee,  Miss  Palomo. 
Grammar,  composition,  themes,  lectures,  reading  of  typical  mod- 
em novels  and  selections  from  Don  Quijole. 

4.    Spanish  Literature  in  the  Eighteenth  and  Nineteenth  Cen- 
turies.   II. 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Bushee. 
The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  the  student  a  general  idea  of 
Spanish  hterature  after  the  Golden  Age:  the  French  influence,  Roman- 
ticism, and  the  noted  authors  of  the  latter  part  of  the  nineteenth 
century.     This  includes  the  rapid  reading  of  both  prose  and  poetry. 

6.    Modern  Spanish  American  Literature.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  cotMse2.     Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Coe. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  show  the  influences  at  work  in  the 
making  of  Spanish  American  Literature  with  the  reaction  espe- 
cially in  poetry  on  the  literature  of  Spain.  Lectures  will  be  given 
on  the  pohtical  and  social  conditions  of  the  leading  countries. 

X  Course  i,  if  taken  in  the  senior  year,  may  not  count  within  the  minimum  number  of 
hours  prescribed  for  a  degree. 


140  Courses  or  Instruction  1918-19 

7.    Advanced  Convisisation  and  Composition.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2.    One  hour  a  week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Palomo. 
Three  or  four  twentieth  century  plays  will  form  the  basis  for  this 
course  and  will  give  opportunity  for  oral  discussion  and  written 
reports  on  life  in  contemporary  Spain. 

3.    Drama  of  the  Golden  Age.    III.     (Not  ofifered  in  1918-1919.) 

Ope7i  to  students  who  have  completed  course  4.     Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Bushee. 
This  course  will  be  introduced  by  a  short  general  outHne  of  the 
historical  and  Kterary  influences  at  work  during  the  period.  Char- 
acteristic dramas  of  Lope  de  Vega,  Alarc6n,  Tirso  de  Molina,  and 
Calder6n  will  be  studied  as  representative  of  the  nation's  thought 
and  ideals  at  the  time. 

6.    The  Spanish  Novel.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  4.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Bushee. 

The  first  semester  will  be  devoted  to  a  general  study  of  the  novel 

before   1650   (especially  the  caballeresca,  picaresca,  and  pastoral) 

and  its  relation  to  other  countries.    During  the  second  semester 

Don  Quijote  will  be  studied. 

ZOOLOGY  AND  PHYSIOLOGY 

PROFESSORS:    ALICE    ROBERTSON, 3    Ph.D. 

Marian  Elizabeth   Hubbard,  B.S. 
Caroline   Burling  Thompson, 7  Ph.D. 
Associate  Professor:  Julia  Eleanor  Moody,  Ph.D. 

Lecturer:  Herbert  Wilbur  Rand, is  C.E.,   Ph.D. 
instructors:  mary  edith  pinney,  ph.d. 

Margaret  Alger  Hayden,  M.A. 
Mary  Maud  Bell,  B.A. 
Curator  :  Albert  Pitts  Morse. 
Laboratory  Assistant  :  Ruth  Elizabeth  Crosby,  B.A. 

1.    The  Biology  of  Animals.    I. 

Open  to  freshmen  and  sophomores.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hubbard,  Miss  Pinney,  Miss  Hayden,  Miss  Bell. 

This  course  serves  as  an  introduction  to  the  general  principles  of 
Zoology.     The  student  becomes  famihar  with  a  series  of  types  of 

•  Absent  on  Sabbatical  leave. 

'  Absent  on  leave  for  the  second  semester. 

»i  Appointed  for  the  second  semester  only. 


1918-19  Zoology  and  Physiology  141 

invertebrates,  and  with  one  vertebrate,  the   frog.     Emphasis  is  laid 
upon  the  doctrine  of  evolution. 
Lectures,  laboratory  and  field  work. 

2.    Vertebrate  Zoology.     II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors,  and  to  sophomores  who  have  completed 
course  i.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moody,  Miss  Pinney. 

A  comparative  study  of  vertebrate  types  with  particular  reference 
to  the  history  of  the  human  body.  Lectures  on  development, 
structure,  classification  and  geographical  distribution. 

5.  Natural  History  of  Animals.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  i  and  2,  and,  with  the 
approval  oj  the  head  of  the  department,  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have 
completed  course  i  or  2.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Robertson. 

The  study  of  the  hving  organism  by  investigation  of  structure, 
function,  and  behavior  from  the  point  of  view  of  its  relations  to  its 
environment,  organic  and  inorganic,  the  interdependence  of  organ- 
ism, their  behavior,  adaptations,  and  organic  responses.  Especially 
valuable  to  those  intending  to  teach  Zoology. 

6.  Theoretical  Zoology.    III. 

Open,  with  the  advice  of  the  head  of  the  department,  to  seniors  who 
have  completed  course  2  and  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  one  other 
course  of  grade  III.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Thompson,  Mr.  Rand. 

Theoretical  problems  of  biology.  Lectures  on  evolution,  varia- 
tion, heredity,  and  eugenics;  discussion  of  these,  together  with 
related  facts,  and  current  biological  theories. 

7.  Insects.    III.     (Not  offered  in  1918-1919.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  i  and  2,  and  with  the 
approval  of  the  head  of  the  department,  to  juniors  and  seniors  who 
have  completed  course  i  or  2.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 

semester. 

Miss  Thompson. 

Lectures,  laboratory,  and  field  work  with  reference  to  the  dif- 
ferent groups  of  insects  and  especially  the  commoner  forms.  Pri- 
marily to  those  intending  to  teach  Zoology. 

8.  Embryology  and  Cell  Structure.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  2. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Thompson,  Mr.  Rand. 


142  Courses  of  Instruction  1918-19 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work  upon  the  structure  of  animal 
cells  and  tissues,  the  embryology  of  the  chick  and  certain  other 
vertebrates.  Instruction  in  technique  forms  a  part  of  the  labora- 
tory work. 

10.  Physiology.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  2. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hayden. 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work  deahng  with  experimental  and 
theoretical  questions  in  human  physiology.  Each  student  arranges 
and  uses  the  apparatus  necessary  for  almost  aU  experiments;  the 
instructor,  however,  performs  some  of  the  more  difficult  ones, 
assisted  in  turn  by  the  different  members  of  the  class. 

11.  Anatomy. 

Open  only  to  first-year  special  students  in  the  Department  of  Hygiene. 
Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moody. 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work  upon  the  anatomy  of  the  muscles, 
viscera,  circulatory  and  nervous  systems.     Elements  of  histology. 


1918-19  Examinations  143 


COLLEGE  EXAMINATIONS 

An  examination  period  occurs  at  the  end  of  each  semester. 
At  these  periods,  and  also  during  the  days  of  the  admission 
examinations  in  September,  examinations  for  the  removal  of 
conditions  and  deficiencies  and  for  advanced  standing  may 
be  taken. 

A  student  who  wishes  to  take  an  examination  upon  a  course  which  is 
not  a  part  of  her  approved  schedule  for  the  year,  must  apply  to  the  Dean 
for  the  requisite  card  of  admission  to  the  examination.  The  last  day  for 
receiving  appHcations  for  such  cards  is  for  the  September  examinations, 
September  first;  for  the  mid-year  examinations,  January  first;  for  the  June 
examinations,  May  fifteenth. 

N.  B.  Examinations  for  the  removal  of  conditions  and  deficiencies 
excepted,  no  student  can  be  admitted  to  examination  upon  a  course  which 
is  not  a  part  of  her  approved  schedule  for  the  year  without  permission 
both  from  the  Head  of  the  Department  concerned  and  the  Dean  of  the 
College.  No  sttident,  therefore,  should  enter  upon  preparation  for  such  an 
examination  until  her  plan  has  been  approved  by  both  of  the  above  named 
officers. 

2!^="  The  College  reserves  the  right  to  require  the  with- 
drawal of  students  whose  scholarship  is  not  satisfactory, 
and  of  those  who  for  any  other  reason  are  regarded  as  not 
in  accord  with  the  ideals  and  standards  which  the  College 
seeks  to  maintain. 

DEGREES 

The  following  degrees  are  conferred  by  the  Trustees  upon 
recommendation  of  the  Academic  Council: — 
Bachelor  of  Arts. 
Master  of  Arts. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE  B.A.  DEGREE 

Every  candidate  for  the  B.A.  degree  must  complete  before 
graduation  the  equivalent  of  fifty-nine  hours.  Since  1896, 
two  grades  in  work  which  reaches  the  passing  mark  have 
been  distinguished:  one  ''Passed'';  the  other,  ''Passed  with 
Credit:'  In  order  to  be  recommended  for  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Arts  a  student  must  have  ''passed  with  credit" 
in  not  less  than  sk  hours  in  the  first  semester  of  the  freshman 


/ 


144  Degrees  191?-19 

year  and  in  not  less  than  nine  hours  in  each  succeeding  semester. 
Deficiency  of  such  work  in  any  semester  may  be  made  good  in 
accordance  with  regulations  adopted  by  the  Faculty.  First- 
year  French  and  first-year  German  may  not  both  be  counted 
among  the  fifty-nine  hours.  Neither  first-year  French  nor  first- 
year  German  may  be  so  counted  if  taken  after  the  sophomore 
year.  Second-year  French,  second-year  German,  first-year 
Italian  and  first- year  Spanish  may  not  be  counted  among  the 
fifty-nine  hours,  if  taken  after  the  junior  year.  Of  the  fifty- 
nine  hours  required  for  the  B.A.  degree,  a  certain  number  is 
prescribed,  the  rest  elective. 

I.  Prescribed.  The  following  subjects  are  required  as 
specified: — 

Biblical  History 4^  hours 

English  Composition 2,  or  4^* 

Mathematics .3 

Language  (unless  a  third  language  has  been 

presented  for  admission)     ....  3 
Natural  Science  (if  not  presented  for  admis- 

sion) 3 

A  Second  Natural  Science      ....  3        " 

Philosophy 3         " 

Hygiene sf      " 

24>^  or  26  hours 

Of  the  required  subjects,  Mathematics  must  be  taken  in  the  freshman 
year;  Hygiene  one  and  one-half  hours  in  the  freshman  year,  and  one-half 
hour  in  the  sophomore  year;  BibUcal  History,  three  three-hour  semester 
courses  in  the  sophomore  and  the  junior  years;  Enghsh  Composition  three 
hours  per  week  in  the  freshman  year.*  Of  the  natural  sciences,  one  must 
be  taken  before  the  junior  year;  either  a  language  or  a  science  must  be  taken 
in  the  freshman  year  and  both  if  neither  a  third  language  nor  a  science 
is  offered  for  admission.  Philosophy  should  ordinarily  be  taken  before  the 
senior  year. 

II.  Elective.  All  courses  are  classified  in  Grades  I,  II, 
III;  Grade  I  including  elementary  courses  and  Grade  III 
the  most  advanced  courses.  All  of  the  fifty-nine  hours  not 
indicated  in  the  above  are  elective,  subject  to  the  approval 
of  the  Faculty. 

*  If  a  student  faik  to  pass  with  credit  in  the  second  semester  of  English  Composition  I, 
she  will  be  required  to  take  an  additional  semester  course  in  the  sophomore  year. 

t  One  hour  of  this  requirement  is  met  by  a  one-hour  course  in  Hygiene  in  the  freshman 
year;  the  second  hour  is  met  by  four  periods  in  practical  work,  two  periods  per  week  in  the 
freshman  year  and  two  in  the  sophomore  year. 


1918-19  Degrees  145 

Moreover  every  candidate  for  the  B.A.  degree  must  show  before  gradua- 
tion that  she  has  completed  either 

(i)  nine  hours  in  each  of  two  departments, 

or 
(2)  twelve  hours  in  one  department  and  six  hours  in  a  second  de- 
partment. 

Of  the  courses  offered  to  fulfill  this  requirement,  at  least  one  full  course 
of  Grade  III  must  be  taken  in  the  senior  year.  The  nine-hour  group  must 
consist  of  at  least  six  hours  above  Grade  I,  three  hours  of  which  must  be  of 
Grade  III.  The  twelve-hour  group  must  consist  of  at  least  nine  hours 
above  Grade  I,  six  hours  of  which  must  be  of  Grade  III.  The  six-hour  group 
must  include  at  least  three  hours  above  Grade  I. 

These  requirements  are  met  in  the  freshman  year  as  fol- 
lows:— 

Mathematics  i  with  14  or  15         .       .       .  3      hours 

English  Composition  i 3        " 

Hygiene  21  and  29 lyi     *' 

Electives 9        ** 

Total  i6>^  hours 

These  electives  must  be  chosen  in  accordance  with  the  prerequisites  given 

in  the  department  statements  from  the  list  of  courses  named  below,  subject 

to  the  following  restrictions: — 

(i)  One  elective  must  be  a  science  (if  no  science  is  offered  for  admission),  and  the  second 
a  language  (if  only  two  foreign  languages  are  offered  for  admission). 

(2)  One  elective  must  be  chosen  from  courses  in  classics,  history,  or  science. 

(3)  Only  one  of  the  following  subjects  may  be  elected:  Art,  Musical  Theory,  Engbsh 
Literature. 

(4)  French  i  and  German  i  may  not  both  be  elected. 

Language  Sciences  Other  Subjects 

Greek  I,  13,  14  Astronomy  i  Art  12 

Latin  i  Botany  5  English  Literature  i 

German  i,  2,  5  and  10  Chemistry  i,  4  History  i  and  2,  3,  10 

French  i,  2,  3  and  5  Geology  8  Musical  Theory  15 

Italian  i  Physics  i,  2 

Spanish  i,  2  Zoology  i 

If  i6>^  hours  are  satisfactorily  completed  in  the  freshman  year,  the  normal 
program  for  the  remaining  years  would  be  as  follows: — 

Sophomore  year iSJ^  liours 

Junior  year i5 

Senior  year 12 

If  16K  hours  are  not  completed  in  the  freshman  year,  a  student  may  by 
special  permission  carry  extra  hours  in  the  remaining  years. 

Elective  courses  must  be  chosen  with  great  care  so  that  changes  mil  not  be 
necessary.  Students  are  held  responsible  for  observing  the  requirements  for  the 
degree  and  the  proper  sequence  of  courses. 

All  requests  for  changes  of  elective  courses  should  be  sent  to  the  Dean  of 
the  CoUege  before  September  15th.  In  general,  no  changes  may  be  made 
after  the  beginning  of  the  year. 


/ 


146  Expenses  1918-19 


REQUIREMENTS   FOR  THE   M.A.   DEGREE 

The  work  required  of  a  candidate  for  the  M.A.  degree  is 
equivalent  to  fifteen  hours  of  college  work,  and  includes  no 
fewer  than  nine  nor  more  than  twelve  hours  of  regular  class 
work.  A  thesis,  or  a  report  or  reports,  based  on  independent 
work  will  be  required.  The  student  should  choose  one  major 
subject  and  not  more  than  one  minor  subject,  which  should 
be  related  to  the  major;  or  she  may,  if  she  prefers,  do  all 
her  work  in  one  subject.  A  candidate  for  the  M.A.  degree 
is  required  to  have  a  reading  knowledge  of  French  and  of 
German. 

One  year  of  graduate  work  is  required  of  all  candidates  for 
the  M.A.  degree,  but  two  or  more  years  are  usually  needed 
for  the  completion  of  the  work. 

Graduates  of  Wellesley  College  may  do  all  the  work  in 
non-residence,  under  conditions  defined  in  the  Graduate 
Circular. 

One  year  m  residence  is  required  of  all  other  candidates  for 
the  degree. 

Information  regarding  thesis,  final  examinations,  etc.,  will 
be  found  in  the  Graduate  Circular  which  will  be  sent  on  ap- 
plication to  the  College  Recorder. 

EXPENSES 

TUITION 

The  charge  for  tuition  to  all  students,  whether  living  in 
college  buildings  or  not,  is  $175  a  year.  Tuition  is  payable 
in  advance  and  is  not  subject  to  return  or  deduction. 

Students  who  are  permitted  to  take  seven  hours  or  less  of  class-room  work 
a  week,  and  who  do  not  live  in  college  buildings,  pay  tuition  by  the  course  as 
follows:  for  a  one-hour  course,  $20;  a  two-hour  course,  $40;  a  three-hour 
course,  $60.  Payment  is  due  at  the  beginning  of  the  year.  No  charge  is 
made  for  tuition  in  Biblical  History. 

TUITION  AND  OTHER   CHARGES   IN  DEPARTMENT 
OF  MUSIC 

For  instruction  for  the  college  year  in  Pianoforte,  Organ, 

Violin,  or  Vocal  Music,  two  lessons  a  week    .       .       .         ,$100 

One  lesson  a  week 50 

(Lessons  thirty  minutes  in  length.) 


1918-19  Expenses  147 

For  use  of  the  Pianoforte,  one  period  daily  for  the  college  year  .  $10 

For  two  and  three  periods  daily,  in  proportion. 

For  use  of  the  Pipe  Organ  in  Music  Hall,  one  period  daily,  for 

the  college  year i^ 

For  two  or  three  periods  daily,  in  proportion. 

Special  arrangements  may  be  made  for  lessons  on  instruments  not  men- 
tioned above. 

Tuition  in  music  must  always  be  paid  in  advance  and  is  not  subject  to 
return  or  deduction. 

MAINTENANCE  FEE 

(i)  For  all  undergraduate  students  who  room  or  board  in 
college  houses  the  Maintenance  Fee  will  be  $100  payable  in 
two  instalments,  $50  in  September  as  heretofore,  and  $50  in 
February,  before  the  beginning  of  the  second  semester. 

(2)  For  all  students,  graduate  and  undergraduate,  who  neither 
room  nor  board  in  college  houses  the  Maintenance  Fee  will  be 
$50,  payable  in  September. 

FIXED  TIMES  AND  AMOUNTS  OF  PAYMENTS 

/.    Students  lodged  in  college  buildings. 

These  students  make  payments  as  follows: — 

September  (at  the  opening  of  college)        .       .       .       .         $325 

This  sum  includes  $iio  on  account  of  tuition,  $165  on  account  of 
board  and  lodging,  and  $50  on  account  of  maintenance  fee. 

February  (before  the  beginning  of  the  second  semester)  .  275 

This  sum  includes  $65,  the  balance  of  tuition  payment,  $160  the 
balance  due  for  board  and  lodging,  and  $50  the  balance  due  for  maintenance 
fee. 

Total  of  these  payments  for  the  year  ....         $600 

The  charge  for  board  begins  at  the  opening  of  residence  halls  (see  page  5) 
and  students  are  not  permitted  to  occupy  rooms  before  that  time. 

//.     Students  not  lodged  in  college  buildings. 

a.  Students  who  take  their  meals  in  college  buildings  but 
lodge  in  private  houses  make  payments  as  follows: — 

September  (at  the  opening  of  college)         ....         $260 
This  sum  includes  $110  on  account  of  tuition,  $100  on  account  of 
board,  and  $50  on  accoimt  of  maintenance  fee. 

February  (before  the  beginning  of  the  second  semester).  215 

This  sum  includes  $65,  the  balance  of  tuition  payment,  $100,  the 
balance  due  for  board  and  $50  the  balance  due  for  maintenance  fee. 

Total  of  these  payments  for  the  year       ....  $475 


148  Fees  1918-19 

These  students  find  rooms  in  the  village  of  Wellesley.  Pa3Tnent  is  made 
to  the  head  of  the  house  at  such  rates  and  times  as  the  parties  to  the  arrange- 
ment may  agree  upon.  Information  regarding  boarding  places  may  be 
obtained  by  addressing  the  Registrar. 

b.  Students  who  neither  lodge  nor  board  in  college  build- 
ings make  payment  for  tuition  and  maintenance  fee  as 
follows: — 

September  (at  the  opening  of  college)         .       .       .       .         $i6o 
February  (before  the  beginning  of  the  second  semester)  .  65 

Total  of  these  payments  for  the  year        .        .        .        .         $225 

These  students  find  room  and  board  in  the  village  of  Wellesley.  Payment 
is  made  to  the  head  of  the  house  at  such  rates  and  times  as  the  parties  to 
the  arrangement  may  agree  upon.  Information  regarding  boarding  places 
may  be  obtained  by  addressing  the  Registrar. 

^f^^  Payments  must  be  made  before  the  student  can  take  her 
place  in  the  class  room.  No  exception  will  be  made  to  this  rule 
without  a  written  permission  from  the  Treasurer. 

W^^Checks  or  money  orders  should  be  made  payable  to  Welles- 
ley  College. 

FEES 
/.     Undergraduate. 

An  application  fee  of  $10  is  required  from  all  candidates 
for  admission,  and  no  appUcation  is  recorded  until  the  fee  is 
received  (see  page  149).  The  same  fee  is  required  from  all 
students  in  college  who  are  intending  to  return  for  the  fol- 
lowing year,  and  from  all  former  students  who  apply  for  re- 
admission.  If  the  student  enters  college,  the  amount  of  the 
appHcation  fee  is  deducted  from  the  first  tuition  bill  after 
entrance.  If  formal  notice  of  withdrawal  is  received  at  the 
College  before  August  15  th  of  the  year  for  which  the  appUca- 
tion is  made,  the  fee  will  be  refunded.  In  all  other  cases 
it  is  forfeited  to  the  College.  A  student  who  postpones  en- 
trance until  the  year  following  the  one  for  which  she  first 
apphed  may  transfer  her  application  fee.  But  a  fee  so  trans- 
ferred will  not  be  refunded  if  the  student  later  decides  to  with- 
draw, unless  the  request  for  the  transfer  was  received  within 
the  specified  time.  Requests  for  second  transfers  are  some- 
times granted,  but  a  fee  transferred  a  second  time  will  not  be 
refunded  under  any  circumstances. 

An  additional  charge  is  made  for  materials  and  the  use  of 
apparatus  in  the  following  laboratory  courses:    $5  for  each 


1918-19  Residence  149 

laboratory  course  in  Astronomy,  Botany,  Chemistry,  Geol- 
ogy, Physics,  Zoology;  $5  each  for  course  13  in  Hygiene  and 
for  courses  9  and  10  in  Musical  Theory;  $2.50  each  for  the 
half  courses  11  and  12  in  Musical  Theory;  $2  each  for  the 
studio  courses  in  Art,  and  $1  each  for  other  Art  courses,  $2 
being  the  maximum  charge  for  Art  fees  to  any  student.  These 
fees  are  not  subject  to  refund.  Every  student  should  also 
reckon  on  the  expenditure  of  $10  to  $25  annually  for  the 
purchase  of  books.  At  the  time  of  taking  the  B.A.  degree  a 
diploma  fee  of  $5  is  charged. 

II.    Graduate, 

A  matriculation  fee  of  $5  is  payable  when  a  student  is  ac- 
cepted as  a  candidate  for  the  Master's  degree.  The  amount 
of  this  fee  will  be  deducted  from  the  diploma  fee  of  $25  pay- 
able when  the  degree  is  received. 

RESIDENCE 

The  residence  halls  belonging  to  the  College  and  situated 
within  the  Hmits  of  the  campus  are  Stone  Hall,  Norumbega, 
Freeman,  Wood,  Wilder,  Fiske,  Pomeroy,  Cazenove,  Beebe, 
Shafer,  Tower  Court,  Claflin  Hall,  and  The  Homestead.  Eliot 
and  Washington  Houses,  also  the  property  of  the  College,  and 
nine  houses  leased  to  the  College  for  dormitory  purposes  in  order 
to  meet  temporary  needs,  are  situated  outside  and  immediately 
adjoining  the  college  grounds.  All  these  houses  are  under  the 
direction  of  officers  appointed  by  the  College.  All  the  rooms 
are  furnished,  and  suppHed  with  electric  lights. 

W^  A  student  vacating  a  room  before  the  close  of  the  year, 
or  relinquishing  a  room  reserved  for  her  at  the  beginning  of 
the  year,  will  be  charged  for  board  until  the  vacancy  has  been 
filled  by  an  incoming  student.  Therefore,  notice  of  inten- 
tion to  withdraw  should  be  given  at  the  earhest  possible  mo- 
ment.    No  deduction  is  made  for  absences  during  the  year. 

All  applications  for  rooms  in  college  buildings  take  the 
date  at  which  the  appUcation  fee  is  received.  (See  pages  25 
and  148.) 

Until  May  first,  but  not  after  that  date,  applications  from 
former  students  will  take  precedence  of  those  of  new  students 
in  the  matter  of  rooms. 

^^No  student  can  receive  a  diploma  until  a  satisfactory 
settlement  of  all  her  college  dues  has  been  made. 


150  Fellowships  and  Scholarships  1918-19 


HEALTH 

The  resident  physician,  Katharine  P.  Raymond,  B.S., 
M.D.,  together  with  the  Professor  of  Hygiene,  the  Director 
of  Halls  of  Residence,  and  the  President  and  the  Dean  of  the 
College,  ex  officio^  constitute  a  board  of  health  to  which  all 
matters  affecting  the  health  of  students  are  referred.  Simp- 
son Cottage  is  maintained  as  an  infirmary  under  the  charge 
of  Dr.  Raymond.  Two  trained  nurses  are  in  constant  attend- 
ance. The  services  of  the  Resident  Physician  for  consulta- 
tion and  treatment  are  free  to  all  students. 


FELLOWSHIPS  AND  SCHOLARSHIPS 

A.     FOR  GRADUATES 

The  Alice  Freeman  Palmer  Fellowship,  yielding  an 
income  of  about  $i,ooo,  was  founded  in  1903,  by  Mrs.  David 
P.  Kimball. 

The  holder  of  this  Fellowship  must  be  a  graduate  of  Wellesley  College  or 
some  other  American  College  of  approved  standing,  a  young  woman  of  good 
health,  not  more  than  twenty-six  years  of  age  at  the  time  of  her  appoint- 
ment, unmarried  throughout  the  whole  of  her  tenure,  and  as  free  as  possible 
from  other  responsibiUties.  The  same  person  will  not  be  eUgible  to  the 
Fellowship  for  more  than  two  years. 

The  Fellowship  may  be  used  for  study  abroad,  for  study  at  any  American 
college  or  university,  or  privately  for  independent  research.  Several  times 
during  the  period  of  tenure  the  holder  of  the  Fellowship  must  furnish  evi- 
dence that  it  is  used  for  purposes  of  serious  study  and  not  for  general  cul- 
ture; and  within  three  years  from  entrance  on  the  Fellowship  she  must  pre- 
sent to  the  faculty  a  thesis  embodying  the  results  of  the  research  carried  on 
during  the  period  of  tenure. 

AppUcations  for  this  Fellowship  should  be  received  by  the  President  of 
Wellesley  College  not  later  than  February  first  of  the  academic  year  pre- 
ceding that  for  w^hich  the  Fellowship  is  asked. 

Holders  of  this  Fellowship 
1904-1Q05 — Lehmann,  Harriet  (Mrs.  Kitchin),  Biology. 

B.A.  Ripon  College,  1902;  M.A.  Northwestern  University,  1903;  Graduate 
Student  Radcliffe  College,  1904-1905. 

1905-1906 — Andrus,  Grace  Mead  (Mrs.  de  Laguna),  Philosophy. 

B.A.  Cornell  University,  1903;  Graduate  Student  Cornell  University,  1903-1905. 
Declined  the  Fellowship,  which  was  awarded  to 

Gardiner,  Elizabeth  Manning  (Mrs.  Whitmore),  Art. 

B.A.  Radchfife  College,  1901;  M.A.  Wellesley  College,  1905;  Student  American 
School  of  Classical  Studies  in  Rome,  1905-1907;  American  School  of  Classical 
Studies  in  Athens,  1907-1908;  Instructor  in  Art,  Wellesley  College,  1908-1910; 
Assistant  to  Director,  Worcester  Art  Museum,  1909-1913. 


1918-19  Fellowships  and  Scholarships  151 

1906-1907-J0HNSON,  Anna  (Mrs.  Pell)  Mathematics. 

B. A.  University  of  South  Dakota,  1903;  M.S.  University  of  Iowa,  1904;  M.A. 
Radchffe  College,  1905;  Graduate  Student  Radcliffe  College,  1905-1906;  Student 
University  of  Gottingen,  1906-1907,  1908;  Instructor  in  Mathematics,  University 
of  South  Dakota,  1907;  Ph.D.  University  of  Chicago,  1910;  Instructor  in  Mathe- 
matics, 1911-1914,  and  Associate  Professor,  1914-1918,  Mt.  Holyoke  College- 
Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics,  Bryn  Mawr   College,    1918- 

1907-1908 — Cook,  Helen  Dodd  (Mrs.  Vincent),  Philosophy. 

B.A.  Wellesley  College,  1905;  M.A.  1907;  Fellow  in  Philosophy  and  Psycholog>'] 
Wellesley  College,  1906-1907;  Student  at  University  of  Wurzburg,  1907-1909; 
Ph.D.  University  of  WUrzburg,  1909;  Instructor  in  Psychology,  Wellesley  College, 
1909-1913;  Instructor  in  Psychology,  Montclair  Normal  School,  1913-1916. 

1908-1909 — Stone,  Isabelle,  Greek. 

B.A.  Wellesley  College,  1905;  Graduate  Student  Cornell  University,  190.5-1908; 
Ph.D.  Cornell  University,  1908;  Student  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  in 
Athens,  1908-1909;  Reader  in  Greek,  Bryn  Mawr  College,  second  semester,  1909- 
1910;  Head  of  Greek  and  Latin  Departments,  Woman's  College  of  Alabama,  first 
semester,  1910-1911. 

1909-1910 — Schopperle,  Gertrxjde,  Comparative  Literature. 

B.A.  Wellesley  College,  1903;  M.A.  1905;  Graduate  Student  Radciiffe  College, 
1905-1907;  Student  University  of  Munich,  1907-1908;  University  of  Paris,  1908- 
1911;  Ph.D.  Radciiffe  College,  1909;  Instructor  in  English,  University  of  Illinois, 
1911-1912;  Instructor  in  German,  New  York  University,  1912-1913;  Instructor 
in  English,  1913-1914,  and  Associate  in  English,  1914 ,  University  of  Illinois. 

1910-1911 — HiBBARD,  Laura  Alandis,  English  Literature. 

B.A.  Wellesley  College,  1905;  M.A.  1908;  Graduate  Student  University  of  Chi- 
cago, 1909-1911;  Ph.D.  University  of  Chicago,  1916;  Instructor  in  English  Liter- 
ature, Mt.  Holyoke  College,  1908-1916;  Instructor  in  English  Literature,  1916-1917, 
and  Associate  Professor,  1917 ,  Wellesley  College. 

1911-1912 — Barbour,  Violet,  History. 
B.A.  Cornell  University,  1906;  M.A.  1909;  Graduate  Scholar  in  History,  Cornell 
University,  1908-1909;  carrying  on  historical  research  in  England,  France,  and  Hol- 
land, 1911-1913;    Ph.D.  Cornell  University,  1914;  Instructor  in  History,  1914 , 

Vassar  College. 

1912-1913— Coats,  Bessie  Marion,  Philosophy. 

B.A.  Vassar  College,  1907;  Mary  E.  Ives  Fellow,  Yale  University,  1910-1911; 
Graduate  Student  Radciiffe  College,  1911-1915;  M.A.  Radciiffe  College,  1912; 
Principal  of  Ferry  Hall,  Lake  Forest,  111.,  1915-1918;  Principal  of  Bradford 
Academy,  Bradford,  Mass.,  1918 . 

1913-1914 — Stocking,  Ruth,  Zoology. 
B.A.  Goucher  College,  1910;  Graduate  Student  Goucher  College  and  Johns  Hop- 
kins University,  1910-1911;  Graduate  Student  Bryn  Mawr  College,  1911-1912; 
University  Fellow  in  Zoology,  Johns  Hopkins  University,  1912-1913;  Johns  Hopkins 
University,  1913-1914;  Ph.D.  Johns  Hopkins  University,  1915;  Professor  of  Biology, 
Agnes  Scott  College,  1915-1916;  Professor  of  Biology,  Wells  College,  1916 . 

1914-191S— HoLDEN,  Ruth,  Botany. 

B.A.  Radciiffe  College,  1911;  M.A.  Radciiffe  College,  1912;  Graduate  Student 
Radciiffe  College,  1912-1913;  Student  in  Botany  School,  Cambridge  University, 
England,  1913.     Died  April  23,  1917. 

191S-1916 — Hazlett,  Olive  Clio,  Mathematics. 

B.A.  Radciiffe  College,  191 2;  M.S.  University  of  Chicago,  1913;  Graduate  Student 
and  Fellow,  University  of  Chicago,  1912-1915;  Holder  of  Fellovvship  of  the  Boston 
Branch  of  the  Association  of  Collegiate  Alumnae,  1914-1915;  Ph.D.  University  of 
Chicago,  1915;  Student  at  Radciiffe  College,  1915-1916;  Associate  in  Mathematics, 
Brjm  Mawr  Collci^'e,  1916-1918;  Instructor  in  Mathematics,  Mt.  Holyoke  College, 
1918— , 

1916-1917 — Hazlett,  Olive  Clio,  _  Mathematics. 

Declined  the  Fellowship  which  was  awarded  to 

Dunn,  Grace  Adelaide.  Botany. 

Ph.B.  Hamline  University,  1909;  M.A.  Johns  Hopkins  University,  1914;  Ph.D. 
Johns  Hopkins  University,  1915. 


152  Fellowships  and  Scholarships  1918-19 

1917-1018 — Hemp L,  HitDA  (Mrs.  Heller),  _  Bacleriology. 

B.A.  Leland  Stanford,  Jr.,  University,  1914;  M.S.  University  of  Michigan,  1915: 
Holder  of  the  Scandinavian-Arnerican  Fellowship,  1915-1916;  Holder  of  the  Eu- 
ropean Fellowship  of  the  Association  of  Collegiate  Alumnae,  1916-1917.  Student 
at  University  of  California,  1917-1918. 

1918-1919 — Cohen,  Teresa, 

B.A.  Goucher  College,  1912;  M.A.  Johns  Hopkins  University,  1915;  Ph.D.  Johns 
Hopkins  University,  1918. 

Thirty  Graduate  Scholarships  to  the  value  of  $175 
A  YEAR,  the  equivalent  of  one  year's  tuition,  have  been  estab- 
Ushed  for  the  benefit  of  approved  candidates  for  the  M.A. 
degree  in  residence  at  Wellesley.  AppHcations  for  these 
scholarships  should  be  addressed  to  the  College  Recorder, 
Wellesley  College,  Wellesley,  Mass. 

Scholarships  in  Schools  of  Classical  Study. — Student- 
ships in  the  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  in  Athens, 
and  the  American  Academy  in  Rome,  are  open  to  graduates 
and  graduate  students  of  Wellesley  College  who  have  done 
sufficient  work  in  the  classics  to  meet  the  admission  require- 
ments. The  object  of  these  schools  is  to  afford  opportunity 
for  the  study  of  classical  hterature,  art,  and  antiquities,  to 
aid  in  original  research  in  these  subjects,  and  to  conduct  the 
exploration  and  excavation  of  classical  sites. 

The  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  in  Athens. — The  school  year 
extends  from  October  first  to  June  first.  The  regulations  for  admission  are 
as  follows:  "Bachelors  of  Arts  of  co-operating  colleges,  and  all  Bachelors 
of  Arts  who  have  studied  at  one  of  these  colleges  as  candidates  for  a  higher 
degree,  shall  be  admitted  to  membership  in  the  School  on  presenting  to  the 
Committee  a  certificate  from  the  classical  department  of  the  college  at  which 
they  have  last  studied,  stating  that  they  are  competent  to  pursue  an  inde- 
pendent course  of  study  at  x\thens  under  the  advice  of  the  Director.  Mem- 
bers of  the  school  are  subject  to  no  charge  for  tuition."  *  Further  informa- 
tion can  be  had  by  application  to  Professor  Chapin  or  Professor  Walton, 
who  represent  Wellesley  College  upon  the  Managing  Committee  of  the 
School. 

The  American  Academy  in  Rome,  School  oj  Classical  Studies. — The  Amer- 
ican School  of  Classical  Studies  is  now  one  of  the  consolidated  schools  of 
the  American  Academy  in  Rome.  The  school  year  extends  from  the  fif- 
teenth of  October  to  the  fifteenth  of  June.  It  is  hoped  that  a  summer  ses- 
sion also  for  teachers  of  the  classics  may  be  arranged.  For  information  in 
regard  to  the  work  of  the  School  and  the  requirements  for  admission,  appHca- 
tion  may  be  made  to  Professor  Hawes. 

•  A  few  Fellowships  are  awarded  on  competitive  examination. 


1918-19  Fellowships  and  Scholarships  153 

Scholarships  in  the  Marine  Biological  Laboratory 
AT  Wood's  Hole*. — Wellesley  College  offers  annually  two 
scholarships  for  study  at  this  laboratory.  The  laboratory 
is  open  to  investigators  for  the  whole  year.  During  the  sum- 
mer three  courses  in  Zoology  and  two  in  Botany  are  offered 
to  those  needing  instruction.  Applicants  desiring  to  take 
any  of  these  courses  must  have  completed  a  college  course 
in  the  subject  in  which  they  wish  to  work. 

Students  in  either  Botany  or  Zoology  who  desire  to  undertake  original 
work  will  receive  suitable  direction.  In  addition  to  these  opportunities 
there  are  courses  of  lectures  on  special  topics  and  on  subjects  of  general 
biological  interest.  Applications  for  appointment  should  state  the  char- 
acter of  the  work  to  be  done, — i.e.^  whether  botanical  or  zoological,  whether 
general  work,  investigation  under  direction,  or  independent  investigation, — 
and  should  be  forwarded  to  Professor  Hubbard  or  Professor  Ferguson  in 
time  to  reach  Wellesley  College  before  April  first. 

Scholarships  at  the  Zoological  Station  in  Naples. — 
Wellesley  College  is  a  subscriber  to  the  support  of  the  Ameri- 
can Women's  Table  at  the  Zoological  Station  in  Naples,  and 
thus  has  a  voice  in  the  selection  of  the  persons  who  make 
use  of  it.  Such  persons  must  be  capable  of  independent 
investigation  in  Botany,  Zoology,  or  Physiology.  Appoint- 
ments are  made  for  a  longer  or  shorter  period,  as  seems  in 
each  case  expedient.  Applications  for  the  use  of  the  table 
may  be  made  through  the  President  of  the  CoUege. 

B.     FOR  UNDERGRADUATES 

The  income  of  these  scholarships  is  appHed  to  the  aid  of  meritorious  under- 
graduate students  whose  personal  means  are  insufficient  for  their  main- 
tenance in  college. 

The  Wood  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in 

1878,  by  Caroline  A.  Wood,  in  memory  of  her  husband. 
The  Grover  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1878,  by 

William  O.  Grover. 
The  Weston  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1878,  by 

Da\dd  M.  Weston. 
The  Northeield  Seminary  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded 

in  1878. 
The  Pauline  A.  Durant  Scholarship  of  $6,000,  founded  in 

1880,  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Henry  F.  Durant. 

♦  On  the  approval  of  the  Department,  the  scholarship  in  Botany  may  be  assigned,  under 
special  conditions,  for  study  in  other  summer  laboratories. 


154  Scholarships  1918-19 

The  Sweatman  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1880,  by 

V.  Clement  Sweatman. 
The  Walter  Baker  Memorial  Scholarship,   founded  in 

1880,  by  Eleanor  J.  W.  Baker;    raised  to  $7,000  by  will 

of  Mrs.  Baker  in  1892. 
The  Annie   M.   Wood  Scholarship,  founded  in   1880,  by 

Frank  Wood,  who  maintained  it  by  annual  payments; 

established  at  $10,000  in  191 5  by  bequest  of  Mr.  Wood. 
Two  Frost  Scholarships,  founded  in   1880,  by  Rufus  S. 

Frost,  as  follows: — 

One  of  $1,000,  the  income  to  be  given  annually  to  some 
member  of  the  graduating  class  designated  by  the 
Faculty. 

One  of  $5,000,  the  income  to  be  devoted  annually  to  the 
aid  of  students. 

The  Union  Church  Scholarship,  founded  in  1880,  by  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  A.  W.  Stetson. 

The  Florence  N.  Brown  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $5,000, 
founded  in  1880,  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Samuel  N.  Brown,  Jr. 

The  Augustus  R.  Clark  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $5,000, 
founded  in  1880,  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  A.  N.  Clark. 

Four  Harriet  Fowle  Smith  Scholarships,  founded  in  1881, 
by  Henry  Fowle  Durant  in  memory  of  his  mother. 

The  Durant  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $5,ooOj  founded  in 
1883,  by  the  officers  and  students  of  Wellesley  College, 
in  honor  of  Henry  F.  Durant,  the  income  to  be  appropri- 
ated annually  to  some  student  selected  by  the  Faculty. 

The  Jane  Toplief  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $6,000,  founded 
in  1883,  by  Mrs.  William  S.  Houghton,  in  memory  of 
her  mother. 

The  Income  of  a  Fund  of  $25,000,  known  as  the  Stone  Edu- 
cational (Scholarship)  Fund,  founded  in  1884,  by  Valeria 
G.  Stone. 

The  Jeannie  L.  White  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in 
1886,  by  herself. 

The  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Solomon  F.  Smith  Memorial  Scholar- 
ship, founded  in  1888,  by  George  Smith,  for  the  tuition 
of  students  from  the  town  of  Wellesley. 


1918-19  Scholarships  155 

The  Margaret  McClung  Cowan  Fund  of  $i,ooo,  founded 
in  1888,  by  Rev.  and  Mrs.  P.  D.'  Cowan,  in  memory  of 
their  daughter. 

The  Emmelar  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1889,  by 
the  class  of  1891,  the  income  to  be  appropriated  annu- 
ally to  some  student  selected  by  the  Faculty. 

The  Sarah  J.  Houghton  Scholarship  of  $6,000,  founded 
in  1889,  by  WiUiam  S.  Houghton,  in  memory  of  his  wife. 

The  Edith  Baker  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $7,000,  founded 
by  bequest  of  Eleanor  J.  W.  Baker  in  1892. 

The  Joseph  N.  Fiske  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $8,000, 
founded  m  1892,  by  Mrs.  J.  N.  Fiske. 

The  Abbie  A.  Coburn  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $2,000, 
founded  in  1892. 

The  Eliza  C.  Jewett  Scholarship  of  $6,000,  founded  in 

1894;    the  income  to  be  appropriated  to  the  daughter  of 

a  clergyman,  or  of  a  home  or  foreign  missionary,  selected 

by  the  Faculty  of  the  College. 
The  Ada  L.  Howard  Scholarship  of  $6,000,  founded  in 

1895. 
The  Helen  Day  Gould  Scholarship,  founded  in  1896,  by 

Helen  Miller  Gould  (Shepard),  in  memory  of  her  mother; 

raised  to  $10,000  by  the  donor  in  1901. 
The  Goodwin  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1897,  by 

Hannah  B.  Goodwin. 
The  Hyde  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  founded  in  1898,  by  Sarah 

B.  Hyde. 
The  Bill  Scholarship  of  $7,000,  founded  in  1898,  by  Charles 

Bill. 
The  Holbrook  Scholarship  of  $3,000,  founded  in  1898,  by 

Sarah  J.  Holbrook. 
The  (second)  Helen  Day  Gould  Scholarship,  founded  in 

1899,  by  Helen  Miller  Gould  (Shepard);  raised  to  $10,000 

by  the  donor  in  1901. 
The  Mary  Elizabeth  Gere  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded 

in  1899,  by  Mary  EHzabeth  Gere. 
The  Ann   Morton  Towle   Memorial  Scholarship   Fund 

of   $5,000,   established   in    1901,   by   bequest   of   George 

Francis  Towle. 


156  Scholarships  1918-19 

The  Dana  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1901,  through 
the  gift  of  Charles  B.  Dana. 

The  (third)  Helen  Day  Gould  Scholarship  of  $10,000, 
founded  in  1901,  by  Helen  Miller  Gould  (Shepard). 

The  George  William  Towle  Memorial  Scholarship 
Fund  of  $6,750,  founded  in  1901,  by  bequest  of  George 
Francis  Towle. 

The  Anna  Palen  Scholarship  of  $10,000,  founded  in  1902. 

The  Rollins  Scholarship  of  $8,000,  founded  in  1903,  by 
Augusta  and  Hannah  H.  Rollins,  in  memory  of  their 
parents. 

The  Class  or  1889  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $1,000,  founded 
in  1904,  by  the  class,  in  memory  of  classmates  who  have 
died. 

The  Elizabeth  S.  Fiske  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in 
1904,  by  bequest  of  Miss  Fiske. 

The  Mae  McElwain  Rice  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $1,000, 
founded  in  1905,  by  the  class  of  1902. 

The  Sanborn  Alumnae  Scholarship,  yielding  $450  annu- 
ally, founded  in  1905,  by  Helen  J.  Sanborn  of  the  class 
of  1884,  for  the  benefit  of  daughters  of  alumnae. 

The  Julia  Ball  Thayer  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  founded 
in  1907,  by  bequest  of  Mrs.  Julia  Beatrice  Ball  Thayer, 
of  Keene,  N.H. 

The  Adams  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  founded  in  1907,  by  be- 
quest of  Adoniram  J.  Adams,  of  Boston. 

The  McDonald-Ellis  Fund  of  $500,  established  in  1908 
by  former  students  of  the  McDonald-Ellis  School  of 
Washington,  D.C.,  in  memory  of  the  late  principals  of 
the  school. 

The  Ransom  Scholarship  of  $1,000,  founded  in  1908,  by 
bequest  of  Catherine  Ayer  Ransom. 

The  Emily  P.  Hidden  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  founded  in 
1909,  by  bequest  of  Mary  E.  Hidden. 

The  Ethel  Howland  Folger  Williams  Memorial  Fund, 
estabUshed  in  191 1  from  the  estate  of  the  late  Ethel  How- 
land  Folger  (WilUams)  of  the  class  of  1905,  the  income 
to  be  given  to  a  sophomore  at  the  end  of  the  first  semester 
at  the  discretion  of  the  head  of  the  German  department. 

The  Sophie  Jewett  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $1,000, 
founded  in  191 1,  by  Elsa  D.  James. 


1918-19  Scholarships  157 

The  Mildred  Keim  Fund  of  $10,000,  founded  in  191 2  by 
Newton  and  Frances  S.  Keim,  in  memory  of  their  daugh- 
ter, Mildred  Keim. 

The  Connecticut  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  191 2, 
by  the  will  of  Louise  Frisbie. 

The  Anna  S.  Newman  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $1,000, 
estabhshed  in  1913,  through  the  gift  of  former  students. 

The  Mary  G.  Hillman  Mathematical  (Prize)  Scholarship 
of  $1,000  estabhshed  in  19 13  by  Elizabeth  A.  Hillman  in 
memory  of  her  sister. 

The  Class  of  1893  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  es- 
tabhshed by  the  class  in  19 13. 

The  M.  Elizabeth  Gray  Scholarship  of  $10,000,  estab- 
hshed in  1 914  by  bequest  of  William  J.  Gray. 

The  Cora  Stickney  Harper  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  estab- 
hshed in  191 5,  by  bequest  of  Mrs.  Cora  Stickney  Harper. 

The  Oliver  N.,  Mary  C,  and  Mary  Shannon  Fund  of 
$15,000,  estabhshed  in  1916,  by  bequest  of  Mary  Shan- 
non, as  a  permanent  fund  for  free  scholarships. 

The  Dr.  Alma  Emerson  Beale  Scholarship  Fund  of  $3,000, 
founded  in  191 7  by  bequest  of  Dr.  Alma  E.  Beale  of  the 
class  of  1 891;  the  income  to  be  applied  annually  to  a 
student  of  the  Cohege  who  intends  to  become  either  a 
foreign  or  a  home  missionary,  or,  second,  to  a  student 
of  the  College  who  is  the  daughter  of  a  clergyman. 

Another  source  of  pecuniary  aid  is  in  the  work  of  the 
Students'  Aid  Society  estabhshed  by  the  founders  of  Welles- 
ley  and  revived  and  incorporated  by  the  alumnae  of 
the  CoUege  in  April,  1916.  The  WeUesley  College  Loan 
Fund,  established  in  1908  through  contributions  from  alum- 
nae and  other  friends  of  the  College,  is  included  in  the  re- 
sources of  the  Students'  Aid  Society.  Small  amounts  are 
loaned  to  students  without  interest  in  expectation  that  these 
students  wiU  repay  whenever  they  are  able.  Assistance_  is 
often  given  partly  'in  gifts  and  partly  in  loans.  The  existing 
funds  are  not  sufficient  to  meet  the  wants  of  deserving  appli- 
cants, and  contributions  of  any  amount  wiU  be  gladly  re- 
ceived by  the  treasurer.  Miss  Mary  CasweU,  WeUesley  CoUege. 

In  one  dormitory  a  reduction  is  aUowed  on  payment  for 
board,  under  certain  conditions. 


158  Equipment  1918-19 

LIBRARY 

The  Library  of  the  College,  endowed  by  Eben  Norton 
Horsford,  now  numbers  85,469  volumes,  including  the  de- 
partmental and  special  libraries  enumerated  below.  The 
General  Library  is  open  on  week  days  from  8.10  A.  M.  to  9.30 
p.  M.,  and  on  Sundays  from  2.30  to  5.30  p.  M.  Students  have 
direct  access  to  the  shelves.  The  library  is  catalogued  by 
author  and  subject  entries,  and  the  most  recent  and  useful 
bibliographical  aids  are  provided;  special  effort  is  made  by 
the  librarians  to  train  students  in  methods  of  research. 

The  Library  subscribes  for  six  daily  and  three  weekly  papers 
and  for  three  hundred  and  twenty  American  and  foreign 
periodicals.  The  list  includes  the  most  important  representa- 
tives of  the  branches  of  instruction  comprised  in  the  college 
curriculum. 

The  Gertrude  Memorial  Library,  estabUshed  by  Mr. 
A.  A.  Sweet,  the  Missionary  Library,  and  other  collections 
in  the  General  Library,  furnish  7,540  volumes  for  Biblical 
study  and  reUgious  reading. 

The  Plimpton  Library,  established  by  Mr.  George  A. 
PHmpton,  in  memory  of  his  wife,  Frances  Pearsons  Plimpton, 
of  the  class  of  1884,  comprises  931  volumes  of  early  Italian 
Uterature,  including  both  manuscripts  and  printed  books  of 
the  fifteenth  century. 

The  following  collections  are  placed  in  the  buildings  of  the 
respective  departments: — 

Art  Library,  2,567  volumes. 
Botany  Library,  835  volumes. 
Chemistry  Library,  804  volumes. 
Astronomy  Library,  1,037  volumes. 
Hygiene  Library,  2,356  volumes. 
Music  Library,  1,096  volumes. 

GYMNASIUM 

The  department  of  Hygiene  occupies  the  new  Mary  Hemen- 
way  Hall  on  the  western  border  of  the  college  grounds.  It 
is  designed  to  meet  the  requirements  of  the  course  for  the 
training  of  teachers  of  hygiene,  and  to  provide  practical  in- 
struction for  the  entire  College.  The  equipment  includes 
large,  weU-Ughted  gymnasiums  with  ample  bathing  faciUties, 


1918-19  Equipment  159 

administrative  offices,  class  rooms,  and  laboratories  for  anat- 
omy, physiology,  bacteriology,  hygiene,  anthropometry,  cor- 
rective gymnastics,  and  research.  Immediately  adjoining 
Mary  Hemenway  Hall  are  tennis  and  archery  courts,  basket 
ball,  baseball  and  hockey  fields,  an  oval  for  horse  back  riding 
and  a  riding  hall,  with  room  for  further  expansion.  Lake 
Waban  furnishes  facilities  for  rowing  and  skating,  and  there 
is  also  a  golf  course  with  a  clubhouse.  The  equipment  of  the 
department  is  designed  solely  to  aid  in  the  appHcation  of  mod- 
ern principles  of  science  to  the  maintenance  and  promotion 
of  health. 

THE   FARNSWORTH  ART  BUILDING 
AND  ART   COLLECTIONS 

The  Farnsworth  Art  Building,  the  gift  of  the  late  Isaac  D. 
Farnsworth,  was  opened  in  September,  1889.  Besides  lecture 
rooms,  galleries  for  collections,  and  studios  for  drawing  and 
painting,  a  special  feature  is  the  arrangement  of  laboratories 
and  Hbraries,  so  that  the  books  and  art  material  relating  to 
particular  subjects  and  periods  can  be  made  immediately 
available  to  general  students. 

The  Art  Collection  consists  of  a  large  number  of  photo- 
graphs and  other  material,  including  the  James  Jackson  Jarves 
collection  of  laces  and  vestments;  the  M.  Day  Kimball  Mem- 
orial, consisting  of  original  pieces  of  antique  sculpture;  a  few 
examples  of  early  ItaUan  painting;  a  collection  of  Indian 
baskets,  the  gift 'of  Mrs.  Rufus  S.  Frost;  various  Egyptian 
antiquities  obtained  through  the  kindness  of  the  late  Mrs. 
John  C.  Whitin,  including  certain  interesting  papyri;  and 
scarabs  and  seals  from  the  collection  of  Dr.  Chauncey  Murch, 
the  gift  of  Mrs.  Helen  M.  Gould  Shepard;  the  Stetson  collection 
of  modern  paintings,  and  a  few  other  examples. 

The  collection  of  photographs  and  other  reproductions 
numbers  over  thirteen  thousand. 

EQUIPMENT  IN  MUSIC 

Music  Hall  and  BilUngs  Hall  are  large  brick  buildings, 
devoted  to  the  department  of  Music.  Music  ^  Hall  con- 
tains offices,  studios,  and  practice  rooms  equipped  with 
thirty-one  new  pianos  of  standard  makes,  a  Victrola  and  two 
Player-pianos;    also  a  large  room,  containing  a  two-manual 


160  Equipment  1918-19 

pipe  organ  for  the  use  of  the  organ  pupils.  BilHngs  Hall, 
opened  in  1904,  contains  the  office  of  the  Professor  of  Music, 
the  Hbrary  and  class  rooms  for  instruction  in  Musical  Theory; 
also  a  concert  room,  seating  four  hundred  and  ten  people, 
and  containing  the  Grover  organ, — a  large  three-manual 
organ,  rebuilt  and  modernized. 

The  Music  Library,  includes  a  collection  of  manuscripts, 
about  two  hundred  scores  (Symphony,  Opera,  Oratorio,  and 
Cantata),  two  hundred  songs,  two  hundred  piano  arrange- 
ments (two,  four,  and  eight  hands),  besides  six  hundred  and 
fifty  reference  books  on  musical  subjects.  The  department 
owns  ninety- three  records  for  the  Victrola  and  two  hundred 
and  eighty  records  for  the  Player-pianos. 


LABORATORIES   AND   SCIENTIFIC 
COLLECTIONS 

ASTRONOMY 

The  Whitin  Observatory  is  a  substantial  one-story  building 
of  white  marble,  devoted  entirely  to  the  department  of  Astron- 
omy. It  consists  of  two  wings  at  right  angles  to  each  other. 
At  the  west  end  is  a  transit  room  containing  a  Bamberg  pris- 
matic transit  of  three  inches  aperture.  Next  is  a  circular 
room,  25  feet  in  diameter,  containing  a  12-inch  Clark  equa- 
torial refracting  telescope.  This  room  is  surmounted  by  a 
hemispherical  dome  which  is  revolved  by  an  electric  motor. 
The  west  wing  of  the  building  contains  also  a  large  room  in 
which  is  kept  the  department  library,  and  a  small  spectro- 
scopic laboratory  with  a  Rowland  concave  grating  spectro- 
scope of  six  feet  focal  length.  The  south  wing  contains  a  large, 
well-lighted  room  for  daytime  laboratory  work,  a  dome  room 
containing  a  six-inch  Clark  equatorial,  and  a  second  transit 
room  with  a  small  transit. 

The  large  equatorial  is  provided  %vith  a  filar  micrometer, 
a  polarizing  photometer  and  a  six-prism  spectroscope.  The 
Observatory  is  supphed  with  two  Howard  sidereal  clocks,  a 
Bond  mean-time  chronometer  and  two  chronographs,  any  of 
which  may  be  connected  electrically  through  a  switchboard 
with  keys  near  the  various  telescopes;  a  Browning  4><-inch 
refractor  mounted  on  a  tripod;  a  Berger  surveyor's  transit; 
a  Gaertner  comparator  for  measuring  spectrograms;    a  pro- 


1918-19  Equipment  161 

jecting  lantern  and  about  400  astronomical  lantern  slides; 
and  a  large  collection  of  illustrative  apparatus  and  photo- 
graphs. 

The  Observatory  is  situated  on  a  small  hill  on  the  college 
grounds,  from  which  is  obtained  a  wide  view  of  the  heavens. 
The  astronomers'  residence  is  close  by.  Both  the  Observatory 
and  the  house,  and  also  the  greater  part  of  the  astronomical 
equipment,  are  the  gift  of  the  late  Mrs.  John  C.  Whitin. 

BOTANY 

The  department  of  Botany  has  well-equipped  laboratories 
and  a  range  of  greenhouses. 

The  illustrative  collections  comprise  an  herbarium  of  over 
twenty  thousand  phanerogams  and  twenty-one  thousand 
cryptogams,  including  the  lichen  collection  of  the  late  Prof. 
Clara  E.  Cummings;  also  a  collection  of  woods,  fruits,  and 
economic  vegetable  products;  three  hundred  charts  by  Hens- 
low,  Kny,  Dodel,  Tschirch,  and  others;  a  collection  of  Auzoux's 
botanical  models;  Brendel's  glass  models  of  cryptogams; 
seventeen  hundred  water  color  paintings  of  North  American 
plants  by  Helen  Frances  Ayres;  lantern  slides  and  micro- 
scopic mounts.  In  addition  collections  for  a  permanent 
museum  now  number  more  than  five  thousand  specimens. 

The  department  has  an  "Outdoor  Laboratory"  for  the  use 
of  certain  courses.  The  greenhouses  contribute  to  all  the 
courses  in  the  department;  but  are  of  especial  importance 
in  connection  with  the  work  in  landscape  gardening;  in  plant 
physiology  and  ecology. 

The  native  flora  about  Wellesley  is  easily  accessible,  furnish- 
ing a  convenient  field  for  both  the  taxonomist  and  ecologist. 
The  hbrary  ranks  with  the  best  botanical  hbraries  iii  the  coun- 
try and  is  well  suppHed  with  reference  works  and  with  current 
periodicals. 

CHEMISTRY 

The  department  of  Chemistry  occupies  a  separate  build- 
ing, which  contains  two  lecture  rooms  and  the  chemical  U- 
brary,  in  addition  to  the  rooms  fitted  up  for  laboratory  work. 
Separate  rooms  are  provided  for  work  in  General  and  Organic 
Chemistry,  Qualitative  and  Quantitative  Analysis,  and  Air, 
Water  and  Food  Analysis.  The  building  is  conveniently 
arranged  and  well  equipped  with  necessary  apparatus  and 
appUances. 


162  Equipment  1918-19 

During  the  summer  of  1918,  a  large  well-lighted  room,  with 
all-modern  laboratory  equipment,  was  added,  for  the  use  of  the 
courses  in  Organic  Chemistry. 

GEOLOGY  AND   GEOGRAPHY 

The  department  of  Geology  and  Geography  has  a  large 
and  well-equipped  lecture  hall  provided  with  a  Leitz  epidia- 
scope for  lantern  slide  and  opaque  projection.  One  end  of 
this  room  has  been  equipped  with  desks  for  use  as  a  geology 
laboratory,  and  another  room  is  adequately  furnished  for  a 
geography  laboratory. 

The  Geology  Museum  contains  a  typical  college  collection 
of  dynamical,  structural,  and  historical  geology  specimens, — 
a  systematic  collection  of  minerals  arranged  according  to 
Dana,  and  a  systematic  collection  of  rocks.  There  are  three 
collections  arranged  for  class-room  use, — one  each  in  miner- 
alogy, petrology  and  structural  and  historical  geology.  These 
collections  are  all  the  generous  gifts  of  colleges,  museums 
and  friends.  The  department  has  two  noteworthy  collec- 
tions. The  first  is  the  Horace  I.  Johnson  Mineral  Collection, 
which  consists  of  five  thousand  valuable  and  beautiful  mineral 
specimens,  including  many  precious  metals  and  stones.  This 
collection  is  the  gift  of  Mr.  John  Merton  of  Calumet,  Michigan, 
and  was  presented  through  the  Class  of  191 5  by  the  courtesy 
of  Miss  M.  Helen  Merton.  The  second  is  the  Reverend 
David  F.  Pierce  Collection,  which  includes  a  complete  and 
rare  collection  of  building  and  ornamental  stones  and  many 
precious  and  semi-precious  minerals.  This  collection  is  the 
gift  of  Professor  Frederick  E.  Pierce  of  Yale,  Miss  Anna  H. 
Pierce,  and  Miss  Mary  E.  Pierce  of  the  Class  of  1898. 

The  maps  of  the  department  include  wall  maps  of  different 
countries  and  sections  of  countries;  aU  the  United  States 
Geologic  Folios,  and  over  six  thousand  topographic  maps  of 
the  United  States  Geologic  Survey,  the  gift  of  the  Survey. 
Three  thousand  of  these  latter  maps  are  arranged  in  groups 
to  illustrate  geographic  types. 

The  department  has  fifteen  hundred  lantern  slides  which 
illustrate  all  phases  of  geology  and  geography. 

MATHEMATICS 

The  fine  collection  of  Mathematical  Models  w^as  destroyed 
by  fire  in  March,  19 14.  At  present  there  is  only  a  small  num- 
ber of  models  for  use  in  the  elementary  work. 


1918-19  Equipment  163 

PHYSICS 

The  department  of  Physics  occupies  temporary  quarters 
consisting  of  a  conveniently  arranged  lecture  room,  fitted 
with  [direct  and  alternating  current  and  gas,  laboratories  for 
general  physics,  electricity,  heat  and  light. 

The  equipment,  destroyed  by  fire  in  March,  19 14,  is  being 
replaced  as  rapidly  as  war  conditions  permit.  The  lecture 
apparatus  is  sufficient  to  permit  a  wide  range  of  experimental 
lectures.  In  the  elementary  laboratory  duphcation  of  ap- 
paratus permits  a  close  co-ordination  between  lectures  and 
laboratory  exercises.  The  advanced  laboratory  equipment 
is  especially  strong  in  electrical  apparatus,  and  in  optics  in- 
cludes such  instruments  as  the  Reichsanstalt  precision  photo- 
meter, a  Michelson  interferometer,  Societe  Genevoise  spectro- 
meter, a  comparator  designed  by  E.  B.  Frost,  etc. 

PSYCHOLOGY 

The  temporary  quarters  of  the  laboratory  now  include 
seven  rooms,  six  in  the  north  wing  of  the  Administration 
Building  and  one  in  the  basement  of  the  Art  Building.  The 
equipment,  entirely  destroyed  by  fire  in  March,  19 14,  is  being 
replaced  as  fast  as  war  conditions  permit.  Fair  provision  is 
made  both  for  demonstration  and  for  general  experimental 
work. 

ZOOLOGY 

The  department  of  Zoology  is  housed  in  a  small  temporary 
building  consisting  of  four  laboratories,  three  offices,  a  gen- 
eral work  room  and  a  museum  room.  The  building  is  suppHed 
with  water,  heat,  electricity  and  gas.  The  laboratories  are 
equipped  for  present  needs  with  microscopes,  physiological 
apparatus,  sHdes  for  histolog>'  and  embryology,  Leuckart 
charts,  and  a  collection  of  skeletons  and  alcohoUc  specimens. 
All  the  courses  except  two  are  given  in  the  new  temporary 
building.  The  work  in  anatomy  is  conducted  in  the  labora- 
tories in  Mary  Hemenway  Hall. 

The  nucleus  of  a  new  museum  is  already  formed  through 
gifts  of  bird  skins,  insects,  shells,  and  a  collection  of  inverte- 
brates from  the  Zoological  Station  at  Naples,  and  another 
from  New  England. 


FORMS  OF  BEQUEST 


/  give  and  bequeath  to  Wellesley  College,  a  corporation  estab- 
lished by  law,  in  the  town  of  Wellesley,  county  of  Norfolk,  and 

Commonwealth  of  Massachusetts,  the  sum  of 

dollars,  to  be  safely  invested  by  it,  and  called  the Endow- 
ment Fund.  The  interest  shall  be  applied  to  the  payment  of 
the  salaries  of  teachers  in  Wellesley  College,  as  the  Trustees  shall 
deem  expedient. 


I  give  and  bequeath  to  Wellesley  College,  a  corporation  estab- 
lished by  law,  in  the  town  of  Wellesley,  county  of  Norfolk,  and 

Commonwealth  of  Massachusetts,  the  sum  of 

dollars,  to  be  appropriated  by  the  Trustees  for  the  benefit  of  the 
College  in  such  manner  as  they  shall  think  will  be  most  useful. 


I  give  and  bequeath  to  Wellesley  College,  a  corporation  estab- 
lished by  law,  in  the  town  of  Wellesley,  county  of  Norfolk,  and 

Commonwealth  of  Massachusetts,  the  sum  of 

dollars,  to  be  safely  invested  by  it,  and  called  the Scholar- 
ship Fund.  The  interest  of  this  fund  shall  be  applied  to  aid 
deserving  students  in  Wellesley  College. 


DEGREES   CONFERRED   IN   1918 


MASTER  OF  ARTS 

Hazel  Beach  (B.A.,  Ohio  State  University,  igi5),  Education;  French. 
Leonora  Branch  (B.A.,  Smith  College,  1914),  English  Literature;  English  Composition. 
Elizabeth  Hunt  Morris  (B.A.,  Wellesley  College,  1913),  Philosophy  and  Psychology. 
Nellie  May  Reeder  (B.A.,  Wellesley  College,  191 1),  Ecotiomics  and  Sociology. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS 


Marion  Bond  Abbey 
E\^LYN  Beatrice  Abelson 
Ruth  Margery  Addoms 
Virgin  LA  Alcock 
Bernice  Helen  Alderman 
Miriam  Esther  Allen 
Mildred  De  Witt  Allison 
Ruth  Peabody  Altman 
Dorothy  Earlow  Anderson 
Elise  Anderson 
Genevxeve  Olcott  Anderson 
Helen  Atkins 
Marguerite  Atterbury 
Catharine  Atwood 
Anne  Rebecca  Av'ery 
Margaret  Woods  Babcock 
Cordelia  Hulburd  Ball 
Ruth  E\'tlyn  Bard 
Llllian  Marguerite  Barr 
Elizabeth  Fort  Barrington 
Florence  Marion  Bartlett 
Isabel  Deming  Bassett 
Louise  Nowell  Batt 
Ethel  Maberry  Bausum 
Marjorie  Beach 
Helen  Dearborn  Bean 
Caroline  Elsa  Bergheim 
Lucy  Bradford  Besse 
Dorothy  Frances  Birdsall 
Mary  Virginia  Bishoff 
Viola  Pauline  Blackburn 
Helen  Frothingham  Blake 
Beatrice  Frances  Bloch 
Katharine  Bonbright 
Kadah  Booth 
Catharine  Boyd 
Edith  Boyd 

Gertrude  Conway  Boyd 
Margaret  Frances  Boyd 
Kathryn  Boynton 
Dorothy  Brewer 
Gertrude  Rexford  Bristol 
Helen  Virginia  Broe 
Pauline  Hubbard  Brown 
Rae  Marguerite  Brown 
Olinte  Sherman  Bryai^it 
Dorothy  Farrar  Buck 
Olf/e  Estelle  Bulley 
Kathryn  Burkhalter 
Lucenthia  Butler 
Mildred  Butler 


Clara  Cald^vell 

Blanche  Thornburg  Cameron 

Helen  Ruth  Camp 

Ruth  Candlin 

Anna  Louise  Margaret  Carlin 

Jeraldine  Susan  Carmichael 

Marion  Courtney  Carrick 

Grace  Russell  Chadwick 

Mary  Elizabeth  Chinn 

Catharine  Chittenden 

Katharine  Cochran  Coan 

Marion  Righter  Cobb 

Ruth  Michaels  Cohn 

Jessie  Lillian  Col\'1lle 

Mary  Elizabeth  Gere  Conklin 

Clare  Alice  Coolidge 

Josephine  Crosby  Cooper 

Florence  Dorcas  Craig 

Marjorie  Joyce  Crosby 

Ruth  Elizabeth  Crosby 

Louise  Cross 

Louise  Carpenter  Crossley 

Miriam  Edith  Towl  Culbert 

Mary  Elizabeth  Curran 

Evelyn  Mabel  Dana 

Marion  Davis 

Margaret  Ai^dress  Davison 

Eleanor  Dawes 

Anna  Frances  Deal 

Jane  Cella.  De  Graff 

Sarah  Savtlla  Deitrick 

Dorothy  Adelaid  Dibble 

Eleanor  Mitchell  Dickson 

Alice  Dimick 

Blanche  Susan  Doe 

Laura  Elizabeth  Doney 

Katherine  Aileen  Donovan 

Beatrice  Orme  Douglas 

Ruth  Lisbeth  Drury 

Frances  Dunham 

Ruth  Bryant  Dunn 

Angie  Virginia  Eames 

Virginia  Eastman 

Helen  Louise  Edwards 

Mary  Jette  Edwards 

Kathleen  Elliott 

Jane  Elizabeth  Emery 

Edith  Ilett  Epler 

Alice  Josephine  Fairbanks 

LiLiTH  Mildred  Faris 

Helen  Porter  Farrell 


166 


Degrees  Conferred 


1918-19 


Edith  Mary  Felin 
Elizabeth  Harper  Felton 
Mary  Marshall  Filbert 
Ester  Ida  Fismer 
Adela  Frances  Fitts 
Mary  Crozier  Fleet 
Mary  Louise  Eulalia  Francis 
Gertrude  Atherton  Fraser  , 
Marion  Chase  Frenyear 
Irma  Meyer  Friedlaender 
Anna  Shaw  Glfford 
Florence  Mabel  Glfford 
Margaret  Louise  Giles 
Dorothy  Glenn 
Margaret  Maud  Goldschmidt 
Dorothy  Gypson  Gordon 
Gladys  Loltise  Gordon 
Elba  Graefe 
Dorothy  Grafly 
Louisa-May  Greeley 
Dorothy  Somerville  Greene 
Gertrude  Martha  Greene 
Eva  Marie  Grenier 
Edith  Jennett  Gru^ees 
Marglt;rite  Esther  Grimmer 
Carolyn  Maie  Hall 
Elizabeth  Hamblin 
Helen  Paul  Hammell 
Marjoree  Banks  Hammond 
Marion  Harbison 
Harrlette  O'Brien  Harding 
Ruth  Helen  Harding 
Leola  Judith  Harris 
Margery  Evelyn  Harris 
Helen  Rowena  Hasbrouck 
GisELA  Kruger  Haslett 
Ruth  Jeannette  Hastings 
Gladys  Haven 
Marion  Hayes 
Marie  Henze 
Helen  Shaffer  Hershey 
Theodora  Louise  Heyden 
Mary  Alice  Hlldreth 
Ruby  Hhxman 
Edna  Hills 
Anna  Marie  Hinnau 
Charlotte  Maria  Hitchcock 
Helen  Huntington  Holladay 
Pauline  Holley 
Olive  Holmes 
Pauline  Holmes 
Catharine  Amanda  Hope 
Ruth  Clarissa  Houghton 
Helen  Howe 
Margaret  Morris  Howe 
Alice  Miriam  Hudson 
Mildred  Courtland  Jagger 
Alnah  James 

Janette  Gertrude  Jardine 
Madeline  Beatrice  Jarvis 
Helen  Rebecca  Jenckes 
Esther  Evelyn  Johnson 
Helena  Adeline  Johnson 
Agnes  Hawthorne  Johnston 
Evelyn  Catherine  Jones 
Norma  Josephson 

WrLHELMINA   MaGDALEN   JoSOPAIT 

Martha- Jane  Judson 
Margery  Keeler 
Ethel  Louise  Keller 


Cornelia  Hopkins  Kellogg 

Katherine  Margaret  Kinsman 

Adeline  Babette  Klein 

Nancy  Margaret  Kugler 

MoNA  Matthews  Lacy 

Francesca  Raymond  La  Monte 

Agnes  Adele  Lange 

Ruth  Louise  Lange 

Mildred  Lauder 

Alice  Carolyn  Law 

Helen  Lent 

Etheleen  Maude  Lesure 

Emelyn  Louise  Lewis 

Hester  Stevens  Lewis 

Gladys  Belle  Liebman 

Mildred  Prince  Little 

Ida  Vesta  Lockwood 

Elizabeth  Eckbert  Lupfer 

Helen  Le  Fevre  Lyon 

Katherine  Sheehan  McCafferty 

Sadie  Arietta  MacFarland 

Elizabeth  McPherson  McGill 

Henrietta  Mackenzie 

Marie  Morrison  McKinney 

Caroline  Goss  McLouth 

Margaret  McNaughton 

Margaret  MacPherson 

Marion  Prentice  Maiden 

Anne  Jones  Maidment 

Evelyn  Mallon 

Margaret  Thomson  Maxwell 

Bessie  Mead 

Ruth  Elizabeth  Merrill 

Lois  Charlotte  Mertz 

Mildred  Meyers 

Dorothy  Gertrude  Miller 

Margaret  Bee  Miller 

Edith  Augusta  Mitchell 

Eleanor  Elizabeth  Mitchell 

Fannie  Sanderson  Mitchell 

Helen  Belcher  Mitchell 

Katharine  Moller 

Ellen  Montgomery 

Mae  Teresa  Mooney 

Dorothy  Moore 

Emily  Morgan 

Naomi  Frances  Morris 

Evelyn  Nay 

Hudegarde  Nichols 

Lucy  Gardner  Nichols 

Mildred  Celestine  Nichols 

Anna  Wallace  Nock 

Jeannette  Beard  Nostrand 

Margaret  Gu'enydd  Noyes 

Dorothy  Onthank 

Florence  Elisabeth  Osgood 

Beatrice  Elaine  Ostrander 

Beatrice  Page 

Marion  Elizabeth  Park 

Josephine  Stanley  Partridge 

Alice  Katharine  Paton 

Anna  Frances  Paton 

Kathryn  Carter  Patterson 

Charlotte  Martin  Penfield 

Dorothy  Faulkner  Peterson 

Frances  Howard  Pettee 

Sarah  Elizabeth  Pickett 

Margaret  Pierson 

Doris  Diana  Pike 

Bertha  Richardson  Alexander  Plummer 


1918-19 


Degrees  Conferred 


167 


Beatrice  Whitney  Powell 
Marcla.  Susan  Priest 
LiDORRA  Holt  Putney 
VrvxvN  Helen  Randolph 
Fannie  Coolbaugh  Rane 
RoBB  Afton  Reavxll 
Ruth  Parish  Reynolds 
Dorothy  Rice 
Helen  Olivia  Rice 
Grace  Roberts 
Mary  Alettha  Robinson 
Ruth  Katherine  Robln-son 
Sar-ah  Southwick  Rodman 
Dorothy  Viola  Rogers 
Helen  Griggs  Roof 

MARLAiSr   ROOSE 

Edna  May  Rowell 
Martha  Barbara  St.  Clair 
Helen  Hooven  Santmyer 
Frances  Sappington 
Eleonore  Mathllde  Schnepf 
AiiY  Esther  Schwamb 
Marguerite  Shattuck 
Helen  Mildred  Sibley 
Margaret  Hastings  Skelton 
Elizabeth  Minette  Skinner 
Frances  Elizabeth  Slocum 
Mary  Esther  Smxth 
S.ARAH  Frances  Smith 
Helen  Snow 
Jean  Chlron  Snyder 
Mary  Burchard  Spahr 
Dorothy  Louise  Stacy 
Leila  Beatrice  Starr 
Dorothy  Long  Stern 
Martha  Josephine  Stev-enson 
Adelaide  Stickney 
Marjorie  Irene  Stickney 
Louise  Pepin  Stockbridge 
Marjorie  Williams  Stone 
Alice  Streckewald 
Lilllan  Margaret  Struntz 
Priscilla  Ford  Studley 
Gertrude  Sturm 


Helen  Lee  Swormstedt 
Julianna  Randolph  Tatum 
Doris  Thayer 
Marie  Thibalt)eau 
Margaret  Gertrude  Thomas 
Helen  Josephine  Tiel 
Katharine  Stanbery  Timberman 
Barbara  Tompkins 
Eleanor  Mitchell  Towne 
Constance  Southard  Veysey 
Rebecca  Newell  Vincent 
JosELLA  Marguerite  Vogelius 
Harriet  Vose 
Laura  May  Vossler 
Mary  Florence  Wallace 
Katherine  Gould  Walton 
Ruth  Wandless 
Doris  Wardner 
Ivatherine  Morgan  Wardwell 
Mary  Hawes  Wardwell 
Gladys  Hudegarde  Watkxns 
Margaret  Watson 
Constance  Weld 
Esther  Muriel  Wells 
Ethel  Marie  Wells 
Sarah  jNIeredith  Wensell 
Florence  West 
Marion  Estelle  West 
Ruth  Wetzel 
Alice  Wharton 
Caroline  Whiting 
Helen  Francis  Whiting 
Isabel  Whiting 
Bessie  Evelyn  Whitmarsh 
Marion  Wiley 
Dorothy  Curtis  Wilkey 
LzLLLiN  Frances  Wilson 
Maurlne  Clevidence  Wingert 
Helen  Annette  Winship 
Marion  Scott  Win  stead 
Sally  Calkins  Wood 
Mary  Jane  Woodfill 
Marion  Wright 
Alice  Zepfler 


CERTIFICATES   IN  HYGIENE  AWARDED  IN  1918 


Gladys  Helen  Angel 
Dorothy  Gray  Baldwin 
Eleanor  Este  Bartlett 
Agnes  Bryant 
Alice  Martin  Burdett 
Mildred  Hallock  Campbell 
Marie  Louise  Carns 
Julia  Sargent  Davies 
Nellita  Elizabeth  Detwiler 
Irene  Martin  Dolby 
Ruth  Mildred  Dowling 
Ruth  Entz 

Mildred  Lucy  Francis 
Katharine  Cowley  Gawne 
Ellen  Van  Valzah  Hayes 
Katharine  Howe 
Cynthia  Jenkyn  Lash 


Dorothy  Louise  Loker 
Mildred  Agnes  McCarthy 
Frances  Campbell  McInnis 
Emma  McKernon 
Helen  May  MacKinnon 
Elizabeth  Pennock  Maris 
Janet  Newton 
Marjorie  Helen  Piper 
Elouise  Anne  Rumney 
Eleanor  Emma  Sauer 
Katharine  Sias 
Clare  Hebard  Small 
Gladys  Smiley 
Esther  Barbara  Sutcliffe 
Ruth  Waterman 
Isabel  Stoddard  Williams 
Ruth  Kiger  Yant 


168 


Honor  Scholarships 


1918-19 


HONOR  SCHOLARSHIPS 

Honor  Scholarships  (without  stipend)  have  been  estab- 
lished by  the  College  for  the  purpose  of  giving  recognition 
to  a  high  degree  of  excellence  in  academic  work.  These 
honors  fall  into  two  classes:  students  in  the  first,  or  higher 
class,  are  termed  Durant  Scholars;  students  in  the  second 
class  are  termed  Wellesley  College  Scholars. 

These  honors  are  awarded  to  seniors  on  the  basis  of  two 
and  one-half  years'  work,  to  juniors  on  the  basis  of  one  and 
one-half  years'  work.  The  standard  in  each  case  is  absolute, 
not  competitive. 

DURANT  SCHOLARS 


APPOINTED  IN   1918 


Ruth  Margery  Addoms,  '18 

Ruth  Peabody  Altman,  '18 

Emma  Katharine  Anderson,  '19 

Helen  Robbins  Andrew,  '19 

Marguertte  Atterbury,  '18 

Edith  Augusta  Bagley,  '19 

Elizabeth  Lucy  Barbour,  '19 

Isabel  Deming  Bassett,  '18 

Marion  Bell,  '19 

Caroline  Elsa  Bergheim,  '18 

Lucy  Bradford  Besse,  '18 

Helen  Mary  Bishop,  '19 

Eleanor  Dickenson  Blodgett,  '19 

Prudence  Bostwick,  '19 

Marguerite  Amelia  May  Brenizer,  '19 

Helen  Virginia  Broe,  '18 

Ruth  Frances  Brooks,  '19 

LuciNTHiA  Butler,  '18 

Anna  Louise  Margaret  Carlin,  '18 

Mary  Elizabeth  Chinn,  '18 

Katharine  Cochran  Coan,  '18 

Muriel  Coe,  '19 

Ruth  Stevens  Coleman,  '19 

Dorothy  Elizabeth  Colville,  '19 

Sarah  Savllla  Deitrick.  '18 

Angle  Virginia  Eames,  '18 

Mary  Jette  Edwards,  '18 

Dorothy  Deane  Paris,  '19 

Charlene  Doris  Fiebeger,  '19 

Elizabeth  Frances  Freeman,  '19 

Florence  Emily  Goodrich,  '19 

Dorothy  Graply,  '18 

Gertrude  Martha  Greene,  '18 

Ruth  Helen  Harding,  '18 

Vera  Carrie  Hemenway,  '19 

Amelia  Henderson,  '19 

Marie  Henze,  '18 

Mary  Alice  Hlldreth,  '18 

Helen  Barbara  Hockenberry,  '19 


Edna  Marion  Holliday,  '19 
Evelyn  Holt,  '19 
Edna  Holtorf,  '19 
Alnah  James,  '18 
Norma  Josephson,  '18 
Hester  Stevens  Lewis,  '18 
Mildred  Prince  Little,  '18 
Constance  Mary  Loftus,  '19 
Susan  March  Lowell,  '19 
Helen  Le  Fevre  Lyon,  '18 
Mary  Marguertte  Martin,  '1.9 
Bessie  Mead,  '18 
Helen  Merrell,  '19 
Dorothy  Gertrude  Miller,  '18 
Sarah  Morrison,  '19 
Anna  Wallace  Nock,  '18 
Dorothy  Onthank,  '18 
Anna  Frances  Paton,  '18 
Frances  Howard  Pettee,  '18 
Edith  Estelle  Pickard,  '19 
LiDORRA  Holt  Putney,  '18 
Adele  Mary  Rumpf,  '19 
Margaret  Roseman  Scherer,  '19 
Miriam  Rossiter  Small,  '19 
Helen  Snow,  '18 
Jean  Chiron  Snyder,  '18 
Mary  Burchard  Spahr,  '18 
Therese  Weiss  Strauss,  '19 
Emily  Lois  Trimmer,  '19 
Harriet  Vose,  '18 
Katherine  Grant  Vose,  '19 
Marion  Horton  Wallace,  '19 
Mary  Florence  Wallace,  '18 
Gladys  Hildeg.arde  Watkins,  '18 
Dorothy  Weinschenck,  '19 
Ethel  Marie  Wells,  '18 
Irene  Harriet  Wilson,  '19 
Marion  Scott  Winstead,  '18 
Sally  Calkins  Wood,  '18 


1918-19 


Honor  Scholarships 


169 


WELLESLEY  COLLEGE  SCHOLARS 


APPOINTED   IN    igi8 


Hester  Lenore  Anderson,  '19 
Alice  Hall  Armstrong,  '19 
Lillian  Marguerite  Barr,  '18 
Marjorie  Beach,  '18 
Helen  Dearborn  Bean,  '18 
Mary  Virginia  Bishoff,  '18 
Viola  Pauline  BLACKBUim,  '18 
Edith  Boyd,  '18 
Gertrude  Conway  Boyd,  '18 
Christine  Smillie  Bredstgan,  '19 
Margaret  Ellis  Brown,  '19 
Rae  Marguerite  Brown,  '18 
Dorothy  Farrar  Buck,  '18 
Blanche  Thornburg  Cameron,  '18 
Katharine  Biddle  C.\rter,  '19 
Margaret  Elizabeth  Coombs,  '19 
Mary  Windsor  Crane,  '19 
Louise  Cross,  '18 
Evelyn  Mabel  Dana,  '18 
Dorothy  Adelaide  Dibble,  '18 
Helen  Louise  Edwards,  '18 
Helen  Porter  Farrell,  '18 
Adela  Frances  Fitts,  '18 
Marion  Chase  Frenyear,  '18 
Florence  Mabel  Gifford,  '18 
Margaret  Maud  Goldschmidt,  '18 
Dorothy  Somerville  Greene,  '18 
Alva  Bjorkman  H'Vmmarskold,  '19 
Marjorie  Banks  Hammond,  '18 
Dorothea  Hazzard,  '19 
Helen  Shaffer  Hershey,  '18 
Ruby  Hillman,  '18 
Kathryn  Louise  Hinrichs,  '19 
Mary  Esther  Holland,  '19 
Pauline  Holley,  '18 
Margaret  Marion  Horton,  '19 
Helen  Howe,  '18 
Margaret  Helen  Hoyt,  '19 
Marion  Ingersoll,  '19 
Isabel  Stewart  Ireland,  '19 
Josephine  Poe  January,  '19 
Esther  Evelyn  Johnson,  '18 
Esther  Theresa  Johnson,  '19 
Ruth  Elizabeth  Kelly,  '19 


Nancy  Margaret  Kugler,  '18 
Agnes  Adele  Lange,  '18 
Ruth  Louise  Lange,  '18 
Florence  Isabel  Langley,  '19 
Jean  Lees,  '19 

Etheleen  Maude  Lesure,  '18 
Helen  Mabel  Lumsdem,  '19 
Elizabeth  Eckbert  Lupfer,  '18 
Miriam  Graham  McClain,  '19 
Ruth  Lillian  McClelland,  '19 
Henrietta  Mackenzie,  '18 
Marie  Morrison  McKinney,  '18 
Margaret  McNaughton,  '18 
Mary  Virginia  Martin,  '19 
J.AJNE  Webster  Matthews,  '19 
Katharine  Moller,  '18 
Kathleen  Murphy,  '19 
Evelyn  Nay,  '18 

Charlotte  Martin  Penfield,  '18 
Margaret  Pierson,  '18 
Margaret  Louise  Post,  '19 
Mary  Eleanor  Prentiss,  '19 
Mary  Beatrice  Putney,  '19 
Fannie  Coolbaugh  BLane,  '18 
Ellen  Lucretia  Richardson,  '19 
Dorothy  Mae  Robatean,  '19 
Grace  Roberts,  '18 
Mary  Alettha  Robinson,  '18 
Rose  Jeannette  Schwenger,  '19 
Marjorie  Ingraham  Scudder,  '19 
Ruth  Shaw,  '19 

Elizabeth  Minette  Skinner,  '18 
Helen  Lee  Swormstedt,  '18 
Mary  Rita  Torpey,  '19 
Elisabeth  Sternberg  Traut,  '19 
Rebecca  Nev/ell  Vincent,  '18 
JosELLA  Marguerite  Vogelius,  '18 
Ruth  Wandless,  '18 
Katherine  Morgan  Wardwell,  '18 
Sarah  Meredith  Wensell,  '18 
Eleanor  White,  '19 
Helen  Francis  Whiting,  '18 
Esther  Locke  Worden,  '19 


SUMMARY  OF  STUDENTS 


Resident  candidates  for  the  M.A.  degree 

Candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree: — 

Seniors 308 

Juniors 366 

Sophomores 375 

Freshmen 492 

Non-candidates  for  degrees 

Total  registration,  November,  1918 


17 


1,541 

36 
1,594 


United  States: 

Alabama 

Arkansas 

California 

Colorado 

Connecticut 

Delaware 

District  of  Co! 

Florida 

Georgia 

Hawaii 

Idaho 

Illinois 

Indiana 

Iowa 

Kansas 

Kentucky 

Louisiana 

Maine     . 

Maryland 

Massachusetts 

Michigan 

Minnesota 

Mississippi 

Missouri 

Montana 

Nebraska 


umbia 


6 

New  Hampshire 

3 

New  Jersey    . 

13 

New  Mexico  . 

II 

New  York      . 

71 

North  Carolina 

I 

Ohio 

21 

Oklahoma 

3 

Oregon    . 

8 

Pennsylvania 

4 

Rhode  Island 

8 

South  Carolina 

77 

South  Dakota 

19 

Tennessee 

18 

Texas      . 

8 

Utah       . 

10 

Vermont 

2 

Virginia  . 

46 

Washington   . 

13 

West  Virginia 

327 

Wisconsin 

36 

Wyoming 

18 

Canada 

I 

China 

25 

France 

4 

Japan 

10 

Spain  . 

37 

154 

I 

236 

S 

78 

4 

6 

174 
28 

7 
2 
6 

20 
3 

17 
7 
8 

5 
19 

I 
2 
6 

3 

I 
I 


OFFICERS  OF  THE  ALUMNA  ASSOCIATION 


Mrs.  Harriet  Hinchltff  Co\'erdale  (Mrs.  William  H.),  President, 

328  W.  83d  St.,  New  York,  N.  Y. 
Mrs.  Janet  Davidson  Travell  (Mrs.  John  W.),  Vies  President, 

27  E.  nth  St.,  New  York,  N.  Y. 
Miss  Olive  Anne  Saiith,  Secretary  of  the  Executive  Board  of  the  Alumna  Association, 

Care  of  McCall's  Magazine,  New  York,  N.  Y. 

Miss  Alberta  Maxtoe  Welch,  Treasurer,  15  E.  72d  St.,  New  York,  N.  Y. 

Miss  Martha  Hill  McFarland,  Director,  Rye  Seminary,  Rye,  N.  Y. 

Mrs.  Rebecca  Meaker  Colville  (Mrs.  Kenneth  H.),  AlumncB  General  Secretary  and  Secretary 

of  the  Graduate  Council  (Acting),  WeUesley  College. 


LOCAL    ASSOCIATIONS 

In  the  following,  an  arrangement  by  states  has  been  adopted.  The  name  standing  after 
that  of  the  club  refers  to  the  secretary-treasurer  unless  otherwise  specified.  In  the  address 
of  this  officer,  the  name  of  the  city  (or  town)  and  state  are  omitted  if  these  have  already 
been  expressly  stated  in  the  heading.  Corrections  or  additions  will  be  gratefully  received. 
Brackets  indicate  information  not  recent. 

California.. 

Central,  Elizabeth  Adams,  1770  Pacific  Ave.,  San  Francisco. 

Southern,  Corinna  Crowl,  211  Ellenwood  Drive,  Eagle  Rock. 
China. 

Katherine  Williams,  Y.  W.'C.  A.,  Peking,  North  China. 
Colorado. 

State,  Marion  E.  Pulsifer,  1362  Race  St.,  Denver. 

Denver,  Mary  L.  Townsend,  321  East  12th  Ave. 

Southern,  Rea  Schimpeler  Ellmgwood  (Mrs.  Albert  R.),  1514  North  Weber  St.,  Colorado 
Springs. 
Columbia,  District  of. 

Edna  Spaulding,  2224  N  St.,  N.  W. 
Connecticut. 

Bridgeport,  May  O.  Davenport,  36  Laurel  Ave. 

Hartford,  Ruth  Samuels,  128  Collins  St. 

New  Haven,  Clara  Boxrud  Weigle  (Mrs.  Luther  A.),  142  Cold  Spring  St. 
Georgla. 

Belle  Lamar  Stockbridge  (Mrs.  Horace  E.),  Atlanta  (Vice  President.) 
Hawaii. 

Juliette  May  Eraser,  1804  College  St.,  Honolulu. 
Illinois. 

Chicago,  Mary  Miller  Kingsley  (Mrs.  Frank  W.),  No.  814,  175  West  Jackson  Blvd. 
Indiana, 

Agnes  M.  Picken,  2160  North  Capitol  Ave.,  Indianapolis. 
Japan. 

Ruth  Emerson  Hannaford  (Mrs. 'Howard  D.),  Yoshida,  Kyokwa,  Yoshida  Machi,  Kyoto. 
Kentucky. 

Gertrude  Tinker  Fulton  (Mrs.  J.  Gault),  Anchorage. 
Maine. 

Eastern,  Bernice  B.  Dunning,  156  Cedar  St.,  Bangor. 

Western,  Mabel  Wood  Little  (Mrs.  Albian  H.),  473  Cumberland  Ave.,  Portland. 
Maryland. 

Baltimore,  Jane  F.  Goodloe,  Girls'  Latin  School,  St.  Paul  St. 


172  Alumna  Association  1918-19 

Massachusetts. 

Berkshire,  Grace  Van  Deusen  Hall  (Mrs.  George  M.),  6  Oak  St.,  Great  Barrington. 

Boston,  Edith  Wyllie  McCann  (Mrs.  P.  Francis),  75  Tudor  St.,  Chelsea  (President). 

Fitchburg,  Georgette  Grenier  Laserte  (Mrs.  Charles  J.),  50  Central  St.,  Leominster. 

Haverhill,  Lucasta  J.  Boynton,  140  Pleasant  St.,  Bradford. 

Quincy,  Anna  Pinkham  Ryder  (Mrs.  Frank  C),  70  Winthrop  Ave.,  WoUaston. 

Lowell,  Ruth  Rylee  Keep  (Mrs.  H.  Sanford),  137  Fairmount  St. 

S.  E.  Mass.,  Mary  F.  Hitch,  177  Elm  St.,  New  Bedford. 

Springfield,  Tilla  McCarten,  Care  Miss  J.  C.  Prentice,  30  Thompson  St. 

Worcester,  Mary  Powers  Granger  (Mrs.  L.  Dwight),  3  Midland  St. 
Michigan. 

Detroit,  Marguerite  Ickler,  44  Moss  St. 
Minnesota. 

Minneapolis,  Hilda  Weber  Crocker  (Mrs.  Theodore  D.),  4735  South  Fremont  Ave 

St.  Paul,  C.  MarJe  Johnson,  941  Laurel  Ave. 
Missouri. 

Kansas  City,  Lucy  Holmes,  3637  Charlotte  St. 

St.  Louis,  Julia  Randall,  5000  Raymond  Ave. 
Nebraska. 

Omaha,  Jeannette  Mayer  Amstein  (Mrs.  Herbert),  10  Davenport  St. 
New  Hampshire. 

Edith  Bryant  Belcher  (Mrs.  George  M.),  68  North  Adams  St.,  Manchester. 
New  Mexico. 

May  Spitz,  189  Palace  Ave.,  Santa  Fe. 
New  York. 

Bujfalo,  Alice  Cumpson,  567  Richmond  Ave. 

Eastern,  Marguerite  W.  Pearsall,  460  Hamilton  St.,  Albany. 

New  York,  Muriel  Windram  Sichel  (Mrs.  Harold  M.),  424  West  20th  St. 

Rochester,  Mary  S.  McLouth,  22  Cuyler  St.,  Palmyra. 

Syracuse,  Emily  Shonk  Hancock  (Mrs.  Clarence),  1532  East  Genesee  St. 

Watertown,  Julia  Glidden  McCoy  (Mrs.  Frank  E.),  214  Paddock  St. 
Ohio. 

Ahon,  Gertrude  M.  Long,  74  Maplewood  Rd. 

Cincinnati,  Bertha  M.  Allen,  Glendale. 

Cleveland,  Laura  V.  Edwards,  1781  East  Both  St.,  Suite  12. 

Columbus,  Hattie  Weiler  Lazarus  (Mrs.  Robert),  1080  Bryden  Rd. 

Youngstown,  Artena  Phillips,  244  Lincoln  Ave. 
Oregon. 

Portland,  Amy  Rothchild,  11 19  Westover  Rd. 
Pennsylvania. 

Eastern,  Claire  Jaquith  Fowle  (Mrs.  Charles  W.),9i6  Pennsylvania  Ave.,  Bethlehem. 

Northeastern,  Anna  L.  Hibbs,  227  Montgomery  St.,  West  Pittston. 

Philadelphia,  Ella  H.  MacKay,  141 6  North  i6th  St. 

Pittsburgh,  M.  Louise  Caten,  135  West  Swissvale  Ave.,  Edgewood. 

Southeastern,  Bessie  E.  Kast,  2220  Penn  St.,  Harrisburg. 

Williamsport,  Cora  Brooks  Walton  (Mrs.  Lucius  L.),  313  Maynard  St. 
Rhode  Island. 

Providence,  Ruth  T.  Somes,  495  Lloyd  Ave. 
South  Dakota. 

Harriet  Deane  Tufts  (Mrs.  Arthur  H.),  Sioux  Falls. 
Utah. 

Una  Stubbins  Stone  (Mrs.  A.  P.),  144  Eleventh  East  St.,  Salt  Lake  City.  - 
Washington. 

Western,  Estelle  Roberts,  1211  2 2d  Ave.,  North,  Seattle. 
Wisconsin, 

Madison,  Mary  Neal  Hamilton  (Mrs.  Arthur),  1726  Van  Hise  Ave. 

Milwaukee,  Ruth  L.  Strong,  619  Shepherd  Ave. 


INDEX 


Page 

Academic  Year       ,       .       .       .  5 

Administration       ....  19 
Admission: — 

Requirements  for  ...        .  25 

To  Advanced  Standing         .        .  5° 

By  Examination     ....  46 

By  New  Plan          ....  48 

To  Freshman  Class       ...  25 

To  Department  of  Music     .        52,  127 

To  Department  of  Hygiene  5~,  106 

Of  Graduate  Students  ...  Si 

Of  Special  Students       ...  52 

Alumna  Association,  Officers  of  171 

American  Academy  in  Rome      .  152 

American  School  of   Classical 

Studies  IN  Athens  .       .       .  152 

Anglo-Saxon 84 

Archeology 53 

Architecture 54.  55 

Art 54 

Art  Collections     ....  i59 

Astronomy 58 

Bequest,  Forms  of        .       .       .  164 
Biblical   History,    Literature, 

AND  Interpretation      .       .  60 

Billings  Hall        ....  159 

Board 147 

Botany 62 

Calendar  5 

Certificates  in  Hygiene    .       .  167 

Chemistry 66 

Christlan  Association  ...  24 
College  Entrance  Examination 

Board 46 

Committees  of  Trustees     .       .  7 

Committees  of  Faculty       .       .  22 

Correspondence     ....  2 

Courses  of  Instruction      .       .  53 

Dante  Prize 113 

Degrees: — 

B.A.,  Requirements  for        .       .  143 

M.A.,  Requirem.ents  for       .        .  146 

Degrees  Conferred  in  1918      .  165 

Economics 68 

Education 72 

English  Composition    .       .       .  82 

English  Language        ...  84 

English  Literature      ...  76 
Examinations: — 

College 143 

Entrance 46 

Expenses 146 

Faculty 9 

Farnsworth  Art  Building  .       .  159 

Fees 148 

Fellows 18 

Fellowships 150 

Foundation  and  Purpose    .       .  23 


Page 

French 85 

Geology 89 

German 92 

Gothic 128 

Graduate  Instruction         .       .  146 

Greek 97 

Gymnasium 158 

Harmony  AND  Musical  Theory  .  121 

Health  Provisions        .       .       .  150 

Hebrew 61 

History 100 

Hygiene 106 

Italian 112 

Laboratories 160 

Latin 114 

Libraries 158 

Logic 129 

Maintenance  Fee          .       .        .  147 
Marine  Biological  Laboratory 

AT  Wood's  Hole     .       .       .  153 

Mathematics 118 

Meteorology 136 

Mineralogy 91 

Music: — 

Theory  of 121 

Instrumental  and  Vocal       .       .  126 

Equipment  in         ....  159 

Music  Hall 159 

Observatory i6o 

Pedagogy 72 

Philology 128 

Philosophy       .       .       .       .      129, 132 

Physics 134 

Physiology       ....      108,  142 

Political  Science  ....  102 

Psychology 130 

Reading  and  Speaking         .       .  137 

Residence 149 

Sanskrit 128 

Scholarships 150 

With  Stipend: — 

For  Graduates    .       .        .       .  152 

For  Undergraduates         .        .  153 

Without  Stipend    ....  168 

Scientific  Collections        .       .  160 

Sociology 68 

Spanish 139 

Special  Students    ....  52 

Stlt)io  Lessons       ....  57 

Students'  Aid  Society         .       .  157 

Summary  of  Students  .       .       .  170 

Trustees,  Board  of      .       .       .  6 

Tottion 146 

Vacations s 

Wellesley  Clubs    .       .       .       .  171 

Zoological  Station  in  Naples  .  153 

Zoology 140